JP2018171403A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: Identification information for showing a determination result by determination means is dynamically displayed in a dynamic display mode set by dynamic display mode setting means. During a period when the identification information is being displayed dynamically, voice is outputted by voice output means. A type of outputted voice is set according to stop timing of identification information in the dynamic display mode. As a result, voice corresponding to stop timing of the identification information is outputted, thus outputting sound effects to stop timing of the identification information and enhancing interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 169

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided on the surface of the game board, lottery of the game is won, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed.

JP 2012-217766 A

  However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the interest of games.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a determination means capable of executing determination, and a benefit that is advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. A privilege display means for providing the identification information for dynamically indicating the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means A dynamic display mode setting unit for setting the dynamic display mode, a voice output unit capable of outputting voice during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit, and a voice output thereof Voice type setting means for setting the type of voice output by the means, wherein the voice type setting means includes the identification information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting unit. Depending on the stop timing of Te, it is to set the type of the voice.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol strings formed from a plurality of identification information. The display mode setting unit sets a dynamic display mode in which the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed at different timings, and the voice type setting unit is the same at each timing in which the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed. The type of sound is set.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the voice output means can output a second voice different from the voice set by the voice type setting means. Yes, based on the determination result of the output timing determination means, the output timing determination means for determining the timing at which the voice set by the voice type setting means and the second voice are output, and the second Correction means for correcting the output mode of the sound.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the correction means causes the output timing of the voice and the output timing of the second voice to be within a predetermined period by the output timing discrimination means. In the case of duplication, the output of the second sound is prohibited.

  A gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, further comprising a volume adjusting unit capable of adjusting a volume of the sound output from the sound output unit or the second sound, and the correction. When the output of the second sound is prohibited by the means, the volume of the second sound is adjusted to mute by the volume adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the determination unit that can execute the determination and the determination result executed by the determination unit is a predetermined determination result. And a dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit A dynamic display mode setting means for setting the voice, a voice output means capable of outputting voice during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice output means for output. Voice type setting means for setting a voice type, the voice type setting means according to a stop timing of the identification information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting unit. The voice type It is to set a.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the dynamic display means can dynamically display a plurality of symbol sequences formed from a plurality of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting unit stops the plurality of symbol sequences at different timings. The dynamic display mode to be displayed is set, and the voice type setting means sets the same voice type at each timing of stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol strings.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the voice output means is capable of outputting a second voice different from the voice set by the voice type setting means, and the voice set by the voice type setting means and the second voice Output timing determining means for determining the timing at which the sound is output, and correcting means for correcting the output mode of the second sound based on the determination result of the output timing determining means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, the correcting means prohibits the output of the second sound when the output timing of the sound and the output timing of the second sound overlap within a predetermined period by the output timing determining means. It is.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, in the case of having a volume adjusting unit capable of adjusting the volume of the voice output by the voice output unit or the second voice and prohibiting the output of the second voice by the correcting unit, The volume of the second sound is adjusted to mute by the adjusting means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. It is a perspective front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the winning unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member and a 1st electrically-driven accessory. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of a drive unit and a 1st electrically-driven accessory. (A) And (b) is a front view of a drive unit and a 1st electrically-driven accessory. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 500 in the XVII-XVII line of Fig.10 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the winning hole unit along line XXb-XXb in FIG. is there. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. FIG. 22A is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in a range XXIIa in FIG. 21A, and FIG. 21B is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in a range XXIIb in FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a left wing member, (b) is a front perspective view of a right wing member. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 24 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the winning a prize mouth unit in range XXVIII of Drawing 27 (b). FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in a range XXIX in FIG. 2. (A) is a front view of the decorative symbol display device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30 (a). It is a disassembled perspective front view of a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a decoration symbol display apparatus. (A) is the front view which expand | deployed the inner reel, (b) is the front view which expand | deployed the outer reel. It is sectional drawing of the decorative design display apparatus in the XXXIV-XXXIV line | wire of Fig.30 (a). It is the elements on larger scale of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the range XXXV of FIG. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of Fig.36 (a). It is a front view of a segment display device. It is an exploded view of a segment display device. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd segment unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd segment unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 2nd segment unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 2nd segment unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit in the XLV-XLV line | wire of Fig.42 (a). It is a side view of a base member. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd seg unit in the XLVII-XLVII line of Fig.42 (a). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a side view of a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement member. It is sectional drawing of the displacement member in the LIII-LIII line | wire of Fig.51 (a). It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative design display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative design display device. (A) to (c) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57 (a). (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57 (a). (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57 (a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the rotation member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the LXIVb-LXIVb line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of an outer reel unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit in the LXVIb-LXVIb line | wire of Fig.66 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb line | wire of Fig.68 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of an annular member, (b) is sectional drawing of the annular member in the LXXb-LXXb line | wire of Fig.70 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the LXXIIb-LXXIIb line | wire of Fig.72 (a). (A) is the elements on larger scale of an outer reel unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit in the LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb line | wire of Fig.73 (a). (A) is a front view of the rotation member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotation member. (A) to (c) is a side view of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (A) to (c) is a front view of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the drive unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the drive unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement member. It is sectional drawing of a vertical displacement unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit in the line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of the left wing member in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (A) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left wing member in the XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb line of FIG. 98 (a), (c) is FIG. 98 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the right wing member in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 15th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the XCIXb-XCIXb line | wire of FIG. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a game board, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the Cb-Cb line | wire of Fig.100 (a). (A) is a front view of the 1st electric combination and drive unit in a 16th embodiment, (b) is a section of the 1st electric combination and drive unit 8530 in the (a) CIb-CIb line of Drawing 101 (a). It is a figure and (c) is sectional drawing of the 1st electrically-driven accessory and drive unit in the CIc-CIc line | wire of FIG. 101 (b). (A) And (b) is a side view of the 1st electrically-driven accessory and drive unit in 17th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the rotating member in 18th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotating member in the CVb-CVb line | wire of Fig.105 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is the front view which expand | deployed the inner reel. It is the front view which expand | deployed the outer reel. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the reel display at the normal time in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in time reduction. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the lottery result in the time reduction in a 1st control example, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content which shows a remaining short time frequency | count. It is the figure which showed the display content during the production of the special reach 1 in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed the display content of the reel display in the production of the special reach 2 in the 1st control example, (b) is the display content of the reel display when the big hit is established from the special reach 2 FIG. (A) is the figure which showed the display content when the conditions of the special reach 3 in a 1st control example were satisfied, (b) shows the display content of the reel stop display of the 1st change of the special reach 3. It is a figure. It is the figure which showed the display content of the reel display of the 2nd fluctuation | variation of special reach 3. FIG. It is a timing chart which showed the operation contents of various devices at the time of pseudo-continuous production in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in a 1st control example, a special symbol reservation ball storage area, a special symbol reservation ball execution area, and a normal symbol reservation ball storage area. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM202 of the main control apparatus 110 in a 1st control example, (b) is typical about the content of RAM203 of the main control apparatus 110 in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in a 1st control example, (b) is ROM in the main controller 110 in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the set 1st type selection table, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example, (b) was set in the fluctuation pattern selection table, It is the figure which showed typically the variation pattern table for jackpots, (c) is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (normal), (d) is the fluctuation pattern for deviation (probability change). It is the figure which showed the table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in a 1st control example, (b) is the content of RAM223 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) was set in the fluctuation pattern selection table FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for long variation. (A) is the figure which showed typically the symbol operation | movement table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the special effect scenario table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the symbol group storage area set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the reel operation confirmation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the state setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the operation control process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the outer reel control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the inner reel control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the displacement member control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop symbol setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal stop symbol setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the short time stop symbol setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the audio | voice output apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram of the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various images produced based on a drawing list. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the fluctuation | variation display layer 1 in a 2nd control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the fluctuation | variation display layer 2. FIG. It is the timing chart which showed the relationship between BGM and stop sound corresponding to the fluctuation pattern A in the 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed the relationship between BGM and stop sound corresponding to the fluctuation pattern B in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM202 of the main controller 110 in a 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection 2 table set to ROM of the main controller in a 2nd control example, (b) was set in the fluctuation pattern selection table FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern 2 table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in a 2nd control example, (b) is the content of RAM223 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the BGM classification selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the stop sound selection table set to this ROM. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice output apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice output apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is done. It is the flowchart which showed the display image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the command executed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interruption process. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the BGM correction process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice output apparatus in another example of a 2nd control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIG. 1 to FIG.
3, the first embodiment of the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”).
An embodiment when applied to 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 4, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 or a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a is played on the game board 1.
A launch rail (not shown) or the like for guiding to the front surface area 3 is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4 are a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface, and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side.
And are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). On the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
2 is provided. The frame button 22 is used when, for example, the aspect of the effect displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the effect of super reach is changed. It is operated by a person.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2)
A stamp or the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with a bill or a card inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the ball, lending of the ball is performed according to the operation. Is called.
Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium).
Lending balls are supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Return button 43
Is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and windmills, rails 76 and 77, general winning opening 63, first
The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is done. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player.
The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 77 formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by bending a belt-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
As in the case of the outer rail 77, an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a band-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 77. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed by dividing the two rails 76 and 77 and the resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening etc.
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 76 (FIG. 2
The return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the), and the situation where the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide path again is prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). First
The symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. Multiple L
The ED is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by the combination of the emission colors.

In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to a winning in either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. The jackpot type determined here is 15R probability variation jackpot,
4R probability variation jackpot and 15R regular jackpot are prepared. 1st symbol display device 37A, 3
7B shows not only whether the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if it is a big hit.

Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R regular jackpot” is the maximum number of rounds after 15 jackpots,
While shifting to the low-probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a short-time state.

In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, the state of the game that is neither probable nor short-lived (
Neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up).

During probability change and short time, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the second winning opening 14
The time for opening the first electric accessory 520 associated with 0 is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric combination 520 is in an opened state (open state), the second prize opening 140 is compared with a case where the first electric combination 520 is in a closed state (closed state).
The ball is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or during a short period of time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the short time, and the second winning prize 1
It is also possible to change at least one of the time when the first electric combination 520 attached to 40 is opened and the number of times the first electric combination 520 is opened per one time. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the time when the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened,
The number of times the first electric accessory 520 is released per round may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal case.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 includes a first winning port 64 and a second winning port.
The first symbol display device 37A, triggered by any one of the winning openings 140 (start prize)
The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 that display the variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in 37B, and the LED that displays the variation of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere of the first through gate 66. A configured second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 of the present embodiment are the main control device 1.
10 (see FIG. 4), the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display according to the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. And a displacement operation. Instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, for example, a gaming state may be displayed using a liquid crystal display.

Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device displays a display symbol (second symbol (
(Not shown)), the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” are alternately displayed for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Also, if the winning lottery results in a loss, the second symbol display device will display “
The symbol “x” is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 uses the first electric accessory 52 attached to the second winning opening 140 when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”).
It is configured such that 0 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal.
Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In the meantime, the probability of winning is increased during probability change or in a short time.
Even if other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 520 are used, if the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time is short, the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. Such time may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 520 may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second
A symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the change,
If the winning lottery result is a win, a “○” symbol will be displayed as the stop symbol for variable display.
If the winning lottery result is out of place, a symbol “x” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800.

In addition, the variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
37B, a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out in the case of winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out when winning in the second prize opening 140 are different, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins in the first prize opening 64 Is three,
The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric combination 520 is attached to the second winning prize opening 140. This first electric accessory 520
Is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, the first through gate 6
As a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to 6, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state). Thus, the ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second pattern is higher during probability change and during shorter time than normal,
In addition, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is short, “○” is displayed in the variation display of the second symbol.
The number of times that the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where the ball can be always won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. The ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”).
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim at winning big wins by obtaining many opportunities for winning big wins by winning at the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state, so that the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is allowed to pass. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into an open state, and 15 is obtained by winning the second winning opening 140.
It is more advantageous for the player to aim for R-probability jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). How to
It can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, after the predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the first jackpot lottery pattern is displayed. The symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the special winning opening 6 that is normally closed
5a is released for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis.
And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like attached to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is a first out opening 7
1 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 1
16 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100 ~
Reference numeral 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are coupled to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). Also,
A seal seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing sticker,
It can be known whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11.
2 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 allows the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 3
7A and 37B, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the display setting in the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device is executed.

Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
Work area). Note that the RAM 203 retains data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B,
Solenoid comprising a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, and the MPU 201 outputs signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the PU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is the pachinko machine 10
Even after the power is turned off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be held (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 has a ball launch unit 112 that has a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
a is controlled. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (
The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the operation handle 51 is not operated), and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display control device 114 such as display) or notice effect
The display mode setting and the like of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 performed in the above are controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 2
25, a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to each other. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The sound lamp control device 113 determines and determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110. The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800.
To change the mode displayed in, or to change the contents of the production at the time of super reach,
The display control device 114 is instructed. When the displayed mode is changed, information about the displayed mode after the change is included in order to display the decoration according to the displayed mode after the change on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. A rear image change command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the display control device 114 to the segment display device 60.
0 and a command (display command) representing the display content of the decorative symbol display device 800 are received.
In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Further, lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600, and the decorative symbol display device 800. Based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 includes the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. It controls the display of the 3rd symbol variation effect and the like. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby displaying the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 and the sound from the sound output device 226. The output can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and the RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a reference). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 is an AC 2 supplied from the outside.
Taking in the voltage of 4 volts, various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20
It generates a 12 volt voltage for driving a solenoid such as 9 and a motor, a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. Necessary voltages are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 2
51, the output of the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is set to a normal value for a time sufficient for the execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 shows a game board 1
FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of FIG. In FIG. 13, a state where the winning opening unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning opening unit 500 is a game formed by being partitioned by two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. It is inserted and arranged from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the region. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 300. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG.

In FIG. 8, the state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 disposed on the segment display device 600 are retracted on both the upper and lower sides is shown in FIG. The state where the provided displacement member 670 is projected to the center position in the vertical direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a rear case 40 formed in a box shape.
0, and a decorative symbol display device 800, a segment display device 600, and a decorative unit 700 are accommodated in the internal space of the back case 400.

The back case 400 includes a bottom wall 401 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall 402 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 401 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 401 is formed with an opening 401a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the segment display device 6 is formed through the opening 401a.
00 is arranged from the back side of the back case 400.

Three decorative symbol display devices 800 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction in the opening 401 a in the bottom wall 401 of the back case 400. The decorative symbol display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that are rotationally displaced in the vertical direction, and are decorated on the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the manner in which the symbol fluctuates (rotates). A detailed description of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described later.

The segment display device 600 is disposed on the bottom wall 401 of the back case 400,
The decorative symbol display device 800 is covered. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 800 is disposed between the gaps, so that the player side The decorative symbol display device 800 can be visually recognized.

Further, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the opposing base members 660 described above. The displacement member 670 is disposed on the decorative symbol display device 800. By displacing forward, it is possible to form an effect that makes the decorative symbol display device 800 invisible from the player side. A detailed description of the segment display device 600 will be described later.

The decoration unit 700 is formed in a box shape having a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the segment display device 600.
A pair is arranged above and below. The decoration unit 700 is formed of a transparent resin material and has a shape imitating a logo, a title, or the like of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, an LED base for irradiating light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700, and is formed so as to be able to irradiate the player side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29, the winning opening unit 500 will be described in detail. First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, the configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described.

FIG. 10A is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 10B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500.
FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 shows the base member 510.
2 is an exploded perspective view of the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the prize opening unit 500 is disposed on the front surface of the game board 13 (
5), a first electric accessory 520 that is rotatably supported inside the base member 510, and a drive that applies a driving force to the first electric accessory 520. The unit 530 is mainly provided.

The base member 510 includes a front base 511 disposed on the front side, and the front base 511.
And a back surface base 512 disposed at a predetermined interval.

The front base 511 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is formed from a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first protruding portion 511a that protrudes from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction to the back side, and a second protruding portion 5 that protrudes from the lower end portion to the back side in the central portion in the left-right direction.
11b and a second protrusion 511b and a third protrusion protruding at a position spaced apart from the second protrusion 511b in the left-right direction.
The protrusion 511c is mainly provided.

Also. The front base 511 is disposed at a position where the front surface is visible from the player side, and a pattern is formed on the front surface side by unevenness.

The first projecting portion 511a is in a closed state (a wing member 520L, 5
A plate member for preventing the game ball from being sent to the second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 512 when the tip of the 20R is positioned at the top of the rotation shaft (the shaft member JB1). It is.

That is, the first projecting portion 511a is formed at an upper portion between the opposed pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first projecting portion 511a is the diameter of the game ball. Is set smaller.

The first protrusion 511a is formed such that the upper surface of the first protrusion 511a is inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right ends. Thereby, the game ball sent to the upper part of the 1st protrusion part 511a can roll the upper surface, and can fall (flow down) below.

The second projecting portion 511b is formed to project in a horizontally long rectangular shape from the back side of the front base 511, and the vertical position of the upper end surface thereof is lower than the bottom surface of the second winning port 140 of the back base 512. Is set. The second projecting portion 511b includes a standing portion 511b1 standing in front of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512, an engaging portion 511b2 projecting from both left and right ends of the standing portion 511b1, and a bottom surface portion. It is mainly provided with a recessed portion 511b3 which is recessed.

In addition, a base member 511f including an LED that emits light to the lower side of the standing portion 511b1 is disposed on the second projecting portion 511b. The LEDs of the base member 511f are arranged in such a manner that light is emitted upward. Therefore, the periphery of the second winning opening 140 can be emitted by the LED.

The standing portions 511b1 are formed so as to stand upward from the upper end of the second projecting portion 511b, and are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction, and the standing tips are connected to each other. The standing portion 511b1 is formed such that the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is inclined downward toward the second winning port 140 (the back side), and the vertical position of the end portion on the second winning port 140 side is the second winning port 140. It is set to a height that matches the bottom surface. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be rolled to the second winning port 140 side. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 is the second winning opening 1
40 can be entered.

Moreover, the connection part of the standing part 511b1 provided in parallel is formed in the shape where the center position of the circumferential direction was dented below. Thereby, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 is transferred to the standing portion 511.
It is possible to easily stay at the center position in the left-right direction of b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning port 140 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 from colliding with the game ball sent later and being pushed out to the outside, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140. it can.

The engaging portion 511b2 is a portion that engages with left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and is formed to project from the left and right sides of the base end portion of the standing portion 511b1 toward the center of a shaft supporting portion 511d described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are fastened. Accordingly, the recessed portion 511b3
A screw can be inserted through a through hole 511b4 formed through the side surface on the back side.

The third projecting portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball to the first out port 71 formed in the back surface base 512, and is formed at two locations with the second winning port 140 sandwiched between the back surface base 512 and the second winning port 140. It is formed adjacent to both outer sides of the 1-out port 71 in the left-right direction. In other words, the third protrusion 511c is formed at a position separated in the left-right direction by the size in the left-right direction of the second protrusion 511b and the first out port 71.

The bottom surfaces of the third protrusions 511c are formed to be inclined downward toward the adjacent first out ports 71 (toward the left and right direction of the front base 511 (the left and right direction in FIG. 10A)). The lowest position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first out port 71. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the 3rd protrusion part 511c can be rolled toward the 1st out port 71, and can be made to enter the 1st out port 71.

The shaft support portions 511d are formed so as to project in an annular shape from the back surface side of the front base 511, and two shaft support portions 511d are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (FIG. 10 (a) vertical direction) across the standing portion 511b1. . The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed larger than the diameter of a shaft member JB1 described later.
Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted into the shaft support portion 511d.

The back base 512 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body having a front view shape larger than that of the front base 511 in a front view. Therefore, the player can directly visually recognize the front surface of the back base 512 that does not overlap the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

Further, since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent material, the front base 511 is forwardly provided.
In the overlapping portion, the back base 512 can be visually recognized through the front base 511. Further, the player can visually recognize the game ball sent between the back base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511.

The back base 512 is formed on both sides of the first winning port 64 formed at the upper end portion on the front side, the second winning port 140 formed below the first winning port 64, and the second winning port 140. The first out port 71 and the general winning port 63 formed in the upper part of the first out port 71 on the right side in front view.
And is mainly provided.

The first winning port 64 is recessed downward from the upper end of the substantially central position of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (FIG. 10 (a) left-right direction), and protrudes in both the front-rear direction along the recessed edge. It is formed. Further, the protruding front end on the front side (the front side of FIG. 10A) is closed by a plate member.

The concave shape of the first winning opening 64 is formed in such a size that a game ball can be inserted inside, and
The bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed to be inclined toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13.

The second winning port 140 is formed to penetrate the lower side of the first winning port 64 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 10A). The second winning opening 140 is formed in a square shape having a size larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Therefore, the game ball can be sent to the back side of the game board 13 through the second winning opening 140. Moreover, the 2nd prize winning opening 140 is provided with the recessed part 140a recessedly provided by the inner side surface of right and left.

The concave portion 140a is curved and formed around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, projections 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, can be accommodated inside thereof. That is, the inside of the second winning opening 140 is set such that the game ball can pass and the protrusions 523L and 523R are inserted.

The shaft holes 512a are recessed from the front to the rear on both the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. The shaft hole 512a is a groove for inserting a shaft member JB1 described later into the inside,
It is formed in a circular shape having a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first out port 71 is formed through the left and right sides of the second winning port 140. 1st outlet 7
Reference numeral 1 denotes a hole for collecting a game ball that has flowed down a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and has a width dimension in the vertical direction (short direction). It is set to be larger than the diameter. The first out port 71 is formed such that the bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined to the back side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first out port 71 is the game board 1.
3 can be sent to the back side.

The first out port 71 is formed with a guide wall 512b that is connected to the bottom surface and protrudes to the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving the game ball that has flowed down the game area on its upper surface and sending it to the first out port 71, and its upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side.

A plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in parallel on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall 512b from being damaged when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b.

The fastening between the front base 511 and the back base 512 is performed by the above-described through hole 511b4 and the fastening hole 512c formed through the back base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, with the front base 511 and the rear base 512 combined in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and the screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. Can be done.

The first electric accessory 520 is a left wing member 520 </ b> L disposed on the left side of the second winning opening 140 in front view.
And the right wing member 520R arranged on the right side when viewed from the front are formed as one unit.

The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are bulged portions 524L and 524R which will be described later.
Since the other members are formed symmetrically with respect to the second winning opening 140, only the left wing member 520L is described except for the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Detailed description of the member 520R is omitted.

Further, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are in a first state (closed state) in which a corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is positioned above the gravity direction by driving a solenoid 531 of a drive unit 530 described later. Displacement is possible in the second state (open state) in which the corner on the far side from the through-hole 521L is displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 140, and unless otherwise specified, the first state Shall be explained. Further, the opposite side surfaces of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R in the first state will be described with reference numerals of the side surfaces 526L and 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at a lower end portion in the gravity direction, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a rear surface from the vicinity of the through hole 521L. Projection 523L projecting on the side, and through hole 5
A recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the 21L side, and a side surface 526L
Bulging portion 524L protruding from the shaft and a shaft member JB1 inserted into the through hole 521L are mainly provided. A detailed description of the bulging portion 524L will be described later.

The shaft member JB1 is a columnar bar member formed from a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, and has a through hole 521L.
The outer diameter is smaller than the inner diameter.

Further, the shaft member JB1 has an axial length that is substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the distance from the recessed front end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the back side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are assembled, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the rear base 51
2 side end) is inserted inside the shaft hole 512a, and the other side (end on the front base 511 side) is inserted inside the shaft support 511d, so that the shaft member JB1 is inserted into the front base 511 and the back base. 512.

The left wing member 520L has front and rear bases 511 and 512 in the front-rear direction.
Is set to be smaller than the distance between the two. Therefore, when the front base 511 and the back base 512 are assembled, the blade member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the back base 512 by inserting the shaft member JB1 through the through hole 521L. .

The recess 522L is formed to be recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the recessed dimension is set smaller than the protruding distance of the shaft support 511d. Further, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner peripheral surface is set to be larger than the radial dimension of the shaft support portion 511d from the axis to the outer peripheral surface.

Therefore, when the wing member 520L is disposed between the front base 511 and the back surface base 512, the front surface of the wing member 520L and the back surface of the front base 511 can be prevented from being grounded, and the wing member 520L and the front surface can be prevented. The contact portion with the base 511 is connected to the recess 522L and the shaft support 5
11d. Accordingly, it is possible to partially ground the wing member 520L and the front base 511. As a result, when the wing member 520L is rotated by driving a solenoid 531 which will be described later, the resistance acting on the wing member 520L can be reduced and the wing member 520L can be easily rotated.

Further, since the shaft support portion 511d can be housed inside the recess 522L, the front base 5
11 and the back surface base 512 can be reduced in distance. As a result, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening unit 500 can be reduced.

Here, conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L of the wing member 520L.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to fit the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L,
When the wing member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing the parts. For this reason, there has been a problem that the cost of parts becomes high.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shaft member JB1 is formed in the through hole 5 formed in the wing member 520L.
The wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 can be separately provided in the winning opening unit 500. Therefore, only the wing member 520L can be replaced when the wing member 520L is damaged. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component costs.

Further, as described above, the fastening of the front base 511 to the back base 512 can be performed from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, the rear base 512 is changed to the front base 5 with the prize opening unit 500 attached to the game board 13.
11 can be removed. As a result, component replacement of the wing member 520L can be easily performed.

That is, when the front base 511 is removed from the back side of the back base 512, the game board 1
3, it is necessary to remove the front base 511 from the rear base 512 after removing the prize opening unit 500. Since the front base 511 is formed so as to be removable from the front side, the front base 511 is easily removed. be able to. As a result, component replacement of the wing member 520L can be easily performed.

Here, if the front base 511 is removable from the front side of the back base 512, the heads of screws and the like that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be visually recognized from the player side (front side), and the player can By visually recognizing the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512, the player's interest may be impaired.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are fastened using the space of the recessed portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511. That is, from the lower side of the front base 511, a through hole 5 is inserted by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3.
A screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c via 11b4. Therefore, the through hole 511
Even in a state where the front base 511 is positioned on the front side of b4, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be fastened by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the heads such as screws for fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be hardly seen from the player side (front side). As a result, the player can move the front base 511 and the rear base 512.
By visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens, the player's interest can be prevented from being impaired.

Usually, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600 that can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13 are set at the height of the player's eyes. Accordingly, the winning opening unit 500 is disposed below the player's eye level. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512 from the player side, and the player visually recognizes the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512. Can be prevented from being damaged.

Since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent resin material, the head of the screw can be visually recognized through the front base 511. However, as described above, the front base 511 has irregularities on the front side. Since the pattern is formed, light can be emitted in the other direction due to the difference in thickness of the plate. Thereby, the head of the screw visible through the front base 511 can be blurred. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Next, the drive unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG.
4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. FIG. 15A and FIG.
FIG. 5 is a side view of a drive unit 530 and a first electric accessory 520. 16 (a) and 16 (
b) is a front view of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

15 (a) and 16 (a) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIGS. 15 (b) and 16 (b) illustrate the first electric motor. A state in which the accessory 520 is located in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531 and its solenoid 5.
31, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, and a first case member 534 in which the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are disposed in a displaceable state. And a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

The solenoid 531 includes an electric wire inside, a main body portion 531a that generates an electromagnetic force when electric power flows through the electric wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body portion, and the movable body. And an engagement portion 531c attached to the distal end portion of the main body.

The main body 531a is formed in a prismatic shape that is long in the front-rear direction, and an electric wire is disposed inside. On the front side of the main body 531a, a recess is formed on the back side, and a movable body 531b formed in a columnar shape is disposed inside the recess.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can be slid to the back side (inside the main body portion 531a) by applying electric power to the electric wire of the main body portion 531a to generate electromagnetic force.

The engaging part 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b opposite to the main body part 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in a disk shape having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and the axis thereof is disposed so as to be substantially collinear with the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of a sliding member 532 described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-back direction (FIG. 15A left-right direction) with the displacement of the movable body 531b.

The sliding member 532 is formed in a substantially E shape when viewed from above, and the connecting portion 5 extending in the left-right direction.
32a and two first protrusions 532 projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a to the front side.
b and a second protrusion 532c which is located in the middle of the two first protrusions 532b and protrudes from the front side.

The sliding member 532 is formed such that the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral surface of the first case member 534 described later. This
The sliding member 532 can be accommodated and disposed inside the first case member 534.

The connecting portion 532a is formed on the left and right sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c, the concave portion 532a1 provided on the back side, the engaging groove 532a2 connected to the front side of the concave portion 532a1 and provided on the upper surface side. The cut portion 532a3 is mainly provided and formed.

As described above, the recess 532a1 is formed in the engagement groove 532a2 in the engagement portion 5 of the solenoid 531.
This is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a when 31c is inserted. That is, the concave portion 532a1 is formed in an arc shape whose concave surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. Thereby, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is obtained.
Can be prevented from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set larger than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c. The engaging groove 532a2 is set such that the width dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the diameter of the engaging portion 531c, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the engaging portion 531c. The portion 531c is formed larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the engagement groove 532a
The engaging portion 531c can be inserted into the inner side.

The notch 532a3 is a cut for facilitating elastic deformation of the sliding member 532 when connecting a first protrusion 532b described later to the rotating member 533. As described above, the second protrusion 53 is provided.
It is formed on both the left and right sides of the base end of 2c, and is cut toward the back side.

The first protrusion 532b includes an engagement hole 532d formed to penetrate in the left-right direction. Engagement hole 53
2d is formed in the shape of a long hole in the front-rear direction, and is recessed from the end on the front side to the lower side in the gravitational direction and from the end on the rear side to the lower side in the gravitational direction. Second opening 53
2d2 is mainly provided. The detailed description of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be described later.

The engagement hole 532d is set such that the vertical width dimension at the center in the front-rear direction (portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the vertical dimension of the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 described later. Is done. Thereby, the protrusion 5 is formed inside the engagement hole 532d.
33b can be arranged.

As described above, the second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b and is formed so as to protrude from the front side. Moreover, the 2nd protrusion 532c is provided with the standing wall 532c1 standing upright on the front end side on the opposite side to the connection part 532a. The standing wall 532c1
Will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 533 is a plate-like body formed in a substantially L shape in a side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction.
Are arranged side by side, and a portion between one end side is connected by a connecting portion 533a. The clearance between the two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-like bodies).

In addition, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 533 (the dimension between the opposing surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set to be smaller than the dimension between the opposing insides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. The Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 facing each other.

The rotating member 533 has a rotating shaft 533 that protrudes from the bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view to the left and right sides.
c, a protrusion 533b that protrudes from the end on one end side of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a drive portion 533d that is formed to be recessed at the tip on the other end side of the substantially L-shaped side view. Formed in preparation.

The rotating shaft 533c is formed to project from the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the projecting tip surfaces is set to be approximately the same as the width of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Further, the projecting dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, while receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside the recessed part 534a of the 1st case member 534 mentioned later, the 2nd case member 535 is assembled | attached to the 1st case member 534, and the rotating member 533 is attached to the 1st case member 534 and the 1st case member 534. The two case members 535 can be held in a rotatable state.

The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude on both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces is a distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. It is set approximately the same as the dimensions. The protrusion dimension of the protrusion 533b is set larger than the width dimension of the first protrusion 532b in the left-right direction. Therefore, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by inserting the protrusion 533b into the engagement hole 532d of the first protrusion 532b.

The sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 are connected by elastically deforming the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the facing distance between the two first protrusions 532b. it can. In this case, as described above, the slit 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, so that the space between the two first protrusions 532b can be easily widened. As a result, the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Furthermore, the distance dimension between the opposing side surfaces of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction is the first dimension.
The distance dimension between the outer surfaces of the protrusions 532b is substantially the same as the distance between the opposing surfaces, or the first protrusion 532
It is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposed outer surfaces of b. Thereby, in the state which has arrange | positioned the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 inside the 1st case member 534, it can suppress that the 1st protrusion 532b elastically deforms to the left-right direction outer side. As a result, the connection between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be prevented from being disconnected.

The drive unit 533d is formed to be recessed from the front side toward the back side. Drive unit 533d
Can accommodate the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing member 520L on the inner side. That is, the drive unit 533
d is set to a dimension larger in the vertical direction than the protrusions 523L and 523R. Drive unit 533
By accommodating the protrusions 523L and 523R in d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state in accordance with the displacement of the drive unit 533d. The first electric accessory 52
A detailed description of the zero displacement will be given later.

The first case member 534 is formed in a substantially square shape in front view with an opening inside, and is extended in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 is notched on the lower side of the back surface side, and the second case member 535 can be disposed in the notched portion.

The first case member 534 is mainly provided with a recess 534a that is recessed in the front side in a notch portion on the back side, and a standing portion 534b that is erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess that accommodates the rotation shaft 533c of the rotation member 533 on the inner side, and is recessed in a shape larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 533c. Therefore, the rotating shaft 53
The rotating member 533 can be disposed inside the first case member 534 by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 in a state where the 3c is housed inside.

The standing portion 534b is formed such that the lower inner peripheral surface of the second winning port 140 of the back base 512 and the standing tip surface thereof are set at the same height, are extended to the back side, and are inclined downward. Is done.
Thus, in a state where the drive unit 530 is disposed on the back surface of the back surface base 512, the second case member 5 is caused by rolling the game ball that has entered the second winning port 140 on the upper surface of the standing portion 534b.
35 can be sent.

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 has a through-hole 535a formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction.
Is provided.

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball. As described above, the game ball sent to the second case member 535 by rolling with the upper portion of the standing portion 534b is passed through the through hole 5.
The ball can be sent downward via 35a. As a result, the game balls that have flowed down the game area and entered the second winning opening 140 can be collected.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 15A and FIG. 16A, in a state where the first electric accessory 520 is positioned in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is disposed around the movable body 531b. At the same time, the urging force of an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a is projected to the front side (left side in FIG. 15A).

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is provided on the back side (second opening 53) of the engagement hole 532d.
2d2 side). In addition, the rotation member 533 is positioned between the drive unit 533d and the rotation shaft 533c at the position of the center of gravity in a side view. That is, the rotating member 533 includes the rotating shaft 53.
Around the axis 3c, the rotational force in the direction of pushing down the drive unit 533d is always applied.

Therefore, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is formed on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (second opening 533).
Even in the state of being located on the d2 side), the second opening 533d2 can be stagnated at the upper portion without being guided to the inside (below the engagement hole 532d (the lower side in FIG. 15A)).

Further, since the drive unit 533d is pushed down, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R housed inside the drive unit 533d are pushed down. Thus, the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are in a state where the corners farther from the through holes 521L and 521R are positioned above the through holes 521L and 521R (first state (see FIG. 16A)). The

As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, when electric power is applied to the main body portion 531a of the solenoid 531, the movable body 531b is moved to the main body portion 53 by the electromagnetic force generated in the main body portion 531a.
It is drawn inside 1a.

Therefore, with the displacement of the movable body 531b, the sliding member 532 connected to the distal end side of the movable body 531b is slid to the rear side (right side in FIG. 15B). As described above, the rotating member 533 is always in a state in which the rotational force in the direction of pushing down the driving unit 533d is applied around the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, the engaging hole 532d of the sliding member 532 is engaged. The projection 533b housed inside the second opening 533d2 is slid within the second opening 533d2 without being caught by the proximal end portion.

The protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 is in contact with the front end (first opening 532d1 side) end of the engagement hole 532d at the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, and the rear side (FIG. 15). (B) It is displaced to the right side. In this case, since the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the rotation shaft 533c, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the driving unit 533d can be displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 15B). As a result, the wing member 520L has a through hole 521L,
Rotating about the axis of 521R, a state where the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are displaced left and right (second state (see FIG. 16B)).

On the other hand, the displacement from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the power supply to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531. Accordingly, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body portion 531a disappears, so that the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a are disposed around the movable body 531b.
Due to the urging force of an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the movable body 531b and the front side (FIG. 1).
5 (a) left side). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the first state position.

As described above, since the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, the depth of the recess in the lower side of the first opening 532d1 in the gravitational direction (lower side in FIG. 15B) is small. It is formed deeper toward the back side (right side in FIG. 15B).

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 is caused to collide with the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, thereby causing the protrusion 533b to move in the direction of gravity. It can be easily displaced.

Next, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 (a)
And FIG.17 (b) is the winning opening unit 50 in the XVII-XVII line of Fig.10 (a).
FIG. In FIG. 17A, the first electric combination 520 is positioned in the first state, and in FIG. 17B, the state where the first electric combination 520 is positioned in the second state is illustrated. .

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are the first protrusions 511a. Located in the vicinity. As a result, the left and right wing members 5 are in the first state in which the first electric accessory 520 is
It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down between 20L and 520R.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is movable from the inside of the main body portion 531a.
b is in an overhanging state. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is in a state of being located on the front side (left side in FIG. 17A). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is disposed in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140.

In this case, the standing tip of the standing wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 17A))
The distance dimension L1 from the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes forward, the game ball can flow between the left and right wing members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. That is, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534 b of the first case member 534 is replaced with the sliding member 5.
The rolling of the game ball can be stopped by colliding with 32 standing walls 532c1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the store side is disadvantageous even if the player continues to play the game.

In the present embodiment, a sensor device SE1 that detects that a game ball has entered the second winning port 140 is disposed in the flow path of the game ball of the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534, the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning port 140.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are more than in the first state. Is also separated from the first projecting portion 511a, and the separated distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball.
As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area are moved to the side surfaces 52 of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R.
6L and 526R can be received and rolled to the second winning port 140. That is, the first
When the electric accessory 520 is set to the second state, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 has the movable body 531b inside the main body portion 531a.
Is assumed to have been drawn. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is in a state of being located on the back side (right side in FIG. 17B). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is disposed at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the standing tip of the standing wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 17B))
The distance dimension L2 from the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is
It is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Thus, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right wing members 520L,
520R can be displaced to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the second winning opening 140, and the gaming ball inserted into the second winning opening 140 is formed on the first case member 534. The setting portion 534b can be rolled and sent to the second case member 535.

Furthermore, since the standing wall 532c1 can be slid and displaced in a direction substantially coincident with the rolling direction of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, the wing member 520L, When the 520R is broken (or is fraudulent) and opened, the standing wall 53
It is possible to suppress the game ball stopped by colliding with 2c1 from being pushed out to the opposite side to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is moved to the solenoid 53.
It is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged at the second winning port 140 when it is opened by driving 1 and a game ball can be inserted into the second winning port 140. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the inside of the second winning opening when the first electric accessory 520 is opened.

Next, referring to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the first electric accessory 520 is caused by a player's fraud.
The case where it is displaced from the first state to the second state will be described. FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B are front views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 19A and FIG. 19B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.

18A and 18B, the front base 51 is used for easy understanding.
1 is shown as being transparent. 19A shows the first electric combination 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state, and FIG. 19B shows the case where only the first electric combination 520 is displaced from the first state. This state is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the first electric combination 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state only by the first electric combination 520 due to a player's fraud (goat action). The protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are provided in the second opening 53 of the engagement hole 532d.
It is displaced inside 2d2. That is, since the space in which the protrusions 523L and 523R can be displaced is formed, it is possible to prevent the first electric combination 520 from being damaged when the first electric combination 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20A and FIG. 11B, the displacement of the standing portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to a player's fraudulent act will be described. FIG. 20 (a)
FIG. 20 is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. .

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's urging action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 531
In addition, the position of the sliding member 532 is not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, the standing wall 532c
The distance dimension L1 from the standing standing tip 1 (end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20 (a)) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 It is set smaller than the diameter.

Here, conventionally, a second winning port 140 formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members 520L and 520R disposed between the second winning port 140, and the pair of wing members 5
Driving means (solenoid 531) that opens or closes by applying a driving force to 20L and 520R
And a pair of wing members 520L and 520 by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531).
When R is opened, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), the ball is placed at an allowable position allowing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a restricting unit that is disposed at a restricting position that restricts the entry of a game ball into the second winning port 140.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated,
For example, since the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside and the restricting means can be displaced from the restricting position to the permitting position, the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening 140. There was a problem that the effect of restricting was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the standing wall 532 is in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is opened from the outside.
Since the arrangement of c1 is formed so as to be maintained at the restriction position, it is possible to suppress the standing wall 532c1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily restrict illegally entering the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

That is, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed or the pair of wing members 520L.
, 520R is opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated, and the standing wall 532c is operated.
The distance dimension L3 from the standing tip of 1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 20B)) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is It is set smaller than the diameter. Therefore, the first winning combination 520 is caused by the player's fraudulent act.
Even if it is possible to send a game ball, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. Accordingly, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state (the game ball can be sent to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the gaming ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate entering the ball.

In this case, the standing wall 532c1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. There is no need for a separate member that restricts illegal entry into the winning opening 140.
Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a case where the second protrusion 532c is further pushed to the back side when the first electric actor 520 is brought into the second state due to the player's illegal act will be described. . FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 22A shows the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIa of FIG.
FIG. 22B is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIb of FIG. 21B.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the second opening 532d2 has a front side (FIG. 22 (a
) A protrusion 532d3 protruding from the inner surface of the left side) is formed. Further, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is formed with a notch 533b1 formed by cutting the outer peripheral surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed in shapes corresponding to the outer diameters. That is, the protrusion shape of the protrusion 532d3 and the cut shape of the notch 533b1 in a side view are substantially the same.

Therefore, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed to the back side from the state in which only the first electric accessory 520 shown in FIG. 21A and FIG. Then, the protrusion 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch 533b1, and the displacement is restricted to the back side of the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532). As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state due to the player's fraudulent act, the game ball is entered into the second winning port 140 and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is placed. It is possible to suppress the ball being sent by rolling.

In the present embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22A). As a result, the protrusion 532d3 is moved to the notch 5
When inserted inside 33b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined toward the back side upward, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further moved to the back side with the protrusion 532d3 inserted into the notch 532b1. The direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the protrusion 532d3 and the notch 532b1 when the force pushing into the protrusion 532d3 can be the direction in which the protrusion 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Accordingly, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be prevented from coming out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state by the player's illegal act,
It is possible to reliably suppress the ball entering the winning opening 140 and rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 to be sent.

In other words, the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) is applied to the pair of wing members 520L, 52.
The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to 0R, and the transmission mechanism has an open slide position (position shown in FIG. 17B) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 17A) by the driving force of the drive means (solenoid 531). And a pair of wing members 520L, 5 which are rotated to the open rotation position by the slide displacement of the slide member 532 to the open slide position.
20R, and a rotating member 533 that closes the pair of wing members 520L and 520R by being rotated to the closing rotation position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closing slide position, and the standing wall 532c1 is a sliding member. When the sliding member 532 is slid and displaced to the open slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is disposed at the allowable position, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the closed slide position, the standing wall is disposed. When the rotation member 533 is disposed at the open rotation position in a state in which 532c1 is disposed at the restriction position and the sliding member 532 is disposed at the closed slide position, the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged. As a result, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position is restricted, so that the game ball is moved to the second winning opening 14.
It is easy to regulate illegally entering to 0.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members 520L and 520R is illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotation position with the sliding member 532 disposed at the closed slide position. Is done. In such a state, since the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is restricted.
The restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (the restricting means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside and the game ball is passed between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R,
The restriction means can restrict the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140.

Further, an engagement hole 532d extends from one of the sliding member 532 and the rotation member 533, and a projection 533b projects from the other, and the projection 533b slides along the engagement hole 532d. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engaging hole 532d, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to release the regulation while reducing the size.

That is, a means for restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position by using the engaging hole 532d and the protrusion 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 and rotating the same. Since it can be formed and it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by adopting a structure in which the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, it is difficult to make unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside, and the restriction (engagement) is released accordingly. It can be difficult.

Next, referring to FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the bulging portions 52 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
4L and 524R will be described in detail. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23B is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 24A is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 24B is XXIVb-XXI in FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 500 in a Vb line.

In FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), the left-right direction when viewed in perspective is reversed between FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). Further, in FIG. 24A, the front base 511 is shown in a transparent manner. Further, in FIG. 24B, the front base 511 transparently viewed in FIG. 24A is shown opaque. Moreover, in FIG.24 (b), side surface 526L, 526R.
The rolling direction of the game ball that rolls is indicated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the through hole 521L side, and the front side (FIG. 24 (b) arrow F).
Side) end surface. On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end portion on the through hole 521R side and at the back side (FIG. 24B).
It is formed continuously with the end face on the arrow B side.

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 24B).

Further, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with a first region that is continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and has a size that does not contact the game ball guided through the first region. The bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, and the side surfaces 526L and 5 of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are formed.
The first region of 26R and the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. Arranged in different directions.

Further, the bulging portion 524L has an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521L at the front side (FIG. 24B).
It is formed to be inclined toward the through hole 521L from the lower side toward the back side (upper side in FIG. 24B). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R is formed such that an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R from the back side to the front side.

Next, referring to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, the side surfaces 526 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
A case where a game ball is sent to L and 526R will be described. FIG. 25A and FIG. 25B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that FIG. 25A, FIG. 25B, FIG. 26A, and FIG.
This corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the winning prize opening unit 500 in FIG. Further, FIG. 25A and FIG.
), The transition states of the game balls when the game balls are sent from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 are sequentially illustrated. In FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B, the transition state of the game ball when the game ball is sent only to the left wing member 520L is illustrated in order.

As shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B, when game balls are sent to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R roll. The game balls to be rolled can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulging portions 524L, 524R.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end face. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls to the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L.

In this case, the bulging portion 524L has an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521L at the front side (FIG. 25 (
b) Since it is formed to be inclined toward the through hole 521L from the lower side to the rear side (the upper side in FIG. 25 (b)), when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed to be connected to the end surface on the back side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is rolled to the front side by rolling on the side surface 526R while being in contact with the bulging portion 524R.

In this case, the bulging portion 524R has an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R at the back side (FIG. 25 (
b) Since it is formed to be inclined toward the through hole 521R from the front side to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25B), when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging portion 524R, It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

Therefore, the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be brought closer to the back side, while the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, when game balls are sent from both the left and right sides, it is possible to suppress a frontal collision of the game balls sent from the left and right.

Here, conventionally, there is a ball entrance (second winning port 140) in which a game ball can be entered and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and displacement. A gaming machine including a guide member (first electric accessory 520) formed in a possible manner is known. As the guide members, for example, a pair of wing members (feather members 520L and 520R) having a guide surface for guiding a game ball to the entrance and being disposed with the entrance end interposed therebetween and rotatably supported on the base end side. ) Is exemplified.

A first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of the other wing member. A technique for providing the second grooves on the entire surface of each is disclosed. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 52) in one of the wing members (one of the wing members 520L, 520R).
6R) and one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R), even when the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R), the respective game balls are different from each other. It can be biased in the direction (one on the glass plate side and the other on the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can smoothly enter the second winning opening 140.

However, the above-described conventional technique has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. Further, a game ball that has entered from one side of the guide member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) and the other side of the guide member (
The other of the wing members 520L and 520R) may pass through,
There is a problem that the interest of the player is impaired because the game ball is not entered into the entrance (second winning entrance 140).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 has a pair of bulging portions formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls that protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R and roll on the side surfaces 526L and 526R. 524L and 524R, and the pair of bulged portions 524L and 524R are provided on the side surface 526L.
, 526R are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, so that the game balls guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L, 526R are swollen by the bulging portions 524L, 524.
By abutting against R, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

In addition, the pair of bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, so that the pair of wing members 52
A game ball that has entered from one side of 0L and 520R can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, one side of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (the wing members 520L and 520R
A game ball entering from either one of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (the wing member 52)
It is possible to suppress the passage through either 0L or 520R. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

Further, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of wing members 520L and 520R that are disposed with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween and rotatably supported on the base end side, and a pair of bulging portions 524L,
524R protrudes from the respective side surfaces 526L, 526R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and the bulging portions 524L, 524R and the other wing of the one wing member 520L, 520R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. The bulging part 52 in the members 520L and 520R
4L and 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, so that the game balls guided (rolled) along the side surfaces 526L and 526R By abutting against the bulging portions 524L and 524R, it is possible to reliably bias such game balls. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the second winning opening 140 and to prevent clogging of the balls.

Further, the bulging portions 524L and 524R in one wing member 520L and 520R and the bulging portions 524L and 524R in the other wing member 520L and 520R are side surfaces 526L and 526, respectively.
One of the wing members 520L is arranged at a different position in a direction orthogonal to the direction along which the game ball is guided along R (the direction from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R).
, The game ball that has entered the side surface 526L, 526R of the other wing member 520L,
When reaching the side surfaces 5.26L and 526R in 520R, the game balls can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R in the other wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached into the side surfaces 526L and 526R in one wing member 520L and 520R passes through the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the other wing member.
As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

In other words, the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are formed with bulging portions 524L and 524R at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the game balls rolled from the left and right are moved to different positions in the front-rear direction. Can be moved. Therefore, when a game ball is sent from both the left and right sides, it is possible to suppress a frontal collision of the game balls sent from the left and right. As a result, it is possible to suppress the time required for the game ball to enter the second winning port 140.

That is, by making the positions where the game balls collide differ from each other in the front-rear direction on the left and right, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 25, the game ball on the left side brought close to the back side is moved to the back side (FIG. 25 (
b) It is easy to bounce upward. On the other hand, the right game ball brought close to the front side tends to bounce back to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25B) due to the collision.

Therefore, one game ball (rolling the left wing member 520L in this embodiment) can be easily entered into the second winning opening 140, and the other game ball is rebounded to the front side, thereby causing a collision. When this is done, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being too far away from the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the second game ball entering the second winning opening 140 later into the second winning opening 140. As a result, when game balls are sent to the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time taken for the game balls on both sides to enter the second winning opening 140 can be shortened, and the game progresses smoothly. Can proceed.

Further, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R project from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the base end side (through hole 521 side) than the distal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L and 526R. It is possible to secure a rollable region until the game ball to be in contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, a decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed correspondingly, and the second winning opening 140 can be smoothly entered.

Furthermore, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are projected from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the base end side than the distal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, thereby the bulging portions 524L and 524R.
It is possible to suppress the path of the game ball biased against 24R from returning to the path before the bias before reaching the front of the entrance (the end of the guide surface). That is, the game ball can be easily sent from the side surfaces 526L and 526R to the entrance with the biased state.

In addition, as described above, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with the first region continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and are not in contact with the game ball guided through the first region. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed in such a size, the side surfaces 526L and 526R
When the game ball that has entered the field rolls in the first area, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball and to smoothly enter the second winning opening 140.

In this case, one of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (the wing member 520L,
The first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R and the other wing member (one of 520R)
Since the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R on the other one of the wing members 520L and 520R) is arranged at a different position in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. , One wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R)
The first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R and the other wing member (the wing members 520L and 52
Even when game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) through the first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R on the other side of 0R, the respective game balls can be biased in different directions. 2 It is possible to smoothly enter the winning opening 140.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
When a game ball is sent to either one of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R
The game ball is brought into contact with the bulging portion 524L or the bulging portion 524R of the ball, thereby preventing the game ball from rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other left and right wing members 520L and 520R and dropping from the tip thereof. it can.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end face. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls to the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be brought closer to the bulging portion 524R side formed on the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulging portions 524L and 524 formed on the left and right wing members 520L and 520R.
Since R is formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, left wing member 520L or right wing member 520
The left wing member 520L or the right wing member 5 is a game ball that rolls either one of R toward the second prize opening side.
It can be rolled (closed) to a position coinciding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on either side of 20R in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled to the back side (approaching) and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. Position. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball is rolled (approached) to the front side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. Position.

Thereby, when the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is high, the game ball moves to the side surface 52 of the other left wing member 520L or right wing member 520R.
It is possible to suppress riding on 6L and 526R.

Here, the conventional prize opening unit 500 includes the side surfaces 526L and 526 of the first electric accessory 520.
Since R is formed on a smooth surface, a game ball sent from one of the first electric accessories 520 rides on the other wing member 520L, 520R, and flows down from the tip of the other wing member 520L, 520R. There was a problem of being thrown into.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction in the first electric accessory 520, the game ball rolled from one wing member is used. It can be rolled to a position that substantially coincides with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the other wing member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game ball rolling the one wing member 520L, 520R is caused to collide with the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R, so that the game ball is a side surface 526L of the other wing member 520L, 520R, The wing member 520L, 5
It is possible to suppress a ball being sent from the tip of 20R to the game area.

Next, the recessed portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27A is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27B is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 28 (a) and 28 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 27 (b). In FIG. 28A, the first electric accessory 520 is used.
Is in the first state, and FIG. 28B shows the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portions 511b2 formed on the second projecting portion 511b of the front base 511 are recessed portions 525L, 52 of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, respectively.
It is arranged inside 5R.

In the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the bulging portion 524L of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are provided.
, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side is in contact with the end (see FIG. 28A), and in the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the bulging portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R 524
The L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side and the opposite end are brought into contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 is brought into contact with the end portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R. Therefore, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

Further, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axes of the through holes 521L and 521R is caused by its own weight so that the corners far from the through holes 521L and 521R of the wing members 520L and 520R are directed to the second prize opening 140 side. The direction of rotation. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portion 525L
, 525R can be prevented from rotating by its own weight, and the wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from rotating by their own weights by contacting the end portions of the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of the 525R. It can be held in the first state.

In the first state, the bulging portion 524L of the recessed portions 525L and 525R is formed in the engaging portion 511b2.
, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side abut, the wing members 520L, 5
The side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R of 20R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, the rigidity of the contact portion can be increased, so that the wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being damaged due to contact with the engagement portion 511b2.

That is, in the present embodiment, the base member 5 that rotatably supports the wing members 520L and 520R.
10 and the base member 510 includes an engaging portion 511b2 that restricts the rotation of the wing members 520L and 520R by contacting the wing members 520L and 520R.
Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R are brought into contact with the ten engaging portions 511b2, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. That is, the bulging portions 524L, 5
24R is a portion projecting from the wing members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R), and therefore the portion of the wing members 520L and 520R where the rigidity is relatively increased is the base member 51.
Since it can be used as a stopper to be brought into contact with the zero engaging portion 511b2, the wing member 52 is accordingly provided.
Damage to 0L and 520R can be suppressed.

Further, the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed substantially flush with the side surfaces on the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and are substantially surface on the side surfaces on the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R in the closed state. The side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed in one are at least the base member 510
Since the abutment portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is located at a position far from the rotation shaft (through holes 521L, 521R) (side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L, 524R).
The reaction force input to the wing members 520L and 520R from the engaging portion 511b2 can be reduced by the amount that can be brought into contact with the wing member 511b2. Therefore, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Further, for example, the protruding front end surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are used as the engaging portions 511 of the base member 510.
Compared with the case where it abuts against b2, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is connected to the second winning opening 1
It can be separated from 40, and the space used as the flow path to the 2nd prize winning opening 140 can be ensured. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the base end side surface of the wing members 520L and 520R may be in contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be further suppressed.

In a state in which the wing members 520L and 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are disposed below the standing portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (downward in FIG. 28A).
In other words, the standing portion 511b1 is disposed between the bulging portions 524L and 524R.

Here, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball so as not to sandwich the gaming ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L and 524R are provided so as to protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portion 52 is prevented from being sandwiched between the bulging portions 524L and 524R.
The pair of wing members 520L and 520R need to be further spaced apart by an amount corresponding to the projecting height of 4L and 524R, and a space necessary for disposing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the closed state, the raised portion 511b1 is provided between the bulged portions 524L and 524R, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R has the bulged portion 524L when viewed in the rotation axis direction. , 524R in the region where 524R is not formed, the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L, 526R is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the bulging portions 524L, 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, Space required for disposing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

That is, even if the pair of wing members 520L and 520R start to close (begin the transition to the closed state) in a state where the game balls are guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portion 524
Since the standing portion 511b1 is positioned between the facing portions of L and 524R, the game ball is swollen to the bulging portion 524L,
It is possible to avoid the game ball from being sandwiched between the bulging portions 524L and 524R by discharging from between the facing 524R. The game balls discharged from the space between the bulging portions 524L and 524R by the standing portion 511b1 are the side surfaces 526L and 5 in the region where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are not formed.
Since it is located between 26R opposing, the opposing space | interval in this position is made larger than the diameter of a game ball, Therefore A game ball is not pinched (refer Fig.27 (a)). As a result, the facing distance between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a space required for arrangement | positioning of a pair of wing member 520L, 520R can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be disposed in a space equivalent to a space necessary for disposing a conventional product in which the bulging portions 524L and 524R do not project from the side surfaces 526L and 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 521L521R causes the corner portion far from the through holes 521L and 521R of the wing members 520L and 520R to rotate downward in the gravitational direction due to its own weight. Is done. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portions 525L, 525R
When the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) are in contact with the opposite ends, the wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from rotating due to their own weight, and the wing members 520L and 520R. Can be held in the second state.

Therefore, the drive unit 533d and the protrusion 5 described above that regulate the displacement of the wing members 520L and 520R.
23L and 523R, it can be performed at a location other than the drive portion 533d and the protrusion 523L.
, 523R can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, the rotating member 533 can be reduced in size because it is not necessary to form a large part in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533. As a result, the drive unit 530 can be reduced in size.

In the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located below the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the gravitational direction and is located above the lower end of the second winning opening 140 in the gravitational direction. The game ball guided by 526R can be sent to the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, and can be made to enter the second winning opening 140 by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 (FIG. 28B). )reference).

Further, as described above, the second protrusion 511b has the wing members 520L and 520R side (second
A base member 511f including an LED for irradiating light is disposed on the winning award opening 140 side. FIG.
As shown to (a), in the 1st state, the recessed parts 525L and 525R are located in the gravity direction lower side. Therefore, the light irradiated from the LED of the base member 511f is used as the wing member 520L, 520R.
It is easy to make it enter the inside.

That is, the wing member 5 is obtained by irradiating the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R with the light of the LED.
It can suppress that the light of LED reflects on the outer surface of 20L and 520R. As a result, light can be easily incident on the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the wing members 520L, 52
The amount of light emitted from the inside of 0R to the player side can be increased. As a result, the wing members 520L and 520R can be easily seen by the player even in the state through the front base 511 formed from the transparent material amount.

Further, when the wing members 520L and 520R are set to the second state shown in FIG. 28B, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are set at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R. . Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the game ball sent to the front side of the second winning opening 140 by the LED of the base member 511f.

In other words, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R, so that the gap between the facing portions of the first electric accessory 520 can be increased. . Therefore, the game ball sent to the front side of the second prize opening is the base member 511.
It can be easily irradiated by the LED of f. As a result, even in a state through the front base 511 formed of a transparent material, it is possible for the player to easily see the game ball that is entered into the second winning opening 140.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the manner in which the winning opening unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the range XXIX of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the winning opening unit 500 is disposed with a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76.

Inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76, a first out port 71 for collecting game balls flowing down the conventional game area is formed. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is curved and formed with a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to make it easier to gather game balls.
6a is formed.

Therefore, the winning a prize opening unit 500 and the inner rail 76 are connected to the lower end portion (curved portion 76) of the inner reel.
The gap is increased in the portion where a is formed. As mentioned above, the prize opening unit 5
The fastening of the 00 front base 511 and the rear base 512 is performed by inserting a screwdriver or the like obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511.

The through hole 511b4 is formed in the second protruding portion 511b formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the front base 511. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 is located above the bending portion 76a (upper side in FIG. 29).
Can be located. Accordingly, when a driver or the like is inserted obliquely from the lower side of the front base 511 into the recessed portion 511b3, the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a.
So that the front base 511 is connected to the rear base 51 from the front side of the game board 13.
2 can be easily attached and detached.

Further, since the inside of the recessed portion 511b3 can be made difficult to be seen by the player by the inner rail 76, the player's interest is reduced by visually recognizing a screw or the like that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36.

First, the configuration of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG. 30A is a front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the decorative design display apparatus 800 in the XXXb-XXXb line | wire of (a). FIG.
Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and Fig. 32 shows a decorative symbol display device 80.
FIG. FIG. 33A is a front view in which the inner reel 811 is developed.
FIG. 33B is a front view in which the outer reel 821 is developed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative symbol display device 800 includes an inner reel unit 810 that is configured to be rotatable, an outer reel unit 820 that houses a part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. A housing unit 880 that houses the outer reel unit 820 inside, a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the housing unit 880 and rotationally drives the inner reel unit 810, and a housing unit 880 that is attached to the outer reel unit 82.
The driving motor KM2 that rotationally drives 0 and the backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel unit 810 are mainly provided.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed on one end side (left side in FIG. 30A) of the inner reel 811, and the inner reel 811 And an annular member 813 disposed on the other end side of the opening (right side in FIG. 30A).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a belt-like sheet formed of a transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the inner reel 811 has decorative patterns arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction being the vertical direction. Each of the inner reels 811 of the three decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged in parallel has a different arrangement of the decorative symbols.

The rotating member 812 connects a hub 812a formed in a substantially disc shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape having a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and an outer peripheral surface of the hub 812a and an inner peripheral surface of the rim 812b. And spokes 812c.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b are formed in the same straight line as the respective axes, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spoke 812c is formed to be inclined in the axial direction toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812b is a part where one end side of the inner reel 811 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the distance dimension in the circumferential direction at the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set to be approximately the same as the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the developed inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) on the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without any gap.

The hub 812a is disposed inside the inner reel 811. That is, the hub 812a and the rim 81
The spoke 812c that connects 2b is formed to be inclined toward the other end (annular member 813 described later) side of the opening of the inner reel 811 as it goes radially inward. This
The hub 812a can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. Also spoke 812c
Is formed of a plurality of rod-like bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and includes an inner opening 812c1 that opens between the spokes 812c adjacent in the circumferential direction.

The hub 812a has a position in the axial direction substantially the same as the center position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811. As a result, a space closer to the annular member 813 than the hub 812a can be secured. The hub 812a is connected to a driving motor KM1 that applies a rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810.

In the drive motor KM1, the thickness dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811 is approximately half of the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. As described above, the hub 812a has a position in the axial direction that is substantially the same as the central position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811, and is located on the inner side of the opening of the inner reel 811 on the other end (ring member 813) side. Since a space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
0 and the dimension of the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotation shaft arranged in a straight line coaxial with the shaft of the hub 812a.
That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As mentioned above,
Since the shaft of the hub 812a and the shaft of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the drive motor K
By rotating M1, the inner reel 811 can be rotated about the axis of the inner reel 811. Thereby, the symbol decorated on the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized as a mode in which the player is displaced in the vertical direction.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the rim 812b. In the annular member 813, the inner peripheral surface on the other end side (the right side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the inner reel 811 is attached to the outer peripheral surface.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed of a transparent resin sheet as described above,
Relatively low rigidity. For this reason, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the inner reel unit 810 may be deformed due to the centrifugal force or wind pressure of the rotation, and the player may not be able to accurately recognize the symbols decorated around the inner reel unit 810.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inner reel 811 has the rim 81 of the rotating member 812 on one end side.
Since 2b is connected and the annular member 813 is connected to the other end side, when the inner reel unit 810 rotates, it becomes difficult to displace due to its centrifugal force and wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the player can recognize the symbols decorated around the inner reel 811 accurately.

Further, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the inner reel 81 is correspondingly increased.
1 load can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a load applied to the drive motor KM1 when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally driven. As a result, the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can be smoothly started.

The outer reel unit 820 includes a cylindrical outer reel 821 and the outer reel 82.
1, a hub 823 formed in a disk shape with a diameter smaller than 1, and an inner peripheral surface on one end side (left side in FIG. 30A) of an opening of the outer reel 821 and an outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.
2 and mainly.

The outer reel 821 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer shape of the inner reel 811 and a width dimension in the axial direction larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. The inner reel 811 is formed of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. Note that the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the decoration mode will be described later.

The hub 823 has an axis coaxially arranged with the outer reel 821, and the outer reel 821.
Is arranged at a substantially central position in the axial direction. The hub 823 is connected to a drive motor KM2 that applies a rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820.

The spokes 822 are formed so as to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the outer side in the radial direction of the hub 823, whereby one end side of the openings of the spokes 822 and the outer reel 821 (FIG. 3).
0 (a) left side) can be formed. Also, the spoke 822 is connected to the hub 8
23 is formed of a plurality of rod-like bodies extending from the edge portion 824 to the edge portion 824, and includes an opening portion 822a that opens between the spokes 822 adjacent in the circumferential direction.

In the drive motor KM2, the thickness dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 is approximately half of the dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821. As described above, the hub 823 is positioned in the axial direction.
Since the outer reel 821 is positioned substantially at the same position as the center in the left-right direction, and a space is formed on one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (FIG. 30A, left in the left-right direction), most of the drive motor KM2 is used as the outer reel 821. It can arrange | position inside. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The housing unit 880 is formed in a box-like body whose front side is open, and can accommodate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The accommodation unit 880 includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 881 and an upper wall portion 8 disposed at an edge between the pair of side wall portions 881 facing each other.
82, a lower wall portion 883 and a back wall portion 884.

The side wall portion 881 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30A) and in the front-back direction (FIG. 30B). In the left-right direction) smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum.

The side wall portion 881 is provided with a drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 on the right surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 30A).
a) A drive motor KM1 for driving the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the right side). That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are
The side wall portion 881 is rotationally displaced.

Further, the side wall portion 881 includes a bulging portion 881a that bulges in a curved shape corresponding to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 on the side surface on the front side. Thereby, it can suppress that the light irradiated from the backlight unit 830 mentioned later escapes from the left-right outer side of the inner reel 811. FIG.

The side wall portion 881 is formed from a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. In addition, the heat generated inside the housing unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the housing unit 880 by being generally formed of a metal material having higher thermal conductivity than the resin material. As a result, heat accumulates inside the storage unit 880,
Parts can be prevented from being broken.

The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the housing unit 880, and the edge portion and the lower portion (FIG. 30 (b)) of the upper portion (FIG. 30 (b) upper portion) of the side wall portion 881. And the lower edge).

The width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 30 (a) left-right direction) of the upper wall part 882 and the lower wall part is formed smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). Thereby, the distance dimension between the opposing side wall portions 881 can be secured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the opposing sides.

The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821. Thereby, the fluidity | liquidity of the air of the inside of the storage unit 880 and the exterior can be improved. As a result, heat can be prevented from accumulating inside the housing unit 880, and parts can be prevented from being broken by the heat of the housing unit 880.

The back wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms a side surface on the back surface side of the housing unit 880, and is disposed along an edge portion on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the side wall portion 881.

The back wall portion 884 is formed with an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position intersecting the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 30B), and both left and right end portions where the opening 884a is formed. And an upright portion 884b which is bent up to the front side.

The opening 884a is formed such that the width dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 30A) is larger than the width dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884 when the outer reel 821 is moved in the front-rear direction (swayed) due to the inertial force or vibration of the rotation operation.

That is, when the outer reel 821 is moved in the front-rear direction (swayed) due to the inertia force or vibration of the rotation operation, a part of the rear side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the outer reel 821 is opened 884a. Can be inserted inside. As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the back wall portion 884.

In addition, the opening 884a can enhance the air fluidity between the inside and the outside of the housing unit 880. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from staying inside the storage unit 880, and it is possible to suppress parts from being broken by the heat of the storage unit 880.

Here, the opening 884 larger than the width in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 is formed in the rear wall portion 884.
When a is formed, the rigidity of the back wall portion 884 adjacent to the left and right sides of the opening 884a is lowered. Therefore, there is a possibility that the back wall portion 884 is bent.

Further, in this case, it is conceivable to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the space between the facing portions of the side wall portion 881, but by increasing the space between the facing portions,
There has been a problem that the unit of the decorative symbol display device 800 becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the standing portions 884b are formed on both the left and right sides of the back wall portion 884 where the openings 884a are formed. Thereby, the rigidity of back wall part 884 can be made high. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back wall portion 884 from bending.

In the present embodiment, the back wall portion 884 is made of a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right end portions of the opening 884a to the left and right end portions of the back wall portion 884 is made sufficiently small. Therefore, the deformation rate of plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, the rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from the inside of the inner reel 811 so that the player can easily recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811, and is disposed inside the front of the inner reel 811.

The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the side, and the axis of the arc is the inner reel 8.
It is arrange | positioned coaxially with 11 axes | shafts. Further, the width dimension in the axial direction of the backlight unit 830 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811.

Further, the length L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length corresponding to three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 described later.

Further, the backlight unit 830 has a recess 831 that is recessed radially inward on the outer peripheral surface.
Are juxtaposed in the circumferential direction. Therefore, a partition plate 832 is formed between the concave portions 831 so as to stand on the radially outer side of the backlight unit 830.

A base member 833 including an LED that emits light is disposed on a radially inner side surface of each recess 831, and light can be emitted toward the radially outer side of the backlight unit 830 by the LED.

Each base member 833 can be independently supplied with electric power, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, each base member 833 is arranged in a region (recess 831) surrounded by four sides, so that the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 is incident on the front surface region of the other base member 833. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be easily made to emit light partially.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. FIG. 33A is a front view in which the inner reel 811 is developed, and FIG.
These are the front views which expand | deployed the outer reel 821. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33A, on the inner reel 811, a plurality of symbols are drawn at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). Note that the dimension L5 in the circumferential direction of one symbol is set to one third of the circumferential length L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5 × 3 = L4) as described above.

The inner reel 811 is formed of a material that can transmit light as a whole. In particular, the light transmittance of the symbol portion (for example, “7”) is higher than that of the surrounding margin portion. Therefore, the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811
By irradiating light from the LED light, the LED light can pass through the inner reel 811 and the design portion can be raised. Therefore, if the LED of the backlight unit 830 is set in a light emitting state, the inner reel 811 is not irradiated with outside light (light inside the store or light of other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The player can visually recognize the symbol.

In the present embodiment, five types and ten symbols are drawn continuously in the circumferential direction, and a maximum of three symbols can be visually recognized from the player side by the segment display device 600 described later. As described above, each of the decorative symbol display devices 800 is decorated with a different arrangement of symbols, and the player can visually recognize up to nine symbols.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3 × 3 symbols on the inner reel 811, thereby setting a total of 5 effective hit lines, 3 in parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 in the diagonal direction. Is done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three “7” symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, the player can be informed of the occurrence of the big hit state.

As shown in FIG. 33B, the outer reel 821 includes a non-decorative surface 821a that is not decorated and a non-transmissive surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorative surface 821a can transmit light because it is not decorated. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (in this embodiment, a transparent resin material), a non-decorative surface 821a that can transmit light is formed. The non-decorative surface 821a only needs to be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and for example, may be provided with a translucent decoration capable of transmitting light.

The decorative symbol display device 800 rotates the outer reel unit 820 to rotate the non-decorative surface 821a.
By directing to the player side, the player can visually recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821. That is, the player can visually recognize the design of the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821.

The non-transmissive surface 821b is made non-transmissive by providing a black decoration on the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the front side in FIG. 33B). Further, the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed to have a length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33B) equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811.

As described above, in this embodiment, three symbols of the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Accordingly, the length of the non-transmissive surface 821b in the circumferential direction is set to three or more symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, so that the outer reel unit 820 is rotated to rotate the outer reel 82.
By disposing one non-transparent surface on the player side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

In addition, the length in the circumferential direction of the non-transmissive surface 821b is the pattern 3 decorated on the inner reel 811.
It is not limited to one or more, and it is only necessary to form a circumferential length that makes the decoration of the inner reel 811 invisible from the player side. That is, it is only necessary to form the non-transmissive surface 821b by the length in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811 that is visible from the player side.

The non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive region 821b1 that can partially transmit light, and a design 821b2 on which the design is decorated.

The transmissive region 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmissive area 821b1 is a part that displays seven segments by being combined with a segment display device 600 described later, and can partially transmit light transmitted through the inner reel 811 to the player side. Thereby, a part of 7-segment display described later can be formed.

The symbol 821b2 is formed in the circumferential length of three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and the outer reel so that three symbols 821b2 of each ornamental symbol display device 800 are aligned in parallel in the horizontal direction. By stopping 821, the player can be informed of the occurrence of the big hit state.

Further, as described above, since the periphery of the symbol 821b2 is not transparent, it is possible to make the inner reel 811 invisible to the player. Therefore, the design of the inner reel 811 can be stopped on the effective line while producing an effect in which three symbols of the design 821b2 are arranged. Therefore, the outer reel 8
With the 21 rotation effect, after the player has watched the outer reel 821, the inner reel 811 can be watched almost simultaneously with the end of the effect of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Next, referring to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 8
20 will be described. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the range XXXV in FIG. 36A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36A.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. Further, a predetermined interval is provided between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 projecting in the radial direction on one end side (left side in FIG. 34) of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. A gap is formed.

A protrusion 812a1 is formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 812 so as to protrude toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, formed on an extension line of the spoke 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the protrusions 812a1.

Here, conventionally, a first reel (outer reel unit 820) formed to be rotatable,
A second reel (inner reel unit 810) that is disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820) and that is rotatably formed (that is, has a double reel structure). ) Gaming machines are known. Also known is a technique for removing dust adhering to the display surface of the reel and cleaning it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. Yes.

However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is,
In the double reel structure, a space for arranging the rotating brush described above is secured between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)). Therefore, the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

That is, since the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is formed narrow, a decorative symbol display is used to remove dust that has entered and stuck between the opposing surfaces. Since the device 800 needs to be disassembled, it is difficult to clean.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated by the protrusion 812a1, air can be pushed out to generate wind. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, thereby flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In this case, the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is made narrower than the space on the inner peripheral side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a. 824
In addition, it can flow from the space on the inner peripheral side of the hub 812 a to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 is formed of a cylindrical outer reel 82.
1 and an edge portion 824 projecting radially inward from one axial side of the outer reel 821,
The inner reel unit 810 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the outer surface of the inner reel unit 810 faces the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval. The inner reel unit 810 extends radially inward from one axial direction of the inner reel 811. And a hub 812a whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the edge portion 824 at a predetermined interval, and a projection 812a from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge portion 824.
1 is erected, so that the projection 812a1 is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure, and the wind pressure is used to generate the inner surface of the outer reel 821. And the air between the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can flow. Thereby, dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the edge portion 824 or the hub 812a, or when a portion in the circumferential direction is partially divided, a gap between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is formed. Since the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion and the divided portion, the wind pressure is weakened, and accordingly, the air flows between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. It becomes difficult to let you.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the edge 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a circumferentially continuous surface, so that the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a The wind pressure generated by the protrusion 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can easily flow. As a result, a protrusion 81 is formed between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a.
The air pressure generated by the displacement of 2a1 in the circumferential direction can be used to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Further, due to the protrusion 812 a 1, the facing distance between the hub 812 a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is partially narrowed in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 can be easily changed by the protrusion 812a1. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to generate wind by utilizing the change in the atmospheric pressure, and the wind is caused to flow between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 so that the inner reel 811 Dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

More specifically, air has a property of flowing from a high pressure to a low pressure side, and the protrusion 812a.
The air pressure can be partially increased by narrowing the distance between the front end of one protrusion and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Therefore, the inner reel 811 is less likely to change in atmospheric pressure.
The air pressure in the space between the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is made lower than the air pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As a result, air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and dust is prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. it can.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the protrusion tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge portion 824 can be increased, the protrusion 812a1 is displaced toward the edge portion 824 or the edge portion 824 is displaced (staggered) toward the protrusion 812a1 side. Can be suppressed.

Further, the spoke 822 that supports the edge 824 and the spoke 81 that supports the hub 812a.
Since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in the opening 2c, the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is exposed to the outside via the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. The air can be exhausted (or air can be sucked into the space between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a). That is, the flow resistance of the air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be easily flowed (outflow or inflow). As a result, the wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is used to connect the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. The air in between can be easily flowed.

Further, a protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a (the crotch edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820), and the spoke 822 (or spoke 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810). Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed, it is possible to easily exert the effect of reducing the flow resistance by sucking (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825. That is, when one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 on which the protrusion 812a1 is erected is rotated, the other of the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 that is formed is stopped. The resistance of air flow (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed to be slightly inclined (expanded in diameter) radially outward from the edge 824 (one end) side to which the spoke 822 is connected to the other end side. Therefore, the air flowing from one end side between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be easily sent to the other end side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped, and dust on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Can be prevented from sticking.

Further, the inclination angle θ1 from the axis of the inner reel 811 to the radially outer side of the spoke 812c is larger than the inclination angle θ2 from the axis of the outer reel 821 of the spoke 822 to the radially outer side (
θ1> θ2). Therefore, the spoke 812c and the spoke 822 face each other outward in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 34) when rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) overlapping in the axial direction (left and right direction in FIG. 34). The dimensions in between are increased.

Therefore, by rotating and displacing one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 are caused by the difference in distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 facing each other. It is possible to easily generate a wind toward the opposite side of the inner peripheral surface.

More specifically, the separation distance between the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822 facing each other increases in the radial direction of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spoke 812c and the spoke 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where they overlap with each other in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is greater between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Be raised.

As described above, air has a property of flowing from a high pressure to a low pressure side. Therefore, an air flow from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion can be formed. That is, an air flow from the axial side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the opposite side of the hub 812a and the edge 824 can be formed. Therefore, air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In addition, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have light transmissivity, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Through the outer reel unit 820, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the inner reel unit 810
The protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810. That is, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 that is rotated more frequently than the outer reel unit 820. In the production by the rotation of the unit 810, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

In addition, there is no operation of the player as a timing for cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 by rotating the inner reel unit 810 (the game ball is not shot into the game area). This is preferably performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at a high speed in order to generate wind, the player's interest can be attracted by switching the design of the inner reel 811.

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing an effect of rotationally displacing the non-transparent surface 821b of the outer reel 821 toward the player. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is invisible to the player, the cleaning can be performed without making the player visually recognize the cleaning state. As a result, it can suppress that a player's interest falls. Further, since it can be performed in the gaming state, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even when the game is continuously performed for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress dust and other dust from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, a vertical displacement unit 600R disposed on the right side when viewed from the front,
Vertical displacement unit 600C arranged between left and right vertical displacement units 600L and 600R
Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and the connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the back side.

Since the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R have substantially the same configuration, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side when viewed from the front will be described below to describe the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R. Detailed description is omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 39A is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39B is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

40 and 41, the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600 </ b> L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and the first segment unit 6 disposed on the left and right of the displacement unit 650.
10 and the second segment unit 620.

The first segment unit 610 is a unit that can display one segment in the left-right direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit that can display two segments in the left-right direction. is there. In addition, since the first segment 610 is only formed by halving the second segment 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment 620 will be described below.
The reference numerals in the configuration of the second segment unit 620 are similarly assigned to the first segment unit 610.

The vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R are formed so that the arrangement of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 is different from each other.
0C has a second segment unit 620 disposed only on the right side when viewed from the front, and a vertical displacement unit 610
In R, the second segment unit 620 is disposed in the right side view.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front and two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. The vertical displacement unit 600C is
Two segments can be displayed only on the right side of the front view. Furthermore, the vertical displacement unit 600
L can display one segment on the right side of the front view only. That is, a mode in which one segment is formed on the left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R can be adopted.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG.
FIG. 42A is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG.
20 is a rear view of FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620. FIG.
4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmission member 621 disposed on the front side, a partition member 622 disposed on the back surface of the light transmission member 621, and a partition member 622. A plurality of diffusion members 623 disposed on the back surface of the substrate, a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and a reflection member 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624 are mainly provided. Formed.

The light transmissive member 621 is formed of a translucent light transmissive resin material through which light can pass. The light transmissive member 621 is mainly provided with a light transmissive portion 621a formed in a circular arc plate shape convex toward the front side, and a flat portion 621b formed continuously above and below the light transmissive portion 621a. The

The light transmission part 621a includes a standing wall 621a1 that is erected on the back side from the left and right ends, a fastening part 621a2 that protrudes in an annular shape from the upper and lower ends to the back side, and a vertical direction at the front left and right center position. And a decorative portion 621a3 that is continuously recessed in the back side.

The standing wall 621a1 is formed so as to stand on the back side from the left and right end portions of the light transmitting portion 621a. The facing dimension between the standing walls 621a1 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of a partition member 622 described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmission part 621a, the partition member 622 can be restricted from moving left and right.

The fastening portion 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole for fastening a reflection member 625, which will be described later, with a screw, and is formed to project in an annular shape from the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the fastening portion 621a2
The reflection member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw into the inner edge of the screw.

As described above, the decorative portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the left and right center position of the light transmitting portion 621a. Thereby, it can suppress that the light which permeate | transmits the front view left side reflects inside the decoration part 621a3, and is radiate | emitted from the front view right side. A detailed description of the light transmitted through the decorative portion 621a3 will be described later.

The flat surface portion 621b is a plate member for fastening with a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650 described later. The flat surface portion 621b is formed in a plate-like body having a front view substantially the same as the base member 660, and the displacement unit 650 and the second seg unit 620 are fastened by fastening screws via the flat surface portion 621b. can do.

In addition, an elastic piece 621b1 protruding to the opposite side is formed to protrude on the plane portion 621b. The elastic piece 621b1 is formed so as to protrude from the opposing side surfaces of the flat portion 621b formed in a pair of upper and lower sides, and protrudes in a curved shape convex toward the front side. Further, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape having a smaller radius than the light transmitting portion 621a, and the protruding tip thereof is the displacement unit 65.
The decorative symbol display device 800 disposed on the inner side of 0 is in contact with the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall portion 883. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, the decorative symbol display device 800 can be prevented from vibrating.

The partition member 622 is formed of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is formed in a curved plate state in a side view. The partition member 622 has a radius of the curved outer peripheral surface such that the light transmitting portion 6
21a is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface, and the vertical width (the vertical direction in FIG. 42) is set smaller than the vertical width of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, it can arrange | position in the state which earth | grounded the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 to the inner peripheral surface of the light transmissive part 621a.

In addition, the partition member 622 has a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed from the left and right (left and right sides in FIG. 42) toward the center and a concave from the upper and lower (upper and lower) end surfaces toward the center. It is mainly provided with a second recessed portion 622b provided and a protruding portion 622c protruding from the left and right center position on the back side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed side by side in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides. That is, the first recessed portion 622 a is formed at four locations on the partition member 622.

The second recessed portion 622b is formed to be recessed from the upper and lower ends. The dimension between the opposing ends of the second recessed portion 622b at the recessed tip is set to be substantially the same as the vertical distance of the fastening portion 621a2 formed in the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmission member 621, by inserting the fastening portion 621a2 inside the second recessed portion 622b,
It can control that partition member 622 moves up and down.

The projecting portion 622c is formed to extend in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right sides of the partition member 622. The projecting portion 622c includes a recess 622c1 that is recessed in the projecting tip surface. The recess 622c1 is formed such that the width dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described later. Therefore, when the base member 624 is disposed on the partition member 622, the recess 62
The front end side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside 2c1. As a result, when the base member 624 is disposed, the base member 624 can be positioned, and the base member 624 can be prevented from moving in the left-right direction.

The diffusion member 623 is formed of a cloudy resin material and can diffuse light entering the inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed in a plate shape curved in a side view, and has an outer peripheral portion (
The radius of the front side is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622.
Therefore, the diffusing member 623 can be arranged in a state of being grounded to the back side of the partition member 622.

In addition, two diffusion members 623 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and two diffusion members 623 are arranged at a predetermined distance on the left and right. That is, four diffusion members 623 are disposed on the back side of the partition member 622.

The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the facing wall 621 a 1 of the light transmission member 621 and the protruding portion 622 c of the partition member 622. Thereby, when the diffusing member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the diffusing member 623 from moving left and right.

The diffusing member 623 includes a protruding portion 623a that protrudes to the front side, and a recessed portion 623b that is recessed on the back side of the protruding portion 623a.

The protruding portion 623a is formed to protrude at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is arranged in a state of being inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. Established. Thereby, when the diffusing member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, the partition member 622 can be prevented from shifting in the left-right and up-down directions.

Further, the protruding distance of the protruding portion 623a is set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. That is, it is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion 623a and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b has a protrusion 62 on the side opposite to the protrusion 623a (on the back side of the diffusion member 623).
It is formed to be recessed in a shape slightly smaller than the shape of the front view of 3a. Is formed. Thereby, the thickness of the plate | board of the diffusing member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when the diffusing member 623 is molded can be suppressed. Moreover, the recessed part 623b can enlarge the area of the back side of the edge part of the protrusion part 623a by forming in a shape a little smaller than the protrusion part 623a. Therefore, the light incident on the diffusing member 623 from the LED 624a described later can be increased at the end of the protruding portion 623a. As a result, it is possible to clearly (clearly) the mode of light visually recognized by the player via the diffusing member 623, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

The base member 624 is formed from a crescent-shaped plate having a curved front side, and includes an LED 624a that irradiates light on a side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the recessed tip surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, the base member 62
4 is disposed on the back surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is disposed in the recess 6 of the partition member 622.
By inserting it inside 22c1, it is possible to suppress the base member 624 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

A plurality of LEDs 624a are disposed on the left and right side surfaces of the base member 624, and the irradiation direction thereof is
It is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. That is, the light irradiation direction of the LED 624a is
Left and right direction. A detailed description of the light irradiation of the LED 624a will be given later.

One reflection member 625 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624. Reflective member 6
25 is formed from a white resin material, and is formed in a circular arc shape convex to the front side. Further, the radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the diffusing member 623. Thereby, when the reflecting member 625 is disposed on the back side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be grounded.

The reflection member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is spaced apart from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side to the front side, and an inclined portion 625a that is inclined from the back side toward the front side, and the inclined portion 625a. A plurality of recesses 625b formed in a line in the vertical direction on the front side of the wall, and a wall portion 62 formed to project toward the front side at the upper end, lower end and middle of the recess 625b.
And 5c.

The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflection surface 625a1 that reflects the light of the LED 624a of the base member 624 to the front side, and is inclined by about 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624.
As described above, since the light irradiation direction of the LED 624a is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined with respect to the side surface of the base member 624. Can be reflected to the front side. L
The manner in which the light of the ED 624a travels will be described later.

The concave portion 625b is formed in a concave curved shape on the back side. Further, the recess 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, whereby the amount of light of the LED 624a to be visually recognized by the player via the diffusion member 623 can be made uniform. As a result, it can suppress that a player's interest falls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the progress of light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second seg unit 620 taken along line XLV-XLV in FIG. In FIG. 45, a part of the light emitted from the LED 624a is partially shown by a two-dot chain line. In addition, the outline of the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed on the left and right back sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflection surface 625a1 is formed with an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflection surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle), so that the light The reflection direction can be outward. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed from a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the side opposite to the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625).
The space can be increased. Thereby, the edge part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 800 can be arrange | positioned to the back side of the 2nd segment unit 620. FIG.

Here, the rotation (decorative symbol display device 800) formed so as to be rotatable and arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and at least one disposed between the plurality of rotating cylinders. A light-transmitting decorative member (light-transmitting member 621) and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light-emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted. There is known a gaming machine in which a board is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. According to this gaming machine, not only can the space between the spinning cylinders be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also the pattern on the surface of the decorative member is formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member, An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the design of the decorative member integrally with the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum can be performed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the substrate is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently applied to the back surface of the decorative member. The pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. For this reason, there is a problem that the production effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged while the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum is hindered.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 624a is converted into the light transmitting member 62.
1 is provided with a reflecting member 625 that reflects the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, even when the base member 624 is disposed so that the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621.
The irradiation range to the back surface of the light transmission member 621 by the light emitted from the LED 624a can be widened. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be increased correspondingly, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be increased, the area excluding the pattern can be reduced.
And a decorative feeling display device 800 can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 and has an outer edge up to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 in front view. Since it is formed to extend, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (not easily visible). In addition, since the symbol of the light transmitting member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the symbol displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be brought closer, the light transmitting member 621. And the decorative design display device 800 can be easily formed.

Further, the reflecting member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 where the LED 624a is mounted and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, so that the region of the base member 624 where the LED 624a is mounted and the design of the light transmitting member 621 are formed. Since the back surface of the reflecting member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 toward the base member 624 from the light transmitting member 621, the light emitted from the LED 624a is surrounded. The back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 while ensuring the size of the symbol formed (displayed) by the above, and the decorative symbol display device 800 is placed on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. It is possible to enter the back side (the decorative symbol display device 800 is brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (not easily visible), and the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded.
It is easy to form a sense of unity with.

In addition, since the LED 624a is mounted on both the one surface and the other surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the one surface and the other surface are mounted. The light transmitting member 62 has a different pattern depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.
1 can be formed (displayed) independently.

In this case, the base member 624 disposed between the decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged side by side.
Can be set to one. Therefore, the space necessary for disposing the base member 624 can be suppressed, and accordingly, the decorative symbol display device 800 is inserted into the back side of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (
The decorative symbol display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (it is difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

Further, as described above, the reflection surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflection surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). The reflection direction can be outward. As a result, (reflecting surface 625a1
The reflecting member 625 can be made smaller (than when inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be ensured accordingly. As a result, since the second segment unit 620 and the decorative design display device 800 can be arranged close to each other, it is easy to form a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative design display device 800.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 46 is a side view of the base member 624. FIG. 47 shows the XL of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit 620 in the VII-XLVII line.

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a square shape when viewed from the side, and can emit light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at an interval of an inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction about the same axis as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. As a result, the LED 624
The heat stored in the base member 624 due to the irradiation of a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the base member 624 from being partially heated and damaging the LED 624a.

In the present embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are dispersedly arranged in the circumferential direction. LE
D624a is disposed in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface formed in a square is along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the base member 624.

Here, a substrate (base member 62) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are conventionally mounted.
4) and a transmission member (light transmission member 621) that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means, the transmission member (the light transmission portion 621a of the light transmission member 621) is formed in a curved shape, and a plurality of There is known a gaming machine in which light emitting means are arranged along a curve of a transmissive member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals in the front view of the transmission member. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (string) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is biased because the interval between the light emitting means adjacent to some of the light emitting means is narrowed. Therefore, heat concentrates on some of the light emitting means, and the life is likely to be shortened.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between the adjacent LEDs 624a in each LED 624a can be constant, and the LEDs 62
The distribution of heat generated by 4a can be made uniform. As a result, the concentration of heat on some of the LEDs 624a can be suppressed, and the life of each LED 624a can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 47, one recess 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. Further, the separation distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) in the up-down direction of one recess 625b to the other end side (upper end portion) is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an inclination angle θ1. Therefore, the vertical interval between the LEDs 624a is narrower in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 46) than in the vertical direction outside. Accordingly, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center side in the vertical direction becomes dark), and makes the player visually recognize the light uniformly. There was a problem that it was not possible.

In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curve of the light transmission portion 621a, the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals in the front view of the light transmission portion 621a. Will be arranged. That is, in the front view of the light transmission part 621a, a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is narrow and a wide region are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the light amount becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a reflection member 625 that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmission portion 621a is provided, and the reflection member 625 includes a plurality of recesses 625b that are partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. And the light transmitting portion 62 of the plurality of recesses 625b.
Since the partition width in the front view of 1a is set to be substantially the same, the light amount of each concave portion 625b visually recognized in the front view of the light transmission portion 621a can be made substantially the same. As a result, a plurality of LEDs 624
The distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of a can be made uniform.

That is, the distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b is set to be the same, so that the player is irradiated by the irradiation of one LED 624a. The region of the light emitted to the side can be made substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, it can suppress that the quantity of the light irradiated to a player side increases to the center side of an up-down direction. As a result, the player can see the light uniformly.

Further, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) in front view, for example,
Compared with the case where the light emitting surface is circular, light diffusibility can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), and thus the light quantity distribution can be made uniform in one recess 625b.

The light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the front-view rectangular shape of the light emitting surface means that the front-view shape of the encapsulating resin (front-view shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin) is rectangular.

Furthermore, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs 624a has one side of the light emitting surface disposed on the light transmission portion 621a.
Accordingly, the light emitted from the LED 624a can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the light transmission part 621a can be made uniform.

In addition, the concave portion 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a and is recessed toward the side away from the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is the light transmitting portion 6.
21a and the concave portion 625b face each other, so that the base member 624 with respect to the light transmitting portion 621a.
Can be arranged in an orthogonal posture. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in disposing the unit composed of the light transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625. In this case, LED624
Since the concave portion 625b is arranged so as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface a from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the concave portion 625b is uniformly distributed to the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. It can be made incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the light transmission part 621a can be made uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, an aspect of light emitted from the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In FIG. 48, LED 6
The light irradiated by 24a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is denoted by the reference numeral of the irradiation region SR1.

As shown in FIG. 48, the first seg unit 61 is emitted by emitting light from the LED 624a.
0 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). In addition, the second seg unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation region SR1 arranged 2 × 2 vertically and horizontally. The irradiation region SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmission member 621.

Therefore, the left and right sides of the number in the 7-segment display can be displayed by the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620. In addition, the upper and lower sides and the center of the number by 7 segment display are mentioned later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.
49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 49 and 50 show the disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 that is pivotally supported by the base member 660, and a base member 660. The driving means 680 for transmitting the rotational driving of the driving motor KM3 to the displacement member 670 is mainly provided.

The base member 660 is formed of a pair of plate members on the left and right sides of a shape having a space larger than the decorative symbol display device 800 described above at the center. Further, the first segment unit 610 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the second segment unit 620 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side when viewed from the front. Note that the base member 660 is disposed on the left and right sides upside down, and in this embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left side in the front view is described, and the description on the base member 660 on the left side in the front view is omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and includes a protruding portion 661 that protrudes in a convex shape from the side surface on the front side to the front side. Further, the base member 66
0 is inserted through a through hole 662 that passes through the shaft of the drive motor KM3 provided at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction and a connecting rod 681 that is provided at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. Insertion hole 66
3, a recess 664 on which a later-described displacement member 670 is pivotally supported, a sliding groove 665 formed in an arc shape around the axis of the recess 664, and an engagement protruding above and below the recess 664 to the venue Part 666 is mainly provided.

The protrusion 661 is set such that the radius of the protrusion tip is smaller than the radius on the inner peripheral surface of the reflection member 625 described above, and the curve axis thereof is set substantially on the same straight line as the curve axis of the reflection member 625. Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are disposed on the base member 660, the protrusion 661 and the reflection member 625 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, and the heat of the base member 624 can be opposed. It is possible to suppress intrusion between the opposing base members 660. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 8 disposed inside the opposing base member 660.
It can be suppressed that the temperature of 00 rises and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that rotationally drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are broken.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer shape of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. Is set. Therefore, the drive motor KM3 can be disposed on the base member 660 with the gear 682 connected to the drive motor KM3. The drive motor KM3
Are attached to the base member 660 from the opposite side of the opposing base member 660.

The through-hole 662 is a hole into which a connecting rod 681 of a driving unit 680 described later is inserted. The through-hole 662 is formed larger than the outer shape of the connecting rod 681 and is formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660.

The recess 664 is formed in a circular recess from the opposite side of the base member 660 toward the outside. The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of a connection projection 671b of a displacement member 670 described later. Accordingly, the connection protrusion 671b can be inserted and disposed inside the recess 664.

The sliding groove 665 is inserted into the displacement protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 so that the displacement member 67
0 and the driving means 680 disposed outside the pair of base members 660 can be coupled. Also,
The displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided by the connection protrusion 671b being inserted into the sliding groove 665. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposite side of the base member 660 with a gap whose tip is larger than the diameter of the opposite side surface of the base member 660 and one end of a torsion spring SP1 described later.
As a result, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666.

The displacement members 670 are disposed in a pair of upper and lower sides in opposite directions. The displacement member 670 is formed of an extending member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660 and a decoration unit 672 connected to the other end of the extending member 671.

The extending members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape, and are disposed in a pair in opposite directions. The extending member 671 includes a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end on the long side, a connecting projection 671b projecting left and right outward at a substantially central position in the long direction on the long side, and a shaft support hole 6 from the side surface on the long side.
A protrusion 671d protruding in the circumferential direction of 71a and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and disposed on the side surface of the extending member 671 are mainly formed.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, while inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671a, the collar C
Is fastened and fixed to the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw, so that the displacement member 670 can be connected to the base member 660 in a rotatable state.

Further, the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 are coaxially disposed, and the collar C is inserted into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastened and fixed to the base member 660. A displacement member 670 is arranged to be rotatable on the same axis.

Further, the left and right extending members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one shaft support hole 671a. The bulging portion 671a1 has an outer diameter of the base member 660.
The inner diameter of the concave portion 664 is slightly smaller. The bulging portion 671a1 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

That is, in this embodiment, since the bulged portion 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side, the right shaft support hole 67 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side.
1a is placed inside the bulging portion 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671
a has a bulged portion 671a1 formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, and therefore, the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side is formed in the bulged portion. 67
It will be in the state arrange | positioned inside 1a1 (refer FIG. 49).

Accordingly, when the displacement member 670 is disposed on the base member 660 by the collar C, the bulging portion 671a1 can be inserted into the recess 664. As a result, the shaft support hole 6 of the displacement member 670
When a force is applied in the radial direction of the shaft 71a, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the concave portion 664 come into contact with each other, so that the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be prevented from being damaged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the pair of displacement members 670 are disposed coaxially with the base member 660, and accordingly, the axial length of the collar C is increased correspondingly. Therefore, the displacement member 6
When a force acts in the radial direction on the 70 rotation shaft, the force easily acts on the rotation shaft. Therefore, the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is likely to be damaged.
By abutting 1a1 and the recess 664, a force acting in the radial direction on the rotation axis of the displacement member 670 can be maintained. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

The protrusion 671d is formed with a through hole 671d1 penetrating in the longitudinal direction on the longitudinal side of the extending member 671. The through hole 671d1 is a hole through which torsion springs SP1 and SP2 described later are inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is disposed on a side surface of the extending member 671 on the side closer to each other of a pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 described later. In addition, when the upper and lower extending members 671 are disposed at positions close to each other, the size is set such that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f are in contact with each other. Thereby, it is possible to absorb an impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to positions close to each other.

The drive unit 680 is a unit that transmits the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.
The driving means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the driving motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 meshing with the gear 682, a rod-shaped body and one end connected to a side surface of the large-diameter gear 683,
A first link member 684 having the other end connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 that transmits power to the opposite side through the base member 660, and a cam member 685 that is connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotates. And a second link member 686 having one end rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end connected to the displacement member 670.

As described above, the gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a protrusion 683b protruding in an annular shape on the side surface in the rotation axis direction. Formed. The large diameter gear 683 has a gear surface 683a meshed with the gear 682,
The gear 682 is rotated by being rotated. That is, the drive motor KM3 is rotated by being driven to rotate.

The protrusion 683b is formed to project in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the large-diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotational axis.

The first link member 684 is formed in a rod-like body, and insertion holes 684a and 684b are formed at both ends thereof so as to penetrate in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683 is inserted.
The inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of b. The projection 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the projection 683b is fastened with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a, whereby the first link member 684 can be rotated to the large diameter gear 683. Can be linked in a state.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connection protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connection protrusion 671b. The connection protrusion 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 684b, and the first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by fastening the tip of the connection protrusion 671b with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a stable state.

Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced about the rotational axis of the large-diameter gear 683 along with the rotational displacement of the large-diameter gear 683, and the projection 683b The first link member 684 connected at one end is displaced, and the first link member 684 is displaced.
The displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, and is fitted into the rotary shaft portion of the large-diameter gear 683. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to the cam member 685. Therefore, the connecting rod 681 rotates and the cam member 685 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3.

The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and a connecting rod 681 is fitted into the shaft portion thereof. Further, the cam member 685 is a projection 685a that projects in an annular shape outward from the axial side surface.
Is provided. The protrusion 685 a is formed to project in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle having the rotational axis as the center.

The second link member 686 is formed in the same shape as the shape of the first link member 684 reversed left and right. The second link member 686 includes insertion holes 686a and 686b at both ends in the longitudinal direction.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted.
The inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of a. The projection 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the projection 685a is fastened with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated to the cam member 685. Can be linked with.

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connection protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connection protrusion 671b. The connection protrusion 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 686b, and the distal end of the connection protrusion 671b is fastened with a screw whose outer diameter of the head is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, whereby the second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. Can be connected in a stable state.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the projection 685a is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis of the cam member 685 along with the rotational displacement of the cam member 685, and one end of the projection 685a is one end. The second link member 686 to be connected is displaced and the second link member 68 is displaced.
The displacement member 670 connected to the other end of 6 is displaced.

In other words, the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686 are displaced. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 670 from tilting when it is displaced. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. 51 (
FIG. 51A is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51B is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. Figure 53 shows the LII of 51 (a)
It is sectional drawing of the displacement member 670 in an I-LIII line.

As described above, the displacement member 670 includes the extending member 671 that is rotatably supported by the base member 660 and the decoration unit 672 that is connected to the extending member 671.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extending member 671 includes a connecting portion 671c formed in a plate shape on the short side (the connecting side of the decoration unit 672). Extension member 67 arranged in a pair of left and right
A step portion 671c1 that protrudes partially in a step shape is formed on the surface where the first connecting portions 671c face each other.
Is formed. The step portions 671c1 are alternately formed on the left and right sides, and the step portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Thereby, a dimensional error can be absorbed when the extending member 671 is molded.

The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that irradiates light inside, and irradiates the player side with light. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 disposed on the back side, a front cover 676 disposed on the front side of the back cover 673 so as to cover the back cover 673,
It mainly includes a base member 674 disposed between the back cover 673 and the front cover 676, and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676. Is done.

The back cover 673 is formed in a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 671c of the extending member 671 is fastened to the back side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extending member 671 can be fastened.

Further, the back cover 673 is formed from a resin material that does not easily transmit light (ie, does not transmit light).
The back cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a formed to be recessed on the back side at a position facing a diffusion member 675 described later.

The reflection portion 673a is formed on the lower edge portion of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and white coating with high light reflectance is applied to the inner surface thereof. Thereby, the light irradiated to the inner side of the reflection part 673a can be reflected inside the reflection part 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 is formed so that the shape of the front view is substantially the same as the shape of the back cover 673 and covers the front side of the back cover 673. Further, the front cover 676 is formed of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from first and second LEDs 674a and 2LED described later to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular plate-like body that is smaller than the back cover 673 when viewed from the front. On the front side of the base member 674, a first LED 674 a that is arranged side by side with the lower edge portion and irradiates light on the diffusing member 675 side, and is disposed above the first LED 674 a, and the lens member 677 receives light. And the second LED 674b that irradiates the light.

The first LED 674a is disposed at a position facing the upper end of the diffusing member 675, and
The base member 674 is arranged to be able to irradiate light downward. As a result, the first LED 674a
Can be prevented from entering a lens member 677 to be described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side via the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side via the lens member 677, and the player's interest is impaired. Can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is disposed above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the diffusion member 6
The light of the second LED 674b can be made incident on the lens member 677 disposed on the upper portion of 75.

The diffusing member 675 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the lower end on the back side of the front cover 676. The diffusion member 675 is formed of a cloudy resin material that can diffuse light incident on the diffusion member 675. Thereby, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the upper end on the back side of the front cover 676. The lens member 677 is formed of a transparent resin material, and a plurality of protrusions are formed on the back side (not shown). Thereby, the light emitted from the second LED 674b can be easily incident on the inside by the projection on the back side. As a result, the second LED 67
Even if the amount of light emitted from 4b is reduced, light can be made incident on the lens member 677, and light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a mode of light emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 by the first LED 674a will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. In FIG. 54, the area of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is two.
It is shown by a dotted line and is attached with a symbol of the irradiation region SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the region of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is
The decoration unit 672 (front cover 676) has a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction at the lower end. Since the displacement member 670 is disposed at both upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement member 67 is disposed.
As a result of 0, the irradiation region SR2 is formed at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore,
With the irradiation region SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, it is possible to display numbers up and down by 7-segment display.

Next, the 7-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. 55 and 56 show a state in which the transparent area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated to the player side,
The irradiation region SR1, the irradiation region SR2, and the transmission region 821b1 are illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 55, two irradiation regions SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are formed side by side in the vertical direction and six in the horizontal direction. It is assumed that it is in a state.

The irradiation region SR1 is formed as a set of four in the form of sandwiching the decorative symbol display device 800, and three sets are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. Between the pair of irradiation areas SR1, the irradiation areas SR2 are arranged above and below, and the transmission areas 821b1 are arranged at the upper and lower intermediate positions. Therefore, 7
With the irradiation regions SR1 and SR2 and the transmission region 821b1, the number of 7-segment display can be displayed.

As described above, since one set of four irradiation regions SR1 is arranged in parallel in the left-right direction, a 7-segment display is formed in each set. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

Therefore, a 7-segment display arranged in parallel in the left-right direction can be displayed as an effective line of a lottery for the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a 7-segment display is displayed on all 7-segment displays). .) Thus, not only jackpot display by the decorative symbol display device 800 described above but also jackpot display by 7 segment display can be performed. As a result, since the player can visually recognize a plurality of display forms, the interest of the player can be improved.

Here, the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 6 of the segment display device 600.
The 20 light transmitting portions 621a are formed to be curved in a convex shape on the front side, so that when the player visually recognizes the display of the 7 segments, the display in the central portion in the vertical direction near the player becomes large, The display at both ends in the vertical direction far from the player is reduced. For this reason, there has been a problem that it is impossible for the player to clearly display the number display by 7 segments.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width dimension in the left-right direction is sequentially increased as the 7-segment display is moved from the vertical center position to the vertical ends. Thereby, the display by 7 segments in an up-and-down edge part and an up-and-down center position can be made uniform as a whole. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the number display by 7 segments.

Furthermore, the 7-segment display formed on the left and right sides is formed such that the central portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the central side in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the display of the seven segments formed on the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is normally located at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. Also,
The segment display device 600 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is located in front of the 7 segments displayed in the center. Therefore, as the player is more visually separated from the player's viewpoint, the 7-segment display is more visually recognized by the player due to the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620. Since the center portion in the vertical direction of the 7-segment display is formed to be inclined toward the central side in the left-right direction, it is difficult to visually recognize the 7-segment display in a curved manner from the viewpoint of the player. As a result, the player can visually recognize the display of the seven segments.

Next, a displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60.
FIGS. 57A to G01 (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 58 (
FIGS. 59 (a) and 60 (a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIGS. 58 (b), 59 (a) and 60 (b) are similar to FIG. 57 (a). LVIIIb-LVII
It is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the Ib line.

57 (a), 58 (a), and 58 (b) show the state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in the retracted state, and FIGS. 57 (b), 59 (a), and 59 are shown. FIG. 57B shows a state where the displacement member 670 is disposed in the intermediate state, and FIG. 57C, FIG. 60A, and FIG.
In b), a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in an overhanging state is illustrated.

Further, the retracted state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are spaced apart from each other in the upper and lower sides, and the protruding state of the displacement member 670 is a displacement in which the upper and lower pairs are disposed. The state in which the member 670 is in contact at the upper and lower intermediate position, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is
In this state, the displacement member 670 is disposed between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 57A and 58, at the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state,
The displacement member 670 arranged above the upper and lower pairs (upper side in FIG. 57) is configured such that the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are positioned above, so that the shaft support hole 671a can be rotated. As a result, the decoration unit 672 is positioned upward.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above.
In P1, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1).
The base end portion of Therefore, the urging force applied by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is disposed on the upper side in the gravity direction on the displacement member 670.

On the other hand, the displacement member 670 disposed below the pair of upper and lower pairs (downward in FIG. 57) has the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 positioned below, so that the shaft support hole 6 is disposed.
The decoration unit 672 is positioned below the rotation axis 71a.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed below.
In P2, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1).
The base end portion of Therefore, the urging force applied by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the decoration unit 672 can be easily displaced to the upper side in the gravity direction by the displacement member 670.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 facing the decoration unit 762, and the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols displayed on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side in the vertical direction.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM3 from the state shown in FIGS. 57A and 58, the large-diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. Thereby, the first link member 6
84 and the second link member 686 are displaced to approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Accordingly, the insertion holes 684b and 6 of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are provided.
The displacement member 670 connected to 86b is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a as shown in FIG.
) And the state shown in FIG. 59 to the state shown in FIG. 57 (c) and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 57B and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate position, the torsion spring S is inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is an intermediate position on the other end side (side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by changing the engagement position.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side.
Similar to the P2 torsion spring SP1, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (through hole 67
1d1) is an intermediate position. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by changing the engagement position.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than the retracted state is formed between the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 facing the decoration unit 762, and the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol displayed on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side.

Therefore, from the retracted state in which three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 are displayed in the vertical direction,
The displacement member 670 is in an intermediate state in which one figure side decorated by the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction.
By displacing the game, it is possible to form a plurality of production modes and improve the interest of the player. Further, by displaying one figure side decorated on the inner reel 811 in the vertical direction, one symbol can be noticed by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to clarify the part to be noticed, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the effect. As a result, it can suppress that a player's interest falls.

As shown in FIGS. 57 (c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is the tip position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by changing the engagement position.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side.
Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the engagement position of P2 with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (through hole 6
71d1 is the tip position on the side inserted into 71d1. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by changing the engagement position.

That is, the urging force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear with the displacement of the displacement member 670. Thereby, the necessary urging force is applied to the torsion spring SP1 depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670.
, SP2 can be easily given. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the overhanging state, the decoration unit 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is brought into contact with the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 8 is arranged from the player side (front side).
The display of 00 can be made invisible.

Therefore, by placing the displacement member 670 in the overhanging state, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced, and then the displacement member 670 is displaced to an intermediate state or a retracted state, so that the player has a uniform pattern ( It ’s easy to get a sense of expectation) As a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the displacement members 670 arranged in the upper and lower pairs are displaced by the same amount has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two drive motors KM3 is rotationally driven. Thus, the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower sides can be displaced to the position of the intermediate state or the overhanging state only on one side.

Further, the maximum amount of displacement of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is not set at the intermediate position, and can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. That is, the pair of displacement members 6
It can be displaced up and down with the 70 in contact.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 are schematic views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 61 to 63, the transition state of the displacement member 670 is illustrated in order.

61 to 63, U is given to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670, and
The description will be made by adding the symbol D to the end of the symbol of the displacement member 670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670.

As shown in FIG. 61, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes an extending member 671 of the displacement member 670.
Are arranged on both the left and right sides. The pair of extending members 671 includes a driven side where the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681, and a driving side where the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted by the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683. Connected to either one.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction. .

Here, a first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) and a first displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching or separating from each other and displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. A gaming machine including a two-displacement member (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to such a gaming machine, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are brought close to a position where the opposing sides come into contact with each other, so that an object (for example, the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, The liquid crystal display device and the production member) are shielded, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in directions away from each other, so that the shield is released along with the displacement and the object can be visually recognized. It is possible to produce an effect. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the same direction (for example, reciprocal displacement in one direction and the other direction) in a state where the opposing sides are in contact with each other, while maintaining shielding of the object. Further, it is possible to perform an effect before the cancellation of the shielding (effect that focuses attention on the cancellation operation of the shielding).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult to closely contact the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed. If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of the effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 and the driving means 6 for supporting the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D on the base member 660 so as to be displaceable, respectively.
80U and drive means 680D, and the support mode of the drive means 680U is a decoration unit 67.
To one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672D that is biased to one side of the facing side of 2U and is opposite to the other side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672D that contacts the one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672U. Since the support mode of the drive unit 680D is biased, the support mode of the drive unit 680U and the support mode of the drive unit 680D are opposite to each other (when the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other) It can be biased to the side rotated 180 ° with the center of one side and the other side of the opposite side as the rotation center. As a result, the decoration unit 67
The opposing sides of 2U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed (see FIG. 63).

In the present embodiment, since the number of constituent members is different on one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction),
The driving force transmitted to the left and right of the decoration unit 672 is different, and the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D may have their high rigidity side (low side) faced to the other side of low rigidity (high side). it can. Therefore, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (moves forward) the other party on the high rigidity side, and the low rigidity side Then you can create a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 6
72D facing sides can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

The driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force and a decoration unit 672U.
The first link member 684U and the second link member 686U are configured differently from each other while transmitting a driving force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U. The driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that couple the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and driving the driving motor KM3U to the pair of extending members 671U. The second link member 686D and the first link that transmit force and are configured differently from each other
Since the link member 684D is provided, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are provided.
It is possible to make the opposing sides easy to adhere to each other, and to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposing sides.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, for example, the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D are configured so that, for example, on the side where the driving force is large or the transmission timing of the driving force is In addition to pushing in (moving forward) the opponent, it is possible to form a state in which the opponent is received (retracted) on the side where the driving force is small or the transmission timing of the driving force is later. As a result, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides.

The extending member 671U and the extending member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side is coaxially rotated with the base member 660. Because it is pivotally supported, the decoration unit 672U
Further, when the decorative unit 672D is reciprocated in the same direction while contacting the opposing sides, the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other can be easily maintained even when the bias of the support mode is used.

Further, the extending member 671U or the extending member 671D is provided with an elastic member 671f formed of a rubber-like elastic material. When the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, the elastic member 671f is elastic. Since the body is interposed between the extending member 671U and the extending member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other. Even when using the bias of the support mode, the state where the opposing sides are in contact with each other can be easily maintained.

Further, as described above, the driving means 680U is driven by the driving motor KM3U that generates the driving force, and is driven by the driving motor KM3U, and the decoration unit 672U is used as the base member 6.
The driving means 680D includes a pair of extending members 671U coupled to the motor 60 and two torsion springs SP1 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extending members 671U, and a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force. A pair of extending members 671D that are driven by the drive motor KM3D and connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extending members 671D, respectively. Therefore, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D pushes (moves forward) the other party on the side having a large urging force, for example. On the side where power is small, a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent can be formed. As a result, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 6
72D facing sides can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

The two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. That is, the urging forces applied to the pair of extending members 671U may be different from each other by different positions at which the urging forces are applied or different elastic deformation amounts. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and that connects the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and the pair of extending members. A first urging member that applies an urging force to one of 671U, and the driving means 680D is a driving motor KM3D that generates the driving force.
A pair of extending members 671D that are driven by the drive motor KM3D and connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and a second urging force that applies an urging force to one of the pair of extending members 671D. Therefore, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D pushes (moves forward) the other party on the side on which the urging force is applied, for example. On the side where the urging force is not applied, a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent can be formed. As a result, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides.

As described above, one leg is connected to the extending member 671U and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and the decoration unit 672U is connected to the decoration unit 6 as a torsion spring.
Since the torsion spring SP1 that applies a biasing force in the direction of approaching 72D is provided, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D, the extending member 67 is provided.
The driving force of the driving motor KM3U necessary for rotating 1U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the retracted position away from the decoration unit 672D from the stop state to the contact position where the decoration unit 672U contacts the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be started smoothly.

In this case, as the extending member 671U is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672U is brought closer to the decoration unit 672D, the connection position of one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U or the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where the force is applied is increased, so that the decoration unit 672U is attached in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D. You can weaken the power. Therefore, for example, when stopping the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be surely stopped, so that damage due to the collision can be suppressed. Further, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is increased. This can improve the production effect.

On the other hand, the torsion spring is formed and one leg is connected to the extending member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the torsion is applied to apply a biasing force in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D comes close to the decoration unit 672U. As the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connecting position of one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other of the torsion spring SP2 is provided. Since at least one of the connecting positions of the leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP
The torsion spring SP2 has the same effect as 1. In particular, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed in both, and this is particularly effective. Further, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are at the same height (arranged at the position in the gravitational direction), the position where the two come into contact is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravitational direction, and the position where the two are separated from each other The configuration of the torsion spring SP1 and the torsion spring SP2 is particularly effective when the (retraction position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

Since the decoration unit 672U is moved closer to the decoration unit 672D by the upward displacement in the gravity direction, the decoration unit 6 becomes closer to the decoration unit 672U as it is positioned lower in the gravity direction.
The urging force in the direction in which 72U is displaced upward in the gravity direction can be increased (that is, the decoration unit 6).
The biasing force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity can be weakened as 72U is positioned upward in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced (raised) from the stopped state toward the upper side in the gravitational direction, the displacement (rise) can be started smoothly, and when the raised decoration unit 672U is stopped. Can stop the displacement reliably not only by the action of gravity but also by the weakening of the biasing force. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage accompanying the collision with the decoration unit 672D. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U that is displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened so that the biasing force counters the action of gravity that continues to descend. Can do. As a result, the decoration unit 672U can be reliably stopped.

A torsion spring SP2 which is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the extending member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member 660 and applies a biasing force in a direction to separate the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. And the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by the upward displacement in the direction of gravity. Therefore, when the decoration unit 672D is displaced in a direction away from the decoration unit 672U, that is, the decoration unit 672D is moved in the direction of gravity. When it is necessary to displace (raise) against the extension member 671,
The driving force of the driving motor KM3D necessary for rotating U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extending member 671D is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is brought closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connection position of one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied (the direction of gravity) The urging force in the upward direction) can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed. Can be improved and the production effect can be improved.

Next, the rotation member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusions 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 are formed in a mountain shape inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a has been described. However, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment has The formed projection 2812a is formed in a curved hemisphere. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 64A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment.
FIG. 64B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 2812 taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. FIG. 64 (a) corresponds to FIG. 36 (a).

As shown in FIG. 64, the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812 has an outer reel unit 820.
A protrusion 2812a1 is formed to protrude toward the edge 824. The protrusion 2812a1 is connected to the hub 8
12a is formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

The protrusion 2812a1 is formed in a bowl shape. As a result, the inner reel unit 8
When 10 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In addition, since the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is formed in a bowl shape, the rigidity can be made higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
When the leading end of the projection 2812a1 comes into contact with the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 when the 0 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotationally driven, the projection 2812a can be prevented from being damaged.

Next, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812 has been described. However, in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge 824. In addition,
The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 65 is a sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 according to the third embodiment, and FIG.
) Is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram of L in FIG. 66 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit 820 in the XVIb-LXVIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, a protrusion 382 projecting toward the rotating member 812 side of the inner reel unit 810 is formed on the edge 824 on the extension line of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820.
4a is formed. The protrusion 3824a is outside the spokes 3822 (on the outer reel 821 side).
Formed at the end.

The protrusion 3824a is formed so that both sides thereof are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.
Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out and wind can be generated. Further, the pushed air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the opposing inner reel unit 810 and flows into between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, the inner reel 811
It is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, a rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is provided with the hub 81.
Although the case where it forms in the mountain shape which both sides incline along the circumferential direction of 2a was demonstrated, the protrusion 4812a formed in the rotating member 4812 of 4th Embodiment inclines with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. It is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG.
) Is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68 (b) is an LXVI of FIG. 68 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the rotation member 4812 in the IIb-LXVIIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a protrusion 4812a1 protruding toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape in a side view, and its longitudinal direction and the hub 812a.
It forms in the aspect which crosses with the radial direction. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end. Also,
The inclination direction is formed so as to be inclined toward the normal rotation direction side of the inner reel unit 810.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed air (wind) is the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821.
Is caused to flow between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 facing each other.
Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end, and the inclined direction is the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since the inner side reel unit 810 is rotated, it is possible to easily generate wind. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have light transmittance, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Through the outer reel unit 820, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the inner reel unit 810
The protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 whose number of rotations is larger than that of the outer reel unit 820. In the production by the rotation of the unit 810, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, an inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the spoke 812c of the inner reel unit 810 is
In the fifth embodiment, the spoke 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 is directed outward in the radial direction. However, in the fifth embodiment, the spoke 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 is directed outward in the radial direction. Accordingly, the outer reel unit 820 is formed so as to be inclined to the side opposite to the edge portion 824. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment. 70 (a
) Is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70 (b) shows LXXb− in FIG. 70 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the annular member 813 in a LXXb line. In the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the inner reel unit 5810 in the fifth embodiment is
The spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are formed to be inclined to the opposite side of the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as it goes radially outward. Therefore, the outer reel unit 820
The inclination direction of the spokes 822 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

Further, the edge 8 of the outer reel unit 820 of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810 is provided.
A protrusion 5813a is formed on the surface facing 24 (see FIG. 70). Protrusion 5813
A plurality of a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813.

The protrusion 5813 a is formed in a mountain shape that is inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. Thus, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed air (wind) is sent to the edge 8 of the opposing outer reel 821.
By colliding with 24, the air flows between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, the inner reel 8
11 can prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of 11 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800, they are located between the opposing sides (the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820). Since the air cannot be sufficiently sent to the space between the drive motors KM1 and KM2 for driving the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 break down. There was a fear.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection 5813a can generate a flow of air that flows between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, it is possible to easily inhale air from both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800.
Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, since the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, it is possible to suppress the failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810 has been described. However, in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 681 is formed.
2a1 and 6824a are formed in the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 in the sixth embodiment. 72 (a
) Is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72 (b) is an illustration of LXXI in FIG. 72 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the rotation member 6812 in the Ib-LXXIIb line. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73 (b) is an LXXIII in FIG. 73 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit 820 in b-LXXIIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the hub 812 a of the rotating member 6812 is formed with a protrusion 6812 a 1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Protrusion 2812a1
Are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Further, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a mountain shape in which both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

A protrusion 6824a that protrudes toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed on the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Further, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed on the radially inner side of the rotating member 6812 with respect to the protrusion 6824a. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the protrusion 6812a1 can be prevented from colliding with the protrusion 6824a.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the projection 6
Wind can be generated by 812a1 and the protrusion 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820.

In this case, the air pushed out to either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can be made to collide with either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further regulated. Therefore, the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel can be accelerated. This
Dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, since the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a are erected on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a in different radial directions, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is provided. No matter which of these is rotated, the edge 824
Wind pressure can be generated by displacing the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the hub 812a and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Therefore, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased in the effect produced by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810.

Inclined surfaces are formed on the surfaces of the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a facing each other in the radial direction. Thereby, the air resistance when air flows in the radial direction can be reduced. As a result, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be easily blown off.

Further, the arrangement interval in the circumferential direction of the protrusion 6812a1 and the arrangement interval in the circumferential direction of the protrusion 6824a are formed at different intervals. Thereby, the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824
Since a overlaps in the radial direction, a plurality of positions where air is compressed can be dispersed. As a result, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction and the air is compressed, so that it is possible to suppress the rotation speed of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being slowed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77, a rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the first electric combination 520 is driven in the same manner in the left-right symmetry has been described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the first electric combination 520 is driven differently on the left and right. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, the rotation member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 74A is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 has two plate-like bodies formed in a substantially L shape in a side view in parallel with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and a connecting portion 533a between the opposing ends on one end side. Are connected to each other. In addition, the plate-like bodies disposed at the left and right ends are substantially L in the side view shape.
The bending angle of bending into a letter is arranged differently on the left and right. In the seventh embodiment, the L-shaped bending angle of the plate-like body formed on the left side of the front view is set larger than the L-shaped bending angle of the plate-like body formed on the right side of the front view.

Therefore, the drive part 7533d formed to be recessed on the other end side (left side in FIG. 74B) of the rotation member 7533 is formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right. In addition, the driving unit 7533d
The recessed width (the vertical width on the left side in FIG. 74 (b)) is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the protrusion 523 can slide inside the drive portion 7533d. Formed.

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (the dimension between the opposing surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is smaller than the dimension between the opposing insides of the two first protrusions 532 b of the sliding member 532. Is set. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 facing each other.

Further, in the front view, the rotation member 7533 is set such that the dimension between the opposing left and right plate members is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members).

The rotating member 7533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes from the bent portion, which is substantially L-shaped in side view, to both sides in the left-right direction.
3c, a protrusion 533b projecting from the end on one end side of the substantially L shape in side view to the left and right sides, and a drive portion 7533d formed by being recessed at the tip on the other end side of the substantially L shape in side view. Formed in preparation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, a driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75A to 75C are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 76 (a) to 76 (c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

75 (a) and 76 (a) show the first state of the first electric accessory 520 in FIG. 75 (c).
) And FIG. 76 (c) show the second state of the first electric accessory 520 as shown in FIG. 75 (b) and FIG. 76 (b).
FIG. 2 illustrates a state where the first electric accessory 520 is positioned between the first state and the second state. 75 and 76 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are viewed transparently.

75 (a) and 76 (a), the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is
In a state of projecting from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pushed to the front side (left side in FIG. 75 (a)), and the driving portion 7533d is positioned downward.
As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state by the projection 523 being pushed downward.

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the right drive unit 7533d and the upper side of the protrusion 523R (upper side in FIG. 75A) of the right wing member 520R. This is because the protrusion 523R is connected to the driving unit 753.
The center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side in front of the rotation shaft (through hole 521R) while the right wing member 520R is in the first state by being pushed down to a certain position by 3d.
It is formed by rotating 20R to the first state by its own weight.

Further, the inner side of the left drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L (FIG. 7
5 (a) lower side) is formed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75B and 76B, the movable body 53 of the solenoid 531.
When pulling 1b into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pulled to the back side (the right side in FIG. 75 (b)), and the driving unit 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the protrusion 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive unit 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523L (the lower side in FIG. 75A) of the left wing member 520L. When the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving unit 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving unit 7533d and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the clearance. Therefore, the right wing member 520
The start of the displacement of R to the second state is made faster.

Next, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body 531a through the states shown in FIGS. 75B and 76B, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the drive unit 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward,
The first electric combination 520 is set to the second state shown in FIGS. 76 (c) and 76 (c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523R (the lower side of FIG. 75 (c)) of the right wing member 520R. This is because the protrusion 523L is connected to the drive unit 7.
The center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched from the rotation axis (through hole 521L) to the left of the front view while the left wing member 520L is in the second state by being pushed up to a certain position by 533d, and the left wing member 520L is moved by its own weight. It is formed by rotating to the first state.

Further, the inner side of the right drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R (FIG. 7).
5 (a) lower side) is formed.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 5
20R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be displaced to the second state after the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 76 (c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (c) is the displacement from the first state to the second state described above. Since it is only the opposite, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 5
20L can be started first, and the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the first state can be made earlier than the left wing member 520L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, description will be given of a case where a game ball enters the winning slot unit 500 of the seventh embodiment. 77 (a) and 77 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in FIG. 24 (b). FIGS. 77A and 77B show a state where the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B, the first electric accessory 520 is moved from the second state to the first.
When displaced to the state, the left wing member 520L is started first and the right wing member 52 is started.
The displacement of 0R to the first state is made slower than the left wing member 520L.

That is, a state where only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened can be instantaneously formed. At this time, when a game ball enters from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is front side (lower side in FIG. 77 (a)) by the bulging portion 524R. Be guided to. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the game ball collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the front side, the bulging portion 524 is formed.
The game ball collided with L can be easily bounced back. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball entered from the right wing member 520R to enter the second winning opening 140.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the first state, the bulging portion 5
A game that is entered during the displacement to the first state by shifting the right wing member 520R on the opposite side to the left wing member 520L on the side where 24L is formed on the front side from the left wing member 520L. The ball can be smoothly sent to the second winning opening 140.

In the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one wing member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed and the other wing member. Since the timing at which (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed is different, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (side surface 526)
L, 526R) makes it difficult to sandwich the game ball, and accordingly, the pair of wing members 520L, 52
The facing interval of 0R can be narrowed. Therefore, a space required for disposing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, a rotating member 8533 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. In the first embodiment, the second protrusion 532 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the sliding member 532.
Although the case where c is formed has been described, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e for restricting the entry of the game ball is formed on the rotating member 8533. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531 and
A sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a first case in which the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are disposed in a displaceable state. A member 534 and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534 are mainly provided.

The sliding member 8532 is formed in a substantially E shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first protrusions protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a to the front side. Protrusion 53
2b and a third protrusion 532e which is located between the two first protrusions 532b and protrudes on the front side.

The sliding member 8532 has a dimension in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 532a that is the first case member 53.
4 is formed to be smaller than the opposing dimension in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral surface. Thereby, the sliding member 8532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534.

The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, and thereby can restrict the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state. That is, the third protrusion 8532e is formed at the lower end surface above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies formed in a substantially L shape in a side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. The The clearance between the two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 8533 (between two plate-like bodies).

In addition, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 8533 (the dimension between the opposing surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing insides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. The Thereby, the rotating member 8533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532 facing each other.

The rotating member 8533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes from the bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view to the left and right sides.
3c, a protrusion 533b projecting from both ends in the left-right direction from an end on one end side of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a drive unit 533d formed by being recessed at the tip on the other end side of the substantially L-shaped side view The second protrusion 8533e is mainly provided to project from the center position in the left-right direction of the portion 533a to the front side.

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending to the front side, and includes a standing wall 8533e1 that is bent and standing at the projecting tip. The standing wall 8533e1 is formed to be curved in a convex shape on the front side in a side view, and its curved axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.
79A and 79B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 80 (a) and 80 (b) show the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.
FIG. FIG. 81A and FIG. 81B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

79 and 80, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state. 79 (a), 80 (a) and 81 (a), the state in which the first electric combination 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 79 (b), 80 (b) and 81. (
In b), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Furthermore, FIG.
1 (a) and FIG. 81 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, the movable body 531 b of the solenoid 531 is connected to the main body portion 531.
In the state of protruding from a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is on the front side (FIG. 79 (a)).
Left side) and the drive unit 533d is positioned downward. As a result, the first
The electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state by the projection 523 being pushed downward.

In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below. In this case, a distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82A) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, standing wall 8
By 533e1, it can suppress that a game ball rolls on the upper end surface of the standing part 534b, and is sent to the 2nd case member 535.

Further, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to be displaced to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third protrusion 8532e.

In other words, the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) is applied to the pair of wing members 520L, 52.
The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to 0R, and the transmission mechanism has an open slide position (position shown in FIG. 79 (b)) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 79 (a)) by the driving force of the drive means (solenoid 531). And a pair of wing members 520L that are rotated to the open rotation position by the slide displacement of the slide member 8532 to the open slide position.
, 520R, and a rotating member 8533 that can be at least closed by closing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R by being rotated to the closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the closed sliding position, and the standing wall 8533e1. Is disposed on the rotating member 8533. When the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is disposed at the allowable position, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closed rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is disposed. Is disposed at the restriction position, the sliding member 8532 is disposed at the closed slide position, and the rotating member 853 is disposed.
In the state in which 3 is disposed at the closed rotation position, the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are engaged to restrict the rotation of the rotation member 8533 to the open rotation position. It is easy to regulate illegally entering the winning entrance.

That is, from the state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed, for example, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or the rotating member 8533 is directly operated, thereby the rotating member. Even if it is intended to rotate 8533 to the open position, the rotation of the rotary member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by the engagement of the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the standing wall 8533 e 1 is restricted. Can be maintained in position (ie standing wall 8
It is possible to prevent 533e1 from being forcibly displaced from the outside to an allowable position). as a result,
The standing wall 8533e1 can restrict illegally entering the game ball into the entrance.

Further, the third protrusion 8532 protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533).
e and a sliding member 8532 (or a rotating member 8533) that can be engaged with the third protrusion 8532e.
) And the third protrusion 8532e protrudes along the slide displacement direction of the sliding member 8532. Therefore, by utilizing the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532,
The engagement between the third protrusion 8532e and the connecting portion 533a and the release of the engagement can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

Note that the engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) on which the third protrusion 8532e can abut, and a hole or a recess (in which the third protrusion 8532e can be inserted). It may be a hole formed in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533 or a recessed portion provided in the recessed portion. That is, the third protrusion 8532e may be any member that can regulate the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position by contacting the connecting portion 533a. In this case, the connecting portion 533a is preferably a hole or a recess. The third protrusion 8532e is the connecting portion 5
The space required for the arrangement of the third protrusion 8532e can be reduced by the amount inserted into the third protrusion 8532e, so that the size can be reduced and the third protrusion 8532 is inserted through the connecting portion 533a.
This is because e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third protrusion 8532e from the outside can be made difficult.

On the other hand, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is drawn to the back side (right side in FIG. 79 (b)), and the drive portion 533d is moved upward. Displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 has the protrusion 533.
In the second state, b is pushed upward.

Further, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned on the back side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the restriction on the rotation of the rotation member 8533 is released. as a result,
The first electric accessory 520 can be displaced by rotating the rotating member 8533.

Therefore, the drive portion 533d of the rotation member 8533 rotates toward the closed rotation position and the open-side contact portion 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position. And the closed-side contact portion 8533d2 that contacts and closes the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when being operated, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside and rotated. Unauthorized access from outside to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 can be made difficult.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing-side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L and 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. Try to rotate toward. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement of the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the displacement of the wing member is applied to the closing side of the rotating member 8533. Contact 8
It can be regulated by 533d2. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside, and unauthorized access to the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

In a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated, so that the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is rotated from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1. The distance dimension L7 (see FIG. 82 (b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 is placed in the standing portion 534.
The upper end surface of b can be rolled and sent to the second case member 535.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged will be described. FIG.
FIG. 82A and FIG. 82B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 82 (a)
And FIG.82 (b) respond | corresponds with sectional drawing of FIG. FIG. 14A shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14B shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric combination 520 are bent from the base end due to fraud or aging deterioration, and the first electric combination 520 becomes the first electric combination 520. When the state is changed to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below. The Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being sent to the second case member 535.

Therefore, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed or the pair of wing members 520
Since the arrangement of the standing wall 8533e1 can be maintained at the restricted position in a state where L and 520R are opened from the outside, it is possible to suppress the standing wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily restrict illegally entering the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

That is, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is closed or the pair of wing members 520L.
, 520R is opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated, and the standing wall 853 is operated.
The first case member 53 from the standing tip (end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20B)) of 3e1.
4 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Accordingly, the first winning combination 520 is caused by the player's fraud, and the second prize opening 1
Even if the game ball can be sent to 40, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the standing wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state (the game ball can be sent to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the gaming ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate entering the ball.

In this case, the standing wall 8533e1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously to the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. There is no need for a separate member that restricts illegal entry into the winning opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the second projection 8533e.
Since the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the protrusion is formed integrally with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, a drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. In the eighth embodiment, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is the main body 531.
Although the case where the movement of the first electric accessory 520 is restricted when being projected from a is described,
In the ninth embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is movable when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body portion 531a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531 and
A sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a first case in which the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are displaceable inside. A member 534 and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534 are mainly provided.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies formed in a substantially L shape in a side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. The The clearance between the two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Accordingly, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-like bodies).

Further, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 9533 (the dimension between the opposing surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing insides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. The Accordingly, the rotation member 9533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532 facing each other.

The rotating member 9533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes from the bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view to the left and right sides.
3c, a protrusion 533b protruding from both ends in the left-right direction from the end on one end side of the substantially L-shaped side view, a projecting portion 9533d protruding on the front side at the tip on the other end side of the substantially L-shaped side view, 533a is mainly provided with a second protrusion 8533e protruding from the center in the left-right direction.

The protruding portion 9533d is formed so as to protrude from the front end portion, and an upper portion thereof (FIG. 84 (
a) The length is set such that the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R can come into contact with the upper side surface.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86.
84 (a) and 84 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 85 (a) and 85 (b) show the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.
FIG. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning unit 500. FIG.

84 and 85 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are viewed transparently. 84 (a), 85 (a), and 86 (a), the state where the first electric combination 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 84 (b), 85 (b), and 86. (
In b), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Furthermore, FIG.
6 (a) and FIG. 86 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the movable body 531 b of the solenoid 531 is connected to the main body portion 531.
In the state of protruding from a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is on the front side (FIG. 84 (a)).
Left side) and the projecting portion 9533f is positioned below. Accordingly, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state by the projection 523 being pushed downward.

In the ninth embodiment, an urging spring (not shown) is disposed on the rotation shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. A biasing force that is rotationally displaced is always applied. Thereby, when the 1st electrically-powered article 520 is displaced to a 2nd state by force other than the drive of the solenoid 531 (for example, shaking of a pachinko machine), it can suppress staying in a 2nd state.

On the other hand, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is drawn to the back side (right side in FIG. 79 (b)), and the protruding portion 9533f is upward. Is displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 has the protrusion 53.
The second state in which 3b is pushed upward is set.

In this case, the first electric combination 520 can be maintained in the second state by the protrusion portion 9533f and the protrusions 523L and 523R of the first electric combination 520 always contacting each other.

Further, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a from the second state, and the projecting portion 9533f is displaced downward, so that the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring. Displaced to 1 state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is illegally operated. 87A and 87B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. Note that FIG.
7 (a) and 87 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 87 (a), the first
In the state in which the electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state in FIG.
Each state is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), with the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protruding from the main body portion 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by an illegal act of the player. When the first state is changed to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, since the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below, the standing ball 8533e1 causes the game ball to roll on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b to be second.
It is possible to suppress the ball being sent to the case member 535.

This (the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body 531a)
In this case, as described above, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it can suppress operating the standing wall 8533e1 from the player side. As a result, it is possible to suppress a disadvantage to the store side due to the illegal act of the player.

In the ninth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second protrusion are the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8.
Since it is integrally formed with 532, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in 9th Embodiment, it can suppress that the 1st electrically-powered article 520 is destroyed by the player's fraudulent act. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss on the store side due to the player's fraud.

That is, in the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring that biases the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction is provided, and the rotating member 9533 is rotated when it is rotated toward the open rotation position.
20L, 520R is provided with a projecting portion 9533f to be opened, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed by the urging force of the urging spring. When the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is illegally forcedly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are not brought into contact with the rotating member 9533, and an external force due to the forced opening is applied to the rotating member 9533. Can be avoided. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the rotating member 9533, or the sliding member 8532 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, as an urging unit that constantly applies an urging force that is rotationally displaced toward the first state to the first electric accessory 520, a spring (torsion) that urges the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force. In addition to a spring and a coil spring, a magnet that urges the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by an attractive force is exemplified.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is nonlinearly decreased (or increased) in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member 670. However, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 10678 is displaced. As a result, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed.
In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 10670.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment is the extended member 6.
71, an extending member 10671 arranged to face the extending member 671, a decorative unit 672 connected to the extending member 10671 and the extending member 671, and a rotatable state with respect to the extending member The rotary member 10678 is mainly provided.

The extending member 10671 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and protrudes outward in the left and right directions at a longitudinal end at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. The connecting projection 671b is formed mainly, and the rotary shaft 10671e is formed to protrude in a columnar shape toward the shaft support hole 671a from the connecting projection 671b.

The rotating member 10678 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view, and the extending member 10671 has a longitudinal direction intersecting with a longitudinal direction on the long side of the extending member 10671 in a side view.
It is arranged.

The rotating member 10678 has a through hole 10678 formed in a circumferential direction of a shaft supporting hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction and a shaft supporting hole 10671a of the extending member 10671 on one end side in the longitudinal direction.
b and an inclined surface 10678c formed by notching the side surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction.

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extending member 10671 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, the rotating shaft 1067
By inserting 1e into the shaft support hole 10777a and screwing it onto the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be disposed on the extending member 10671 in a rotatable state.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 10678 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91.
90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91 (a) and 91 (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 91 (a) and 91 (
FIG. 91 (b) shows the state when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced.
Then, a cross section in a state where the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are in contact with each other is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L according to the tenth embodiment, a displacement member 670 is disposed on the upper side and a displacement member 10670 is disposed on the lower side, and the shafts of the displacement members 670 and 10670 are disposed. The axis of the support hole 671a is coaxially arranged. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of displacement members 670 arranged in the upside down direction and the lower displacement member 670 of the displacement members 670 are changed to the displacement member 10670. The driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decoration units 672 of the displacement members 670 and 10670 disposed up and down are displaced in a direction approaching each other, the extending members 671 and 10671 are brought close to each other.

In the state where the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the inclined surface 10678 c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extending member 671. This
The rotating member 1067 is in a state where the inclined surface 10678c is substantially parallel to the side surface of the extending member 671.
8 is rotated about the shaft support hole 10678a (in FIG. 91B, the rotating member 10678 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft support hole 10678a).

Accordingly, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side across the inclined surface 10678c and the shaft support hole 10678a is also rotated in the same manner. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position where the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the urging force that acts on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced while the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, the contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 can be suppressed.

Further, the extending member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is disposed is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 that drives the displacement member 10670.
When the transmission of the driving force from the driving motor KM3 is made smaller than the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is caused by the displacement of the rotating member 10678. Can be increased to compensate for the shortage of driving force. As a result, it is possible to suppress the contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from being separated.

Next, referring to FIG. 92 to FIG. 94, the vertical displacement unit 11600 of the eleventh embodiment.
L will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted from the left and right sides of the displacement member 670 has been described. However, in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted from only one side of the displacement member 11670. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above,
The description is omitted.

92 to 94, as in FIGS. 61 to 63, the vertical displacement unit 600L.
U is added to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670, and the displacement member 670 is disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L.
In addition, a description will be given by adding the symbol D to the end of the symbol of the driving means that drives the displacement member 670.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94 are schematic views of the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. 92 to 94, the transition state of the displacement member 11670 is illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is disposed only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, the extended members 671 arranged symmetrically with the displacement member 670 are arranged in the eleventh embodiment.
The extended member 671 is in a state where it is disposed only on one of them.

In the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is provided on the driving side (the projection 683b of the large diameter gear 683).
The extending member 671 is connected to driving means on the driving side. Therefore, the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 disposed in a pair of upper and lower in the vertical displacement unit 11600L is disposed upside down in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the vertically displaceable member 11670 is displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both in the same direction from the state of FIG. 93, it is possible to displace in the vertical direction with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the driving of the decoration unit 672 on the opposite side to the driving side is slow, and there is a possibility that a gap is formed between the two decoration units 672 However, since the extending member 671 is disposed on the opposite side in the vertical direction, the end of the one decorative unit 672 opposite to the driving side is connected to the other decorative unit 67.
2 at the end of the drive side. As a result, the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 can be suppressed.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672. By delaying the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

More specifically, the decorative unit in which the driving side end of the decorative unit 672 driven earlier is driven later by increasing the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction of the decorative unit 672. The end of 672 opposite the drive side can be pushed out. On the other hand, the end of the decoration unit 672 that has been driven first is in contact with the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later with a stronger force. As a result, when the two displacement members 11670 are displaced in a state where the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress a gap from being formed between the two decoration units 672.

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is on one side, so that the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, the driving force of the displacement member 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 is advanced, whereby the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) is deformed and the elastic force when the displacement returns. Can be used to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a winning opening unit 500 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the front base 511 and the back base 51 of the winning opening unit 500 are described.
In the eleventh embodiment, the front base 51 has been described.
1 and the thickness of the back surface base 512 are partially changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 95 (a) is a top view of the winning a prize opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment.
FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. In FIG. 95 (a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent, and in FIG. 95 (b), the front base 511 is shown as being opaque. FIG. 95 (b
In FIG. 24B, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is indicated by a two-dot chain line together with the reference numeral KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed such that the thickness in the front-rear direction (FIG. 95 (b) vertical direction) is partially different on the left and right with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. That is, the second
A front-side bulging portion 12511 f that bulges to the back side at the upper right side of the winning opening 140 is provided.

Further, the back base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (FIG. 95 (b) vertical direction) is partially different on the left and right with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. That is, a rear side bulging portion 12512d that bulges to the rear side at the upper left side of the second winning opening 140 is provided.

The front-side bulged portion 12511f and the back-side bulged portion 12512d have a pair of wing members 520L,
It is formed outside the displacement region of 520R. Accordingly, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R
And the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d are prevented from colliding with each other.

In addition, the front-side bulged portion 12511f and the back-side bulged portion 12512d have their end portions in the left-right direction (FIG. Direction) located outside. Thereby, the game ball that flows down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and is likely to be sent to the side surfaces 526L and 526R is surely collided with the front-side expanded portion 12511f and the back-side expanded portion 12512d. Can do.

The front-side bulged portion 12511f is formed on a side surface facing the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulged portion 524R of the right wing member 520R. In other words, the front-side bulged portion 12511f is formed on the side surface in the front-rear direction opposite to the position where the bulged portion 524R is formed in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the back side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface facing the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L. In other words, the back-side bulged portion 12512d is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulged portion 524L in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is moved to the front side bulging portion 1251.
It can be guided to the back side by colliding with If. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be moved toward the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can be easily caused to collide with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can be collided with the rear side bulging portion 12512d and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can be easily caused to collide with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) is expanded to the bulging portion 52.
By abutting against 4L and 524R, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the second winning opening 140 and to prevent clogging of the balls.

When a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) Such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached the guide surface in one wing member (one of wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface in the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the pitching speed can be slowed by causing the game balls sent to the wing members 520L and 520R to collide with the front-side expanded portion 12511f and the back-side expanded portion 12512d. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the impact when colliding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, and it is possible to suppress the wing members 520L and 520R from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a winning opening unit 500 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The winning opening unit 500 according to the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a protrusion that protrudes between the front base 511 and the back base 512 according to the first embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 96 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment.
FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. In FIG. 96 (a), the front base 511 is illustrated as being transparent, and in FIG. 96 (b), the front base 511 is illustrated as being opaque. Also, FIG.
In FIG. 24B, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is shown by a two-dot chain line together with the reference number of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 has a rear base 51 on the left side of the second winning opening 140.
A protrusion 13511g protruding to the second side is formed. Further, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e that protrudes toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second winning opening 140.

The protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. Thus, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R and the protrusion 13511
It is suppressed that g and the protrusion 13512e collide.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface on the same side as the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e is provided with a bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.
Is formed on the side surface facing the formation position in the front-rear direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can be collided with the protrusion 13511g and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the right upper side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought close to the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524R when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526R. As a result, the wing member 520R can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, the game ball sent from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the wing member 520R does not collide with the protrusion 13511g formed above the wing member 520R, and the side surface 52
It will be sent to 6R. The game ball in this case can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be moved toward the back side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526L, it can be difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, the wing member 520L can be prevented from being damaged.

Also, the game ball sent from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the wing member 520L does not collide with the protrusion 13512e formed above the wing member 520L, and the side surface 52
It will be sent to 6L. The game ball in this case can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) is expanded to the bulging portion 52.
By abutting against 4L and 524R, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the second winning opening 140 and to prevent clogging of the balls.

When a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) Such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached the guide surface in one wing member (one of wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface in the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e can reduce the number of game balls that collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R, the wing member 520 can be reduced.
The durability of L and 520R can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the wing members 14520L and 145 of the fourteenth embodiment.
The 20R (first variable device 14520) will be described. The wing member 1452 of the fourteenth embodiment
0L and 14520R are formed with different width dimensions in the front-rear direction of the bulging portions 524L and 524R from the first embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 97A is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment.
FIG. 7B is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 98 (a) shows the prize winning unit 5
FIG. 98 (b) is a cross-sectional view of XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98 (a).
FIG. 98 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L along the line, and FIG. 98 (c) is an XC of FIG. 98 (b).
It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the right wing member 520R in the VIIIc-XCVIIIc line.

In FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the perspective direction in the left-right direction is shown in the opposite direction. Further, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 98 (a), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the reference number of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Furthermore, virtual line K
The front direction of S1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. Left wing member 14520
L is a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, and the through hole 521L.
A recess 522L that is recessed from the front side to the back side, a projection 523L that projects from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side, and a recess in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the through hole 521L side. Recessed portion 525L and a pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state
The side surface 14526L of the opposing surface and the bulging portion 14 formed to project from the side surface 14526L
524L mainly.

The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 formed to be inclined upward from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 1452 formed from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction to the front side.
6L2.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back surface side (left side in FIG. 98 (b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. As a result, among the game balls sent to the side surface 14256L, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526L1 are inclined to the smooth surface 145 by the downward inclination.
It can be guided to the 2L2 side.

Further, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526L1 (FIG. 98B, the back side of the paper surface). The bulging portion 14524L has a wing member 1452 having a width dimension in the front-rear direction.
It is formed smaller than half of the width in the front-rear direction of 0L. That is, the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 15254L is made smaller than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524L.

As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 is rolled to the smooth surface 14526L2 side.
The probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L collides with the bulging portion 14524L can be reduced.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The right wing member 14520R includes a through-hole 521R penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through-hole 521R, and a rear side from the vicinity of the through-hole 521R. Protrusion 523R projecting from
A recessed portion 525R that is recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end surface on the through hole 521R side,
Side surface 1452 of the opposing surface of the pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R in the closed state
6R and a bulging portion 14524R projecting and formed on a side surface 14526R thereof.

The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 formed to be inclined upward from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 1452 formed from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction to the front side.
6R2.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 98 (c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2 side. As a result, among the game balls sent to the side surface 14256R, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526R1 are reduced to the smooth surface 145.
It can be guided to the 2R2 side.

Further, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (FIG. 98B, the back side of the paper surface). The bulging portion 14524L has a wing member 1452 having a width dimension in the front-rear direction.
It is formed larger than half of the width in the front-rear direction of 0L. That is, the front-rear direction width of the inclined surface 14526R1 is made larger than the front-rear direction width of the bulging portion 14524L. Therefore, the left wing member 1
The bulging portion 1 of the right wing member 14520R is larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524L of 4520L.
The width in the front-rear direction of 4524R is formed larger.

As described above, among the game balls that roll on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 14526R1 is rolled to the smooth surface 14526R2 side.
The probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R collides with the bulging portion 14524R can be reduced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is formed in such a form that a game ball flows down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and is easily sent to the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the open wing members 520L and 520R. The More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pair of wing members 520L,
The first through gate 66 that opens the 520R is disposed on the left side of the center frame 86, and is configured so that the game ball is launched toward the left side of the center frame 86 during time reduction or probability change. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game board 13 flow down the entire left side of the game board 13 and are sent to the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R). It becomes easy.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L.
There is a problem that a lot of game balls are sent, wear of the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L is accelerated, and the left wing member 14520L is easily broken.

On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R have inclined surfaces 1452.
6L1, 14526R1 and the inclined surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1
The bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed in the bulging portion 14 on the side where a lot of game balls are sent.
Since 524L and 14524R are formed small in the front-rear direction, the wing member 1 on the side where many balls are sent
By reducing the probability that a game ball will collide with the bulging portion 14524L of 4520L, the bulging portion 1
It is possible to prevent the wear of 4524L from being accelerated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing members 14520L and 14520R on the side where a lot of game balls are sent from being easily broken.

Next, referring to FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, the variable winning device 150 in the fifteenth embodiment.
65 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed in the pair of wing members 520L and 520R has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c are formed in the variable winning device 65. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 99 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
) Is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. Figure 100
(A) is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13, FIG.100 (b) is sectional drawing of the game board 13 in the Cb-Cb line | wire in Fig.100 (a).

99 (a) and 100 (a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. 99 shows the closed state of the variable prize apparatus 15065, and FIG. 100 shows the open state of the variable prize apparatus 15065. Also, in FIG. 100 (b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated with a two-dot chain line together with the reference number of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

The closed state of the variable winning device 15065 is the variable winning device 15 formed in a plate state.
The 065 plane is positioned substantially parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the plane on the front side of the game board 13 and the game ball flowing down the game area is a specific winning port (large open port). ) 65a is a state where it is possible to enter the ball.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable winning device 15065 is formed in a plate-like body that is long to the left and right, and is disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the game board 13 around one end on the back side. Also,
The variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying a driving force to the driving device, the variable winning device 15065 can be displaced between a closed position and an open position. Is done.

Further, the variable winning device 15065 has two bulging portions 15065b and 15065c projectingly formed on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side in the open state. Furthermore, the variable winning device 1506
5 side surfaces 15065a are formed so as to be inclined downward from the left and right sides toward the center. Thereby, the game ball sent to the side surface 15065a can roll toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a as viewed from the front, and is connected to the front end face in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 100 (b)). The bulging portion 15065c is positioned on the right side of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a as viewed from the front, and is connected to the rear end face in the alveolar state (the state shown in FIG. 100B).

In other words, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are provided with a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.
Are formed on both the left and right sides with a gap therebetween, and are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction. Thereby, when a game ball is sent to the left and right sides of the open variable winning device 15065, the game ball can be prevented from colliding in front of the specific winning port (large opening) 65a and bounced back to the left and right sides. .

More specifically, a game ball sent to the left side of the front side of the side surface 15065a collides with the bulging portion 15065b and is guided to the back side when it rolls to the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a side. The On the other hand, when the game ball is sent to the right side of the side 15065a as viewed from the front, when it rolls to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, it collides with the bulging portion 15065c and is guided to the front.

Therefore, the position in the front-rear direction of the game ball sent from the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a is set to the bulging portion 1.
It can be displaced by 5065b and the bulging part 15065c. Thus, side 15
When game balls are sent to both the left and right sides of 065a and the left and right game balls collide in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the rebound (repulsion) direction can be changed to the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

Further, when a game ball is sent from the left or right side of the side surface 15065a, the bulging portion 15065 is used.
When the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the front side of the side surface 15065a by causing the game ball to collide with one of the b or the bulge portion 15065c and displace the front-rear direction position, the game ball is swelled to the bulge portion 150.
It can be made to collide with the other of 65b or the bulging part 15065c. As a result, side 150
It is possible to suppress a game ball sent from one side of 65a rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and coming out to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

The side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or greater than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and a pair of bulging portions. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions sandwiching the entrance in front view, and are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) on the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

Also, one bulging part 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging part 15065b, 150
65c is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a), so that the variable winning device 150
When a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of 65 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. Therefore, one side (or the other side) in the width direction to the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065.
Can be prevented from flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. As a result, the game ball can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the engagement of the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged by the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third protrusion 8532e coming into contact with each other. The third protrusion 16532e is recessed in the portion 533a.
This is done by inserting. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 101A shows the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 85 in the sixteenth embodiment.
FIG. 101 (b) is a first view of FIG. 101 (a) taken along line CIb-CIb.
FIG. 101C is a sectional view of the electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530, and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the 1st electrically-driven accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the CIc-CIc line | wire of (b).

As shown in FIG. 101, the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment is formed with a recessed portion 16533a1 that is recessed from the back side to the front side at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the back.

Further, the third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed to project at a position facing the above-described recessed portion 16533a1 in the front-rear direction. The front view shape of the third protrusion 16532e is formed in a horizontally long rectangle that is slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and the tip is formed in a tapered shape.

Accordingly, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are in the closed state, the recessed portion 16 is provided.
The third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside 533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged.

Further, in this case, since the engaging portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, the third protrusion 16532e
Since the space required for disposing the third protrusion 16532e can be reduced by the amount inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, the size can be reduced, and the third portion is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1. The protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third protrusion 16532e from the outside can be made difficult.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, the sliding member 1573 in the seventeenth embodiment.
2 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the standing wall 532c1 is positioned upstream of the sensor device SE1 disposed on the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second winning port 140 has been described. In the seventeenth embodiment, a case where the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. 103 (a) and 103 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

In FIG. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent manner. 102 (a) and 103 (a), the first electric combination 520 is in a closed state, and in FIGS. 102 (b) and 102 (b), the first electric combination 520 is in an open state. Each of these states is illustrated. FIG. 102 (a) and FIG. 102 (b) are similar to FIG.
It corresponds to the cross section of a) and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment is
A standing wall 17532c1 is formed to project from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (the lower side of FIG. 102 (a)). The standing wall 17532c1 is provided with a standing wall 17532c1 formed such that the tip thereof is set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535 and the tip is bent to the front side.

The standing length of the standing wall 17532c1 on the front side is such that when the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, the upper and lower side surfaces are below the sensor device SE1 disposed on the second case member 535. Set to the length to be located.

In addition, the second case member 535 is formed with an opening 17535b that is formed by penetrating in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103A). The second protrusion 17532c is disposed in a state of being inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-rear direction is set to be larger than the slide width of the sliding member 17532 that slides and displaces in the front-rear direction (drive width of the solenoid 531). Thereby, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction in a state where the second protrusion 17532c is inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the standing wall 17532c1 is positioned on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1, and the game The insertion of the sphere can be restricted. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the standing wall 1
7532c1 is disposed on the back side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (a hole for detecting the passage of the game ball). Thereby, when the 1st electrically-driven accessory 520 is made into an open state, a game ball can be penetrated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a case will be described in which the first electric combination is forcibly set to the second state due to the player's fraud. 104 (a) and 104 (b) show the winning unit 500.
FIG. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are similar to FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b).
It corresponds to the cross section of (b). FIG. 104 (a) shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is closed, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is opened.

As shown in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened due to the illegal act of the player. When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the front-rear direction position of the sliding member 17532 is set to the same position as in the closed state, as in the first embodiment.

Accordingly, when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly opened, the standing wall 17532c1 is disposed on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game ball into which the game ball has entered from the second winning port 140 is stagnated on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1.

In this case, the separation distance from the sensor device SE1 to the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball fastened on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is in a state that is always detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 is illegally opened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and to notify the store operator of the cheating by the player.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a sensor device SE1 that detects a game ball that has entered the second winning port 140, and the standing wall 17532c1 has a restricted position downstream of the sensor device SE1. In addition, since the game ball is restricted at a position where the sensor device SE1 can detect, for example, when the wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and the game ball is illegally flowed from the entrance, the sensor device The state in which SE1 has detected the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether the detection by the sensor device SE1 has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that the game ball has been illegally introduced.

Next, the rotating member 18812 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, the protrusion 2812 a 1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is formed by the hub 812.
In the eighteenth embodiment, the protrusion 18812a1 is formed at a different distance in the radial direction from the axis of the hub 812a.
In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 105 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment,
FIG. 105B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment is provided with a projection 18812a1 projecting in a hemispherical shape toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 arranged to face the hub 812a. Provide multiple.

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the air flow generated by the first (a tip positioned on the rotation side) projection 18812a1 is transferred to the second projection 18812a1 (the rotation rear side of the previous projection 18812a1). It can be made to collide easily.
Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 so as to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the relationship among the accommodation unit 880, the inner reel unit 810, and the outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment,
Although the case where the side wall portion 881 of the housing unit 880 is formed in a plate-like body has been described, the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment has a plurality of openings. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

106 (a) and 12 (b) show a decorative symbol display device 800 in the nineteenth embodiment.
FIG. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the outer reel unit 82 is used.
A state where 0 is changed (rotationally displaced) is illustrated. In FIG. 106 (b), an opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is indicated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a), a plurality of openings 19881d penetrating in the left-right direction are formed in the side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30 (a)) arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 800 when viewed from the front. Is done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation axes of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The formation angle of adjacent openings 19881d is:
Spoke 812c of inner reel unit 810 and spoke 82 of outer reel unit 820
2 is set to be substantially the same as the formation angle of 2. Moreover, the opening dimension in the circumferential direction of the opening 19881d is set smaller than the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the spoke 812c and the spoke 822. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 106A, the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) is rotated to a predetermined position, so that the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812) is rotated.
c) can be placed next to the opening 19881d. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered with the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812c) in a side view.

Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated, air can be prevented from flowing in from the opening 19812c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) are arranged at circumferential positions different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated, air can be allowed to flow from the opening 19812c. In other words, by making the air inflow path the shortest and reducing the air resistance, the air can easily flow into the decorative symbol display device 800 (accommodating unit 880).

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated so that the player can visually recognize other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811, the inflow of air from the opening 19881 d is restricted to control the inner reel 811. The display can be easily seen by the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d is allowed and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned. It can be done easily.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the bulging portions 524L and 52 of the pair of left and right wing members 520L and 520R are provided.
Although the case where it forms symmetrically other than 4R was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side so that the wing members 520L and 520R have the same shape. In this case, the wing member 520L
, 520R can be formed of the same parts, so that the wing members 520L,
The manufacturing cost of 520R can be reduced.

Although the case where the inclined portion 625a of the reflecting member 625 is formed on a smooth surface has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curvedly formed in a convex state toward the light transmitting portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed and can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the light transmission part 621a can be made uniform.

In the first and eleventh implementations, the case where the number of components arranged is different has been described as an aspect in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) are different in the configured rigidity (dimensions, material, etc. of the constituent members), and the driving force (size, size) transmitted between the one side and the other side Transmission time, transmission timing, etc.), one side and the other side have different connection states (for example, the number of connection parts, amount of rattling of the connection parts, etc.), one side and the other side It is also possible to use a combination of these, which is different in ease of displacement to the other party (such as an urging force received from the urging means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc.).

Thus, when the supporting state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the driving means 6
80U and the driving means 680D have their own high rigidity side (low side) on the opposite low rigidity side (
(High side). Therefore, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680 are provided.
Each D can push in (move forward) the opponent on the high-rigidity side, and form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent on the low-rigidity side. As a result, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the closed state by the urging spring has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by disposing a magnetic body inside the first electric combination 520 and arranging a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the first electric combination 520 is displaced to a closed state by the magnetic force of the magnet. It may be made to do.

In the first and eleventh embodiments, the case where the number of components arranged is different has been described as an aspect in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as an aspect in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are configured to be different from each other, the rigidity of the component members (the size and number of components) , Materials and the like), components having different connection states (for example, the number of connected portions, the amount of rattling of the connected portions, etc.), and combinations thereof may be used. Due to the difference in configuration, the magnitude and timing of the driving force to be transmitted are different, and the support modes of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are biased to one side.

Although the case where the standing wall 532c1 is formed so as to be slidable inside the first case member 534 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the standing wall 532c1 may protrude from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140, even if the wing members 520L and 520R are opened by fraud, the inside of the second winning opening 140 (standing Wall 53
It is possible to suppress the game ball from being stagnated in front of 2c1. As a result, the player can be prevented from cheating.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the case has been described in which the game ball is guided in the front-rear direction by changing the shape of the side surface between the front base 511 and the back base 512, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. .

For example, magnets may be arranged inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game balls may be guided in the front-rear direction by the attractive force of the magnets. Thereby, since it is not necessary to narrow the space between the front base 511 and the back base 512, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being sandwiched between the front base 511 and the back base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attracting force of the magnet be an attracting force that does not hold the game ball on the attracting surface of the magnet. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball is made into the state attracted | sucked by the side surface of the front base 511 and the back surface base 512.

In the second and eighteenth embodiments, a plurality of protrusions 2 are formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812.
Although the case where 812a1 and 18812a1 are formed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed on the side surface facing the edge 824 of the hub 812a. Also in this case, the airflow can be generated by the concave and convex shape of the groove as in the second and eighteenth embodiments. As a result, the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 82
It is possible to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 by sending air between the two opposing surfaces.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be capable of rotational displacement with respect to the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the variable winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the game board 13, and a game ball is placed in the specific prize opening 65 a. In the open state, the variable winning device 15065 may be projected to the front side of the game board 13 so that the game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 155. In the first control example, the control processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment (control relating to the game of the pachinko machine 10, operation control for the variable display unit 80, light emission control of various lamps, etc.) The processing involved) will be described. In this control example, by controlling the operations of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed to the player in various display operation modes. Is controlling. Thereby, the game which does not get tired of a player can be provided.

  Further, in this control example, a double reel structure in which an outer reel 821 is provided so as to cover the inner reel 811 is provided, and further, an inner area (display surface of the inner reel 811) is formed as an area constituting the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Transmissive region 821a1 (see FIG. 109) and non-transmissive regions 821a2 and 821a3 (see FIG. 109) that do not transmit the inside (display surface of the inner reel 811). With this configuration, for example, the transmission area 821a1 of the outer reel 821 is provided at a position facing the display window 880 for allowing the player to visually recognize the combination of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. By positioning, the player can visually recognize the operation mode of the inner reel 811. By positioning the non-transparent areas 821a2 and 821a3 of the outer reel 821, the player can operate the inner reel 811. Can be made invisible.

  With this configuration, a variety of reel displays can be executed in the region of the display window 880 whose size is limited due to the structure of the pachinko machine 10, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, by rotating the outer reel 821, it is possible to create a state in which the player cannot visually recognize the operation mode of the inner reel 811. For example, an operation of positioning the inner reel 811 to the initial state is performed. When performing or when it is desired to stop and display a specific symbol, the operation content (not set as an effect pattern (variation pattern)) that is different from the normal operation is performed (for example, twice as fast as a normal effect pattern) The operation content of the reel 811 is not visually recognized by the player when the operation is performed at a speed of 1/3 of the normal production pattern. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, in this control example, in addition to the reel display by the double reel structure described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is also notified to the player by 7-segment display using the segment display device 600. Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol can be notified to the player in more various display modes, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, in the present control example, the display method of the symbol (the third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is varied according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example displays the lottery result of the special symbol according to the reel stop mode, unlike the conventional gaming machine that displays the lottery result of the special symbol using the liquid crystal screen. It is configured. In such a gaming machine, information other than a special symbol lottery result using a liquid crystal screen as in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a continuous effect in which the expectation of winning a big hit increases as it continues (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) Since there is no display area for notifying the player of information indicating the number of times that is executed, there has been a problem that it is difficult to clearly notify the player of the process for the continuous performance. On the other hand, in the present control example, by changing the display area that the player can visually recognize by operating the displacement member 670, the player is notified of the process for the continuous effect (the number of executions of the continuous effect). It is composed. Thereby, even if it is the pachinko machine 10 which does not have a liquid crystal display device, the process of a continuous production can be recognized easily by a player.

  In this control example, the configuration in which the process of continuous production is notified to the player by changing the display area of the reel display is used, but the process of continuous production is used for the player using other configurations. You may comprise so that it may alert | report. Specifically, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) is varied or the sound effect during the reel operation is varied according to the number of times that the continuous performance is executed. It may be configured.

  Further, in the present control example, when the above-described continuous effect is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the display area of the reel display is gradually narrowed according to the number of executions of the continuous effect. With such a configuration, the smaller the display area of the reel display for the player, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots, so that it is possible to provide an easily understandable gaming machine for the player. .

  In addition, by operating the displacement member 670 to narrow the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of effective lines that display the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) ) Is reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol.

  In the first control example, the time (variation time) from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the lottery result is stopped and displayed is changed according to the set gaming state. Specifically, in a gaming state where a special symbol lottery is likely to be executed (short-time state, probability variation state), it is easy to set a short variation time in order to increase the number of special symbol lotteries executed per unit time. In a gaming state (normal state) in which symbol lottery is difficult to be executed, a long variation time is easily set to reduce a period in which a special symbol lottery is not being performed (period in which the special symbol has not changed). doing.

  In this control example configured as described above, a reel display with a slow speed (for example, 0.2 seconds) for changing the third symbol displayed in the display area in a gaming state (normal state) in which a long variation time is easily set. To execute a 7-segment display with a fast speed (for example, 0.05 seconds) for changing the symbols displayed in the display area in a gaming state (probability variation state, short-time state) in which a short variation time is easily set. It is composed. As a result, even when a plurality of display methods having different variable speeds of the third symbol are used, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is surely stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. Can be made.

  Next, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. In addition, FIG. 107 adds the structure which attached | subjected the code | symbol to make it easy to demonstrate this control example with respect to the game board 13 (refer FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment mentioned above. The difference is that the signs are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the variable display device unit 80 has a decorative symbol display device 800 and a 7-segment display unit 1600, and is configured to notify the player of the lottery result of special symbols by different display methods. ing. The decorative symbol display device 800 includes a left rotation unit 800a, a middle rotation unit 800b, and a right rotation unit 800c, and each of the rotation units 800a to 800c has a double reel structure (FIG. 32). reference). A display window 880 for allowing the player to visually recognize a part of the symbol (third symbol) stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 800 is formed at the center of the game board 13.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol by a combination of symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in the display window 880. It should be noted that hereinafter, an area in the display window 880, that is, an area that can be visually recognized by the player among the symbols stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 800 (third symbol) is also referred to as a symbol display region (also simply referred to as a display region). ). Details of display symbols in the double reel structure of each of the rotation units 800a to 800c will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the display area of each of the rotation units 800a to 800c, and is used as a part of 7 segments for displaying predetermined identification information. Specifically, it is composed of rectangles (6 segments) of 1 horizontal segment and 2 vertical segments so as to form 6 segments out of 7 segments. The detailed contents of the light-emitting members constituting each segment are the same as those in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 55), and will not be described.

  In the first control example, as the 7-segment display unit 1600, the left 7-segment display unit 1600a covering the outer periphery of the left rotation unit 800a, the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b covering the outer periphery of the middle rotation unit 800b, A right 7-segment display unit 1600c that covers the outer periphery of the moving unit 800c is provided, and each 7-segment display unit 1600a to 1600c can be used to display three identification information (numerals) as a third symbol.

  It should be noted that one 7 segment (7 segments) is configured by combining the 6 segments included in the 7 segment display unit 1600 and the light emitting area 822 (see FIG. 109) displayed by the decorative symbol display device 800. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the display area for reel display and the display area for 7-segment display can be overlapped. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed in a limited space. Detailed display contents (display contents of the third symbol) using the 7-segment display unit 1600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

  Further, an LED (lightning LED) 671 is disposed on the outer edge of the display window 880 (7-segment display unit 1600) as a light emitting means capable of irradiating light toward the display area of the reel display. The LEDs 671 are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display window 880. The lightning LED 671a is located on the lower left side of the display window 880 (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 107), and the lightning LED 671b is located on the upper left side. The lightning LED 671c is arranged on the lower right side, and the lightning LED 671d on the upper right side is arranged.

  When these lightning LEDs 671 are caused to emit light, light having high directivity is irradiated toward a part of the display area of the reel display, and a composite symbol combined with the symbol stopped and displayed in the partial area described above is expressed. It is configured as follows. The detailed contents of this composite symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 (a).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108 and FIG. 109, the display content of the display symbol (third symbol) that can be displayed by each of the rotation units 800a to 800c will be described. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display symbol of the inner reel 811 of each of the rotating units 800a to 800c, and FIG. 109 schematically shows a display symbol of the inner reel 811 of each of the rotating units 800a to 800c. It is a schematic diagram.

  The left turning unit 800a has a double reel structure including a left inner reel 811a and a left outer reel 821a, and the middle turning unit 800b includes a middle inner reel 811b and a middle outer reel 821b. A double reel structure is configured, and the right rotation unit 800c has a double reel structure including a right inner reel 811c and a right outer reel 821c.

  Here, the display method of the symbol (3rd symbol) using each rotation unit 800a-800c is demonstrated easily using the left rotation unit 800a. As described above, the left rotation unit 800a has a double reel structure composed of the left inner reel 811a and the left outer reel 821a, and a motor (not shown) as a drive source for each reel. Is provided. Then, by flowing a current in a specific direction to the motor, the reel rotates forward (the direction in which the reel rotates from top to bottom from the viewpoint of FIG. 107), and by flowing a current in the direction opposite to the specific direction. The reel is configured to rotate in the reverse direction (direction in which the reel rotates from bottom to top from the viewpoint of FIG. 107).

  Further, in this control example, a motor MPU (not shown) is provided as drive control means for controlling the motor drive of each reel used in each of the rotation units 800a to 800c. This motor MPU is used to variably set the rotation direction and rotation speed of each motor, and executes drive control corresponding to various fluctuation displays executed based on a lottery result of a special symbol. . In this way, by controlling the motor drive control of each reel used in each of the rotation units 800a to 800c by one MPU for a motor, it is possible to execute an operation control that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  First, with reference to FIG. 108, the display symbol of the inner reel 811 will be described. FIG. 108 is a display surface member (display tape) having display symbols (display symbols printed on the display surface) that can be displayed on each inner reel (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. In this control example, a display surface on the loop is formed by attaching the above-described display surface member along the outer peripheral surface of each inner reel.

  Therefore, for example, when the left inner reel 811a is rotated in the forward direction (the direction in which the display symbol moves from top to bottom in the display window 880 (see FIG. 107)), it is printed on the display surface member. The display symbol is displayed in the display window 880 while changing from the bottom to the top. Next to the display symbol printed on the uppermost part of the display surface member (uppermost in the display of FIG. 108, blue 7 symbol R1 in the case of the left inner reel 811a), it is printed on the lowermost part of the surface member. A display symbol (the lowest in the display of FIG. 108, a part of the combination symbol R3 in the case of the left inner reel 811a) is displayed.

  Next, the display symbols printed on the display surface member of each inner reel will be specifically described. The left inner reel 811a of the left rotation unit 800a has a jackpot that is most advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 120 (b)) as a display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. A blue 7 symbol R1 corresponding to a symbol combination to indicate that the player has won, a red 7 symbol R2 corresponding to a symbol combination to indicate that the player has won a jackpot, and a specific display area. The left combination symbol R3a that is a part of the combination symbol R3 that can satisfy the execution condition of the special effect when the stop display is displayed, and the lottery result of the special symbol is an unfavorable result (for example, losing) to the player And a danger symbol R4 corresponding to a symbol combination for indicating the above is printed on at least the reel display surface.

  The blue 7 symbol R1 and the red 7 symbol R2 are symbols printed on the inner reels 811. When the symbols are stopped and displayed at predetermined positions on the inner reels 811 (when stopped in a row), It shows that you won the jackpot of the special symbol. In this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpots with different privilege amounts (for example, the number of prize balls and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished), and the player wins the jackpot that is advantageous to the player. In this case, a stop display mode (a combination of symbols) indicating that the blue 7 symbol R1 has won the jackpot is stopped (per blue 7). In addition, when the jackpot is won regardless of the winning jackpot type, a stop display mode (a combination of symbols) indicating that the red 7 symbol R2 has won the jackpot is stopped (per red 7).

  In other words, when the winning number is Blue 7, it is possible to notify the player that the winning jackpot has been won in advance (before the jackpot game is started), so that the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind. Can be done. In addition, when it is red 7 hit, it only informs the player that the jackpot has been won, so the contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game ends The jackpot game can be performed while expecting to be advantageous to the player.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 stops hitting blue 7 based on the variation pattern command including the information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery output from the main control device 110. It is configured to determine whether to display or stop red 7 hitting, but not limited to this, for example, when the player operates the frame button 22 which is an operating means, May be configured to vary the stop display ratio per blue 7 when a condition that can stop display (winning for a big win that is advantageous to the player) is established. Here, the variable ratio means that the stop display ratio per blue 7 is 0%, that is, the stop display ratio per blue 7 is not displayed, or the stop display ratio per blue 7 is 100%, that is, blue 7 It is a concept that includes a state in which the winning is always stopped and displayed.

  The combination symbol R3 is not a symbol for showing the big win of the special symbol, but is a suggestion symbol that can be used to suggest and notify the expectation degree of the big win by combining with the lightning LED 671 arranged in the variable display unit 80. It is. The specific description will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 (a), but only when the combination symbol R3a of the left inner reel 811a and the combination symbol R3b of the right inner reel 811c are stopped and displayed at predetermined positions. A special effective line is set as an effective line for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol, and the special effective line is configured to be easily set when winning a jackpot.

  By configuring in this way, the symbol (blue 7 symbol R1 or red 7 symbol R2) for showing the big win in the predetermined effective line is stopped and displayed for the variable display using the inner reel 811. In addition to the game of gazing whether or not the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, it is possible to perform a game of gazing whether or not the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed. it can.

  Further, in this control example, the symbol (combination symbol R3) printed on the inner reel 811 and the lightning LED 671 arranged in the variable display device unit 80 are combined and notified of the expected degree of winning the big hit. It is configured to be able to. In addition, when the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, the display mode of the combination symbol R3 and the shape of the lightning LED 671 (light emission mode) so that the combination symbol R3 and the lightning LED 671 are integrally represented. It is configured to be related to Thereby, since it can be made to grasp | ascertain visually that the combination symbol R3 was stopped and displayed on the predetermined position with respect to a player, an easily understandable game can be provided.

  The danger symbol R4 is a symbol printed only on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, and is configured as a suggestive symbol for indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, similar to the combination symbol R3 described above. . When the danger symbol R4 is stopped and displayed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c in a predetermined arrangement (for example, an array arranged in a line), and the chance symbol R5 is stopped and displayed on the inner reel 811b, The variable display mode is executed. In other words, unlike the combination symbol R3, the danger symbol R4 is a suggestion symbol that can suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot using only the symbol printed on the inner reel 811.

  In this control example, the third symbol stop display is made to notify the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation time has elapsed. If a stop display (including a temporary stop display that swings to a level that can be recognized as being stopped by the player) is displayed, a suggestion symbol stop display is used to suggest the jackpot expectation of the special symbol being executed. It becomes.

  In this way, when the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed during the special symbol fluctuation period (temporary stop display), the symbols indicating the lottery result of the jackpot symbol (for example, the blue 7 symbol R1 and the red 7 symbol R2) are stopped and displayed. Instead of (temporary stop display), the suggested symbols (for example, combination symbol R3, danger symbol R4) are configured to stop display (temporary stop display), so that the inner reel 811 during the variation period of the special symbol. It can be suppressed that the stop display (temporary stop display) is mistaken as the stop display of the third symbol.

  Here, the stop display of the third symbol and the stop display of the suggestion symbol are set based on the lottery result of the special symbol executed by the main controller 110. Specifically, since it is set based on the result of special design winning / failing lottery and the result of special symbol fluctuation lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery), each symbol shows the special symbol lottery result. It becomes a design for.

  A total of 10 display symbols are printed on the left inner reel 811a. Here, since the inner reel unit 810 is configured to rotate in one second for two seconds, the left inner reel 811a serves as a display unit configured such that the display symbol is changed every 0.2 seconds. In this control example, the left inner reel 811a, the inner inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c of the inner reel unit 810 are configured to rotate at the same fluctuation speed (one round of 2 seconds). Not limited to this, the fluctuation speed of each inner reel may be varied. In addition, the time (acceleration period) required to reach a specific fluctuation speed (2 rounds per revolution) after the rotation of each inner reel may be varied, or a specific fluctuation speed (one round) The time (deceleration period) required for the stop display from the state of rotation in 2 seconds may be varied. Further, the timing at which each inner reel starts to rotate may be varied.

  Thus, by rotating each inner reel in various rotation patterns, the player is reminded that there is some law in the rotation pattern of each inner reel and the lottery result of the special symbol. Can be prevented from getting bored early in the game. In addition, this control example is configured to execute fluctuation (rotation) control and stop control of the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation. Not limited to this, for example, among the symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the last special symbol variation (third symbol), the stop position (stop display mode) of some symbols may be the current special symbol variation. When it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the variation result (lottery result) is the same, the rotation of only the remaining inner reels is started without rotating the inner reels displaying the stop display mode. You may comprise.

  Similarly, a total of ten display symbols are printed on the right inner reel 811c. As the type of display symbol printed, the special effect execution condition may be satisfied when the display symbol of the left inner reel 811a is stopped and displayed in a specific display area instead of the left combination symbol R3a. The difference is that a right combination symbol R3b, which is a part of the combination symbol R3, is provided, and the rest is the same. The same reference symbols and descriptions are omitted for the same display symbols.

  In the present control example, normally, the rotation of the right inner reel 811c is stopped after the rotation of the left inner reel 811a is stopped. Therefore, when the right inner reel 811c is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suggest a possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a big hit (whether or not it has reached a reach state).

  Finally, the display symbol of the inner reel 811b will be described. In the present control example, the inner reel 811b is stopped last when the inner reel unit 810 is used to perform a variable display for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, a display symbol for indicating that the jackpot lottery result is out of the display symbols printed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c and a specific variation display mode are executed. This is different in that a display symbol for informing the user is added. Other display symbols are the same as those of the above-described left inner reel 811a or right inner reel 811c, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, in this control example, when notifying the player of the special symbol lottery result using the three inner reels, the reel driving is stopped in the order of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. It is configured to make it. In the stopped left inner reel 811a, right inner reel 811c, and middle inner reel 811b, among the plurality of display symbols that are stopped and displayed in an area (display area) that is visible to the player from the display window 880 The player is informed of the lottery result of the special symbol by a combination of symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in the area (effective line).

  Thus, by stopping and displaying the three inner reels in a predetermined order, the player can easily know which inner reel is to be stopped and displayed next. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. Note that the order in which the reels are stopped may be changed only when a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is established when a special symbol jackpot is won) is established. Thereby, when the operation | movement different from normal is performed, it can alert | report to a player that there is a high possibility of having won the jackpot. In addition, in order for a player to identify whether or not the reel operation is different from normal, it is necessary to grasp the normal reel operation. Therefore, even when the normal reel operation is performed, the reel You can be interested in the content of the action.

  Further, by using a configuration in which the three inner reels are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, the two reels of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b are stopped when the two reels are stopped. Whether or not the display symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in a specific area for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to one reel is stopped (hereinafter referred to as reach state). It is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in order to enhance the effect of presentation during the variable display, the motor MPU may be configured so that different rotation operations can be performed on each of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. For example, by rotating the three reels forward and reaching the reach state, and then controlling only the remaining reels to reversely rotate, it is configured to inform the player of the reach state in an easy-to-understand manner. Alternatively, when the current fluctuation display is in the reach state (there is a high possibility of reaching the reach state), all the inner reels are rotated in reverse from the time when the three inner reels are rotated. This makes it easy for the player to predict the lottery result of this special symbol at the timing when the variable display is executed (the timing when none of the reels are stopped). It may be sea urchin configuration.

  As described above, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 108, the display symbols are printed equally on each of the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c. By rotating 811a, the inner inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c, the display symbols displayed in the player's visual recognition area (in the display window 880) can be varied.

  The detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 110, but an effective line is set in the display area where the inner reel 811 of this control example is displayed, and the blue 7 symbol R1 and the red 7 symbol R2 are on the effective line. The jackpot game is executed when any of the BAR symbols is aligned. Further, when the combination symbol R3, the special symbol R6, etc. are stopped at a specific position, a special effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that a big hit game or special effect is being executed.

  In this control example, the display symbols are arranged evenly. However, the intervals may be arranged unevenly. Specifically, a lot of display symbols are printed to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot), and the display symbol is almost printed. By providing no section, the interval between the display symbols may be non-uniform. As a result, the player can predict the game result with an ambiguous feeling such as in which section the rotation of the inner reel 811 stops.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the display symbol of the outer reel 821 will be described. The display surface of the outer reel 821 used in this control example is roughly divided into three. Here, the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be described using the left outer reel 821a of the left rotation unit 800a. As described above, in this control example, the double reel structure is adopted, and the outer reel 821 is disposed so as to cover the display surface of the inner reel 811.

  The contents of the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be described with reference to the left outer reel 821a in combination with the left first region (transparent region) 821a1 formed of a transmissive member that can penetrate the inside and the segment display unit 1600. Left second area (segment area) 821a2 in which one 7 segment is formed, and left third area (effect) in which a special display mode for notifying the lottery result of a special symbol is displayed on the display surface of the outer reel 821 Display area) 821a3.

  As described above, the outer reel 821 is formed of a transmissive member in which only the first region among the regions (the first region to the third region) is visible. In other words, in the double reel structure of this control example, when the variable display for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is performed using the inner reel 811, the first area of the display surface of the outer reel 821 is displayed on the display window 880. The drive is controlled by the motor MPU so as to stop at the corresponding position.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily view the driving content (variable display mode) of the reel (inner reel 811) provided inside the double reel structure from the display window 880. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 109, a left light emitting area 822a is formed at the center in the vertical direction of the second left area 821a2 over the entire left and right width of the left outer reel 821a, and is combined with the left 7-segment display portion 1600a. Thus, it is configured to be one 7 segment (see FIG. 110 (b)). The left light-emitting area 822a is controlled to emit light in conjunction with the light-emitting display of the 7-segment display unit 1600, and includes the same color as the six segments of the 7-segment display unit 1600 (including an error that is difficult for a player to identify). Concept). Specifically, the same emission color as that of the 7-segment display unit 1600 irradiated from the backlight unit 830 (see FIG. 31) of the decorative symbol display device 800 is transmitted.

  Further, in the left second region 821a2, the portion other than the left light emitting region 822a is formed of a black non-transmissive member, and the player is provided on the inner left side (back side) of the left outer reel 821a. The reel 811a is configured not to be visible. Thereby, as a display mode of the decorative symbol display device 800, the outer reel 821 is positioned in the second region, so that variable display (7-segment display) using 7 segments can be executed.

  In this control example, when 7-segment display is executed, during the special symbol fluctuation time, control is performed so that each of the seven segments is lit and flashed at high speed, and the 7-segment display is stopped. It is configured to execute a dynamic display indicating that it has not been performed. In addition, the 7-segment display during dynamic display (7-segment display that is repeatedly turned on and blinking at high speed) is controlled so as not to be mistaken for a specific symbol.

  Specifically, in this control example, by controlling so that seven segments are lit one by one, a dynamic display in which one lit segment appears to move in a circle Is configured to do. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the current time is in the dynamic display period, and the display mode of the 7-segment display during the dynamic display period indicates the lottery result of the special symbol. It can suppress misidentifying that it is a design.

  That is, in this control example, a 7-segment display unit 1600 is arranged around the decorative symbol display device 800, and a symbol (third) is displayed to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol according to the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 800. The type of the variable display mode for displaying the symbol) is variable. Specifically, the variable display mode using the inner reel 811, the variable display mode using the outer reel 821, and the variable display mode using 7 segments can be easily switched, and each variable display mode can be changed. The displayed areas can be overlapped. Therefore, various variable display modes can be provided within a limited predetermined area, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109, in the left third area 821a3, a part of a symbol (a symbol imitating “7”) for printing that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is printed. When the motor MPU is controlled to stop at the position corresponding to the display window 880, the left special display mode 823a printed on the left outer reel 821a and the middle special display printed on the middle outer reel 821b The special display mode imitating “7” is stopped and displayed by combining the mode 823b and the right special display mode 823c printed on the right outer reel 821c.

  By configuring in this way, the lottery result of the special symbol can be notified to the player using the display symbol of the size that occupies most of the display area in the display window 880, so that the player is impacted. Can do. Further, although details will be described later, in this control example, when the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is executed using the outer reel 821, the symbol rows of the outer reels 821 are aligned ( In the state shown in FIG. 109, control is performed to rotate each outer reel 821 synchronously.

  The display symbols of the outer reel 821 have been described with reference to the left outer reel 821a. However, the display symbols of the middle and outer reels 821b and 821c are the same as those of the left outer reel 821a (in the special symbol display mode). Detailed description will be omitted because the design is different.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115, the contents of the variable display executed by the variable display device unit 80 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 110 (a), description will be given of the content of change display when the normal state is set as the gaming state. FIG. 110A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of variable display using the inner reel 811 in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), three display symbols of each inner reel (left inner reel 811a to right inner reel 811c) are displayed in the display window 880 in the normal state. As a valid line for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, the display symbol stopped and displayed on the upper stage (the left inner reel 811a is the blue seven symbol R1, the middle inner reel 811b is the blank symbol R7, and the right inner reel 811c is the right combination. The first line S1 with the symbol R3b) as the active line, and the display symbol stopped and displayed in the middle stage (the left inner reel 811a is red 7 symbol R2, the middle inner reel 811b is special symbol R6, the right inner reel 811c is blue 7) The second line S2 with the symbol R1) as the active line, and the display symbol stopped and displayed in the lower part (the left inner reel 811a is the bar symbol, the middle inner reel 811b is the blank symbol R7, the right inner symbol Lumpur 811c and the third line S3 for the active line to the right combination symbol R3b), are formed.

  Furthermore, a first diagonal line V1 having the lower stage of the left inner reel 811a, the middle stage of the middle inner reel 811b, and the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c, the upper stage of the left inner reel 811a, and the middle inner reel 811b. A second diagonal line V2 is formed with the middle stage and the lower stage of the right inner reel 811c as effective lines.

  That is, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the display symbols that are stopped and displayed on the five active lines (S1 to S3, and V1, V2) formed on the display surface of the variable display device unit 80. The player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination. Further, in this control example, the number of target effective lines is made different according to the stop position of the display symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110A, the upper position of the left inner reel 811a forms part of two effective lines (first line S1 and second diagonal line V2), and the left inner reel 811a. The middle position constitutes a part of one effective line (second line S2). Thus, when the first inner reel (for example, the left inner reel 811a) of each inner reel is stopped, the position of the next inner reel (for example, the right inner reel 811c) to be stopped can be stopped. The game can be played while predicting whether it is desirable. In addition, when some display symbols corresponding to the combination of display symbols for displaying a lottery result advantageous to the player at the stop positions constituting a part of the plurality of active lines are stopped, Because it can reach a reach state, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for jackpot.

  Next, description will be made with reference to FIG. 110 (b) about the content of change display when the short time state (probability change state) is set as the gaming state. FIG. 110B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 during the time-shortening state. In this control example, when the time-short state (probability variation state) is set, the variation pattern of the variation time shorter than the normal state is easily set as the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  In a short time state (probability variation state) in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily set, 7-segment display is executed as a variation display for showing a lottery result of a special symbol. As a result, even when a variation pattern with a short variation time is set, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol can be surely stopped and displayed after a predetermined variation time has elapsed.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), during the time-shortening state, the left second area (seg area) 821a2 of the left outer reel 821a, the middle second area (seg area) 821b2 of the middle and outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c. The right second area (segment area) 821c2 is positioned so as to correspond to the display window 880, so that the left 7-segment display section 1600a, the middle 7-segment display section 1600b, and the right 7-segment display section are displayed in the display area. Three 7 segments of 1600c are formed. FIG. 110 (b) shows a state in which all regions that can be lit in 7-segment display are lit, but each 7-segment display has a display mode that imitates numbers “0” to “9”. It becomes possible.

  When the lottery result of the special symbol is started during the short state at this time, each 7-segment is dynamically displayed, and the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed after a predetermined period (the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern) has elapsed. The display symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the present control example, the display symbol that emits light from the light emitting area 822 is easily displayed as a display symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place.

  More specifically, in this control example, the display design imitating 10 types of numbers “0” to “9” can be displayed as the 7-segment display symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. Is a display symbol (“2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”) in which the light emitting area 822 is made to emit light among the display symbols imitating the ten types of numbers described above. , “8”, “9”) are set easily. Thereby, it can suppress that a player misidentifies the display symbol stopped and displayed.

  That is, of the seven segments used for the 7-segment display, one segment (light-emitting area 822) formed using the outer reel 821 is displayed in the lighting state (during light emission) with respect to the other six segments. Are configured to be lit in the same color so that they are the same. However, since the mode when turned off (when no light is emitted) is different from the other six segments, light emission when no light is emitted It can be suppressed that the region 822 forms a part of the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

  More specifically, in this control example, the second area of the outer reel 821 is divided into an area that transmits light emitted from the backlight unit 830 and an area that does not transmit light, and an area that transmits light is divided. The light emitting region 822 is formed by using the non-transmissive member (black member) for preventing light from being transmitted. The light emitting region 822 is formed of a white member for transmitting light from the backlight unit 830.

  Therefore, the light emitting region 822 is a region formed of a white member surrounded by a black member. Thereby, even when the backlight unit 830 is not lit, the non-transmitting light emitting area 822 can be easily grasped, and as a result, a part of the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is formed. It can be suppressed that it is mistaken.

  Then, using these three 7-segments, a variation display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is executed for the player, and after a predetermined period of variation time has elapsed, the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated The display symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in this control example, after the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, the period until the number of lotteries for the special symbol reaches 100 times is set to the time-shortening state, and is executed during the time-shortening state. When the number of lotteries for a special symbol reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the number of remaining lotteries for a special symbol executed during the short-time state reaches a predetermined number of times, The number of times) is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111A, the display content of the third symbol displayed in the variable time unit (during the time reduction state) in the variable display device unit 80 will be described. In this control example, when the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, the third symbol is variably displayed using the segment display unit 1600 of the segment display device 600. FIG. 111 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol during the time reduction. As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the variation results are shown in a display mode of 7-segment display of symbols. In FIG. 111A, “7” is stopped on the left 7-segment display portion 1600a, “5” is stopped on the middle 7-segment display portion 1600b, and “6” is stopped on the right 7-segment display portion 1600c. In this way, the display mode using 7 segments displays the symbols in a variable manner by irradiating the light provided in the backlight unit, and therefore can accommodate a variation pattern with a short variation time.

  Here, the short time remaining number display will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). FIG. 111 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the short time remaining number is displayed in the short time state. . As shown in FIG. 111 (b), the remaining short time is displayed on the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b. In this control example, when the remaining short number of times becomes less than 5, the remaining short number of times is notified to the player using 7 segments. As a result, it is possible to notify in advance the period until the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (the short time state that is more advantageous than the normal state) is completed, so the short time state suddenly ends and the player feels uncomfortable. It can suppress giving.

  In addition, in this control example, during the special symbol variable display period, first, the display symbol for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped (see FIG. 110 (a)), and then the remaining short time is displayed. It is configured to be. Then, a display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is set so that the display symbol indicating the same number as the number of remaining short times is not displayed on the 7-segment display of the remaining short time. It is composed.

  By configuring in this way, the display mode of the display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display of the remaining short time number indicating the remaining short time number can be made different. The number of times can be reliably notified.

  Further, in this control example, after the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is not necessary to display the short time remaining display indicating the short time remaining time, that is, when the special symbol jackpot is won. In this case, since the display symbol is set regardless of the number of remaining short times displayed next, the display symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won should be set without limitation. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the display symbols that are stopped and displayed according to the privilege (the number of prize balls or the game state set after the end of the jackpot game) given by the winning jackpot.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the short remaining number of times is displayed using the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The short remaining number of times may be displayed using the segment display unit 1600a or the right 7-segment display unit 1600c. In this case, for example, when it is configured to display the remaining short number of times using the left 7-segment display unit 1600a that is first stopped and displayed, the game is played in a state in which the remaining short number of times to be displayed is grasped in advance. As a result, if the same number as the remaining short time displayed next is stopped and displayed as a display symbol for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol on the left 7-segment display portion 1600a, the lottery result of this time is a big hit Can be grasped in advance. Further, the 7-segment display unit 1600 that displays the remaining short time count may be appropriately changed.

  Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, this control example is configured to display a special symbol variation display and a remaining short time count display within one variation display period (including symbol determination time). The remaining short time display is executed for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the set special symbol variation time. Therefore, for example, when the set change time of the special symbol is 2 seconds, the special symbol change display of 1.5 seconds is performed regardless of the execution of the remaining short time display, and then 0.5 seconds. If the special symbol fluctuation time is 1 second, it is determined whether or not the remaining short number of times is displayed. If the remaining short number of times is not displayed, 1 second is displayed. When the special symbol variation is executed, the remaining short time display is executed. In this state, 0.5 seconds of short variation is executed as the special symbol variation, and then 0.5 seconds remaining short time display is performed. Is configured to run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute both the special symbol variation display and the remaining short time count display within one special symbol variation display period.

  In this control example, as described above, the special symbol variation display and the remaining short time display are performed together within one special symbol variation display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a short time remaining number display may be performed so that special symbol fluctuation may be straddled. In this case, for example, a special symbol variation display for a certain time is executed regardless of the set variation time, and the remaining time that is the difference between the variation display execution time and the set variation time is reduced. It is good to set it as the time to display the number of times. As a result, the variation display mode of the special symbol can be made constant, a game easy to understand for the player can be provided, and the variation display mode pattern can be simplified. Can be reduced.

  In addition, a display lower limit time for executing the short remaining time display is set, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period during which the special symbol fluctuation display is executed and the set fluctuation time is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0 If the time is shorter than .5 seconds), it is preferable to display the short remaining time display across the period in which the next special symbol variation is executed. By comprising in this way, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain the remaining short time count reliably. However, in this case, since the change of the special symbol is started while the short remaining time display is being executed, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the new special symbol change has been started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is informed that the special symbol variation has started by blinking the area not used for the short remaining time display (in the example of FIG. 111 (b), the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a) blinks. Or the player can be informed that the special symbol variation has started by changing the emission color of the display mode of the short time remaining display mode (the display mode imitating “4” in FIG. 111 (b)). It is good to configure. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player that a new special symbol change has been started while executing the short time remaining display.

  In the case of executing the above-described processing, specifically, the following configuration is preferably provided in the sound lamp control device 113. First, variation time extraction means for extracting a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbol variation from information included in the variation pattern command output from main controller 110, and variation of the third symbol within the variation time of special symbol variation Setting means for setting the third symbol variation display time for executing the display and the remaining short number of times display time for executing the short time remaining number display, the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means, and the variation time extracting means extract A calculating means for calculating a difference between the fluctuation patterns (variation times), a lower limit determining means for determining whether the time calculated by the calculating means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second), and a lower limit determining means. Configured to turn on the continuation flag to indicate that the remaining short-time display does not end within the current fluctuation pattern period when it is determined that it is less than the lower limit fluctuation time That.

  The continuation flag is set to be turned off at the timing when the remaining short number of times display ends, and in a state where the continuation flag is set to on, that is, in a state where the remaining short number of times display is being executed. When a new variation pattern is set, a variation start display mode may be set to indicate that a new symbol variation is executed during the remaining short time display.

  Further, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time for executing the short remaining time display, and even if the shortest time among the plurality of different times is set, the short remaining time display is the current variation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to ON when it is determined that the process does not end within. Further, when the time reduction state is set, the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means is configured to be different between when the remaining short time display is executed and when it is not executed. When the number of times display is performed, the third symbol variation display time may be set more easily than when the number of times display is not performed.

  In this control example, the special symbol variation time includes the period during which the special symbol is variably displayed (symbol variation period) and the period during which the special symbol is stopped (symbol determination period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol change period of the special symbol and the symbol determination period may be divided and controlled. In this case, for example, the remaining short time display period is set in advance to be the same as the symbol fixed period, and the third symbol variation display time longer than the symbol variation period is set, or the remaining short number display period Is set in advance to be longer than the symbol determination period, and when it is determined that the remaining short time display cannot be executed during the symbol variation period, to indicate that it will not end within the current variation pattern period The continuation flag may be set to ON.

  In this control example, when the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (variable display by 7 segments) is executed, the symbol display mode for displaying the third symbol is configured to be variably displayed. Without being limited to this, a display manner different from the third symbol for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a display manner in which only one of the seven segments is lit) is changed and displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise. With this configuration, when the 7-segment display unit 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variation display of the 3rd symbol, if the specific 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed by the afterimage of light, The situation which gives a misunderstanding to a person can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600, the player visually recognizes the high-speed variable display period in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize each symbol display mode that is variably displayed, and the individual symbol display mode that is variably displayed. An easy low-speed fluctuation display period is set, and the high-speed fluctuation display period is configured to variably display a display mode different from the third pattern, and the low-speed fluctuation display period is configured to variably display the symbol display mode indicating the third pattern. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to suppress the sudden stop of the third symbol while suppressing the false recognition that the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light during high-speed fluctuation. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a description will be given of the contents of fluctuation display using the fluctuation display of the inner reel 811 and the fluctuation display of the segment display unit 1600. FIG. In this control example, as described above, the third symbol variation display executed using the inner reel 811, the third symbol variation display performed using the outer reel 821, and the segment display unit 1600. The third symbol variation display to be executed can be executed, and the plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, segment display) are displayed in correspondence with one special symbol variation display. Part 1600) can be used to execute variation display (mixed variation display) of the third symbol.

  Further, in the present control example, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the above-described mixed variation display is more easily executed than when the special symbol is a big hit. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of variably displaying the third symbol, the player is expected to perform the variation display (mixed variation display) of the third symbol using the plurality of devices. In addition, it is possible to indicate to the player using a gorgeous effect (mixed variation display) that there is a high possibility that the special symbol jackpot has been won.

  FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the mixed fluctuation display (special reach 1) using the inner reel 811 and the segment display unit 1600. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. When special reach 1 is set as the third symbol variation display mode, first, variation display (normal variation display) for rotating the inner reel 811 is executed. Then, the special symbol lottery result is temporarily stopped (including a slight rocking state enough to make the player think that the player has stopped) with the combination of the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (winning). After that, when the displacement member 670 is changed to the position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811, and the displacement member 670 is changed again to the initial position (first position), the variable display device unit 80 changes the figure. The effect mode shown in 112 is displayed.

  112, the third symbol indicating “7” is stopped and displayed on the left 7-segment display portion 1600 and the right 7-segment display portion 1600c, and the inner reel 811b is in the arrow direction (from top to bottom). Rotating towards In this state, the left outer reel 821a and the right outer reel 821c are controlled so that the second region corresponding to the 7-segment display unit 1600 (the region in which the player cannot visually recognize the inner reel 811) is positioned in the display window 880. Only the inner and outer reels 821b are controlled so that the first area in which the player can visually recognize the inner reel 811 is positioned in the display window 880.

  In this way, by performing different operation control according to the effect mode executed for the three outer reels 821, the mixed fluctuation display can be executed. In the inner reel 811b, the third symbol imitating “7” is stopped and displayed in any of the display areas displayed in the display window 880, so that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. To the player.

  That is, according to the production mode shown in FIG. 112, even if the third symbol imitating “7” is stopped and displayed in any of the upper position, the middle position, and the lower position of the inner inner reel 811b, it will be a big hit. Since the effect (variation display) is executed, it is possible to easily notify the player that the effect that is highly likely to be a big hit is being executed.

  112, the corresponding displacement member 670 (medium displacement member 670b) may be varied so as to vary the display area of the inner reel 811b. The third symbol imitating “7” displayed on the segment display unit 1600 is made to emit red or blue light, and the third symbol of the inner inner reel 811b indicating that the jackpot is won is limited. May be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the variable display contents using the outer reel 821 will be described. In the present control example, a special reach 2 effect for rotating the outer reel 821 can be executed as an effect during the variable display using the inner reel 811. This special reach 2 effect is an effect in which the left outer reel 821a, the middle and outer reels 821b, and the right outer reel 821c constituting the outer reel 821 are rotated synchronously in a state where the symbols are aligned.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special reach 2 effect. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the outer reel 821 slowly rotates in the forward direction (one third of the rotational speed of the inner reel 811) while the inner reel 811 rotates at a high speed in the forward direction. The effect that the special display mode 823 is gradually displayed in the display area in the display window 880 is executed. Since the third area on which the special display mode 823 is printed is a non-transparent area where the inner reel 811 cannot be seen, the display area of the inner reel 811 gradually narrows depending on the rotation state of the outer reel 821, and the outer reel 821 When the display is stopped with the inner reel 811 completely covered, a display symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed as shown in FIG. 113 (b).

  In FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), the inner reel 811 rotates slowly in the forward direction while the inner reel 811 rotates at high speed in the forward direction. In the above, an example of the effect of interlocking rotation so that the special display mode (823a, 823b, 823c) displayed in the third area (821a3, 821b3, 821c3) of the outer reel 821 is pushed out is shown. For example, the rotation direction of the inner reel 811 and the rotation direction of the outer reel 821 may be opposite to each other. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the inner reel 811 is rotating at a higher speed than before.

  113A and 113B show an example in which the outer reel 821 is driven at a constant rotational speed in one direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. 113A. The outer reel 821 is controlled so that the rotation direction of the outer reel 821 is the reverse direction (the direction opposite to the forward direction), or the outer reel 821 does not stop in the state shown in FIG. The rotation may be continued. In this case, after passing the state shown in FIG. 113 (b) rather than the speed when shifting (rotating) from the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 113 (b), It is preferable that the speed until reaching the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is increased again. Thereby, it is possible to relatively lengthen the period during which it is assumed that the special display mode is stopped and displayed in the display window 880.

  In addition, in the present control example, as described with reference to FIG. 113, the reels (the left outer reel 821a, the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c) constituting the outer reel 821 are aligned and rotated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be driven separately like the inner reel 811.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the content of the special reach 3 effect (pseudo-variable effect) will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the decorative symbol display device in the pseudo variation effect. In this control example, as if multiple lottery results are displayed during a dynamic display period (during a variable display period) in which a display symbol for displaying a single lottery result of a special symbol is dynamically displayed. It is configured to execute a pseudo-variable effect that is shown.

  In this pseudo-variation effect, during a single dynamic display period, a re-change effect that starts a change again after stopping the display symbol (temporary stop display) is configured to be executed a plurality of times. As the number of times this re-variation effect is executed increases, the possibility of winning a jackpot increases.

  Here, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using the liquid crystal display device, for example, by displaying the number of re-variation effects (pseudo continuous number) executed during the pseudo-change effect on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, Although it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effect for the player There has been a problem that it is difficult to easily report (number of pseudo-continuous times).

  Therefore, in this control example, each time the re-variation effect is executed, the displacement member 670 is varied to notify the player of the number of executed re-change effects. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Further, in this control example, each time the re-variation effect is executed, the displacement member 670 is made variable so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 800 becomes narrow, and every time the re-change effect is executed. The number of effective lines in the display area is reduced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the effective lines to be watched by the player, and thus it is possible to suppress the process of missing and displaying the combination of display symbols corresponding to the jackpot. .

  As shown in FIG. 114A, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a displacement member 670. Further, lightning LEDs 671 which are light emitting means composed of LED lamps are arranged at the four corners of the variable display device unit 80, the first lightning LED 671a on the lower left side of the variable display device unit 80 and the second lightning on the upper left side. The LED 671b, the third lightning LED 671c on the upper right side, and the fourth lightning LED 671d on the lower right side are arranged. In this control example, when the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at the corresponding position of each lightning LED 671, the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5 which are special effective lines are formed, and the fifth special line L5 is formed. When the special symbol R6 (a symbol imitating a black star) stops, an effect (so-called pseudo-variable effect) in which each of the inner reels 811 rotates again is executed.

  Specifically, the rotation (fluctuation) of each inner reel 811 is started in response to the variation of the special symbol, the combination symbol R3a stops at the upper and lower stages of the left inner reel 811a, and then the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c. When the combination symbol R3b stops at the lower stage, the four lightning LEDs 671 are turned on, and the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed. In this state, when the rotation speed of the inner reel 811b gradually decreases and the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5, the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5 are predetermined. The specific display symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 114 (a)), and the displacement member 670 is variable (see FIG. 114 (b)) in the direction of narrowing the display area of the inner reel 811. Each inner reel 811 re-varies (rotates) (executes the first pseudo-variation effect).

  When the first pseudo-variation effect is executed, the display area of the inner reel 811 becomes narrower than usual because the displacement member 670 is changed, so the number of effective lines of the display symbol is 5 lines (S1 to S3 and It decreases from V1, V2) to 3 lines (see FIG. 114 (b)). In this control example, the displacement members 670 are arranged above and below the variable display device unit 80, and each of them is variably operated so as to cover the display area of the inner reel 811, so that the display area of the inner reel 811 is narrowed. Therefore, the effective lines (the fourth line S4 and the fifth line S5) formed in the display area in the first pseudo variation effect are different from the first line S1 to the third line S3. Formed in position.

  Specifically, a fourth line S4 is formed between the first line S1 and the second line S2 (see FIG. 110 (a)), and the second line S2 and the third line S3 (see FIG. 110 (a)). ) To form a fifth line S5. In this way, by changing the position where the effective line of the display symbol is formed in accordance with the size of the display area set in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the display area of the inner reel 811 is variable, The display symbols can be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is easy for the user to understand.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the reel MPU 114a that controls the driving of the inner reel 811 receives a command including information indicating the currently set effective line type from the audio lamp control device 113, and includes the received information in the received information. Based on this, the stop position of the display symbol is controlled. Therefore, in a configuration in which the position (vertical position) where the effective line of the display symbol is formed can be varied, the display symbol can be stopped and displayed at an appropriate position.

  In addition to the configuration described above, for example, a detection means (sensor) for detecting the actual variable position of the displacement member 670 is provided, and the reel MPU 114a determines the position where the effective line is formed based on the detection result of the detection means. It may be configured to discriminate and determine the stop position of the display symbol. With this configuration, the number of commands (information amount) output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the actual position of the displacement member 670 can be determined. Even when the member 670 is not operating normally (at the time of failure), the display symbol can be stopped in an appropriate display mode.

  In this control example, when the size of the display area is changed by changing the displacement member 670 during the pseudo-variation effect, the formation position of the effective line of the display symbol is changed according to the size of the display area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement member 670 is in the initial position (see FIG. 114 (a)), that is, normally five effective lines (S1 to S3 and V1, V2 ( In the state of being formed, only the effective line formation position may be variably set so that the second line S2 and the third line S3 are effective lines.

  Returning to FIG. 114 (b), the description will be continued. During the first pseudo-variation effect (special reach 3), a display area is formed such that a maximum of two display symbols (see FIG. 108) printed on each inner reel 811 are visible. In this state, since an effective line cannot be formed in an oblique direction, a part of two effective lines (fourth line S4 and fifth effective line S5) is formed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c. The position to perform is set as the display symbol stop position. The inner reel 811b, in addition to the position at which a part of the above-mentioned two effective lines (fourth line S4, fifth effective line S5) is formed, the position at which the fifth special line L5 is formed stops the display symbol. Set as position.

  That is, during the first pseudo variation effect, the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c execute a variation display (two frame variation) for stopping and displaying the display symbols at two positions, and the middle inner reel 811b is a display symbol. Is displayed so as to stop and display at three positions.

  Thus, even if the display area of each inner reel 811 is the same size, the variation display mode for each inner reel 811 can be varied by varying the number of positions where the display symbols are stopped and displayed. It is possible to provide a novel effect to the player. Also, the number of fluctuating frames, i.e., the number of positions where the player can think that the display symbol will stop by dropping the fluctuation speed while the display symbol is changing, the number of positions where the display symbol can be stopped and displayed. Accordingly, the player can easily grasp at which position the display symbol stops in the current variable state of the displacement member 670.

  Further, in this control example, as described above, a combination of the lightning LED 671 and the combination symbol R3 displays a display mode in which the lightning runs toward the position where the fifth special line L5 is formed (see FIG. 114 (a)). ), And it is configured to make it easier for the player to keep an eye on which display symbols are stopped and displayed on the newly formed active line, but this is not restrictive, You may comprise so that it may become a symbol and a pattern.

  Further, in this control example, a new effective line is formed by combining the display symbols printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) disposed in the variable display unit 80. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display pattern is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a decorative movable accessory is positioned at a specific position, a new effective line is formed. It may be configured. In addition, the display symbol may be stopped first, and a new effective line may be formed when the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) emits light thereafter. In this way, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by forming a new effective line by combining the display symbol capable of variable display and the elements other than the display symbol so as to satisfy the predetermined condition. In this case, not only the variation display mode of the display symbols but also the light emission mode of the light emitting means and the movable mode of the decorative movable accessory are watched, so that the player is not bored with the game early. can do.

  Next, display contents of the display area of the inner reel 811 during the second pseudo variation effect will be described with reference to FIG. When the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5 during the first pseudo variation effect described with reference to FIG. 114 (b), the second pseudo variation effect is executed, and the displacement member 670 is moved. While changing the display area of the inner reel 811 toward a narrower direction, each inner reel 811 starts to change (turn) again. During the second pseudo variation effect, the display area of the inner reel 811 is reduced to one display symbol, and only one effective line of the display symbol (second line S2) is formed.

  The left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c are in a reach state in which the red 7 symbol R2 for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win is stopped and displayed, and the middle inner reel is displayed to the player. Fluctuation display in which attention is paid only to the type of display symbol that is stopped and displayed in 811b is executed.

  Next, the flow of operation contents of various devices while the pseudo-variation effect (special reach 3) is being executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a timing chart for showing the operation contents of various devices at the time of pseudo-continuous production (at the time of pseudo-variable production). As shown in FIG. 116, when the pseudo variation effect (special reach 3) is executed, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80. The lightning LED 671) is configured to be driven at a predetermined timing.

  Specifically, first, each inner reel 811 rotates in accordance with the timing at which the special symbol variation is executed, and first, the left inner reel 811a is stopped so that the left combination symbol R3a stops at a specific position. Thereafter, the right inner reel 811c is controlled to stop so that the right combination symbol R3b stops at a specific position. Thereafter, the lightning LED 671 is turned on, and four effective lines (first special line L1 to fourth special line L4) are formed. Then, when the special symbol R6 of the inner reel 811b is stopped on the fifth special line L5 which is effectively determined in a state where the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed (FIG. 114 (a)). ) Reference) The first chance is established, and the pseudo-change effect is continued.

  When the first chance is established, each inner reel 811 starts to change again, and the displacement member 670 is moved from the first position, which is the initial position, to the second position (the area of the display surface of the inner reel 811 is the first position). To a narrower position), and a variable display state with three effective lines is formed (see FIG. 114 (b)). In this state, regardless of the stop display mode of the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, an effect for attracting attention is executed only on whether or not the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line L5. Here, when the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line L5, each inner reel 811 finally starts to change again and the displacement member 670 is changed from the second position to the third position ( 115).

  When the displacement member 670 is changed to the third position, the number of effective lines becomes one (second line S2), and the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c both reach the display symbol (third symbol) indicating the big win. The red 7 symbol R2 is stopped and displayed so as to be in a state (see FIG. 115). As shown in FIG. 116, the upper limit of the effect display time that is executed in response to the change display time of the special symbol is set to be long, and an effect that is executed while temporarily stopping the third symbol during the effect display is executed. .

  In this control example, the pseudo-variation effect described above, that is, the effect of changing the effective symbol sequence in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is executed using the period during which one special symbol variation is executed. Although it comprises, it may comprise so that the production which changes an effective symbol sequence over multiple special symbol changes may be performed as composition other than that.

  In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see S513 in FIG. 132) executed by the main controller 110 described later with reference to FIG. The lottery result may be determined in advance, and an effect (continuous effect) may be set so as to cross a plurality of special symbol variations based on the prior determination result. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol multiple times during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, so the special symbol executed at any timing for the player It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the continuous production has been executed in response to the fluctuation display.

  Further, in this control example, a configuration is used in which the pseudo-variation effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually decreases, but the player can be changed by changing the effective line of the third symbol. For example, it may be configured to provide a new variation display effect. For example, the pseudo variation effect may be executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

  In this control example, when the pseudo variation effect is executed, the more the number of re-variations increases (the longer the variation time that is set), the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the reach display is performed when the number of pseudo-stops of the third symbol during the pseudo-variation production is a predetermined number, the possibility of winning the jackpot increases. You may comprise. Thereby, in the period from the execution of the pseudo variation effect to the end, it is possible to play the game while always giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the jackpot.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 126, the contents of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and variable display device unit 80, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. .

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction. In this control example, the payout control device 111 is a part of the sub-control device, and various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 in one direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control device. Various commands may be transmitted in both directions so that the main control device 110 can receive commands from 111.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 135) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. And a solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. are connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205 for various commands and control. Send a signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and turns on and off in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the 7-segment display unit 1600). It controls the setting of the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 in which output and fluctuation effects (variation display) are performed. Then, driving motors KM (inner reel driving motors KM1a to 1c, outer reel driving motors KM2a to 2c, displacement member driving motors KM3a to 3c) for driving various devices provided in the variable display device unit 80 are driven. It is. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the drive motor KM, and the frame button 22.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and based on the determined display mode. The drive control of various drive motors KM and the light emission control of the 7-segment display unit 1600 are executed. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display mode of the variable display executed using the variable display device unit 80 is variable. Various devices, such as changing the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227 in the reach state, or changing the target (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) to perform the variable display. Variable command contents for.

  Moreover, although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to receive the detection result of the detection means for detecting the drive result of each drive motor KM. Based on the received detection results of the respective detection means, the symbol display type that is stopped and displayed can be determined. Thus, it is determined whether or not the display mode determined by the sound lamp control device 113 matches the display mode actually stopped and displayed. If they do not match, an error command is set and an error notification is made. It is configured to run. Thereby, it can suppress that the fluctuation display which is uncomfortable for a player is performed.

  Since this control example has different variation display modes, for example, when it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the operation content of the inner reel 811, a variation display mode in which the inner reel 811 is not used (for example, the outer reel It may be configured to execute a process of switching between a variable display mode using 821 and a variable display mode using 7-segment display unit 1600. Thereby, even if a failure occurs in one variation display mode, it is possible to cause the player to perform variation display without a sense of incongruity. Further, in this case, the change display mode of the switching destination may be varied according to the set gaming state, or the player may set by operating the operating means (frame button 22). Also good.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described. In the main controller 110, a pachinko machine such as a special symbol (first symbol) lottery, a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, etc. 10 main processes are executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 118, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display control conditions in the variable display device unit 80. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to make settings and the like.

  For the special symbol lottery and the display control condition setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A first per-type counter C2 used for the purpose, a stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting an outage stop type in the special symbol, and a first initial value used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1. A random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 137). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop-type selection counter C3 are adjusted in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. Are stored respectively. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 66.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 137).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 120A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 120A) includes a first per-random number table for a low probability and a first per-random number table for a high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are big hits is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is low and the first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is high are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability. (See FIG. 120 (a)). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are the first random number table 202a (FIG. 120 (a ))). Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120B). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 39”, the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) is selected, and when it is “40 to 79”, the big hit B (16R Jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot) is selected if it is “80 to 99”.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot type set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120B) is three jackpots, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. The above jackpot type may be selected, or two or less types, for example, only one type of jackpot type may be selected. Further, the types and ratios of jackpot types selected for the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set differently.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the variable display device unit 80 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reaching occurs, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. Two stop (production) patterns are selected (for example, a range of 90 to 99) and “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140, the RAM 203 It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 and the probability range is low, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the variable display unit 80 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 137) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. ing.

  Here, the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 121 (a), the variation pattern table 202d is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 121 (b)) and an out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121 (c)). And at least a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121 (d)) is set. In addition, when the latent state (probability change time short and no state) is set as the gaming state, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to, and when the short time state is set as the gaming state, it is removed. The use (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (b). FIG. 121 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 121 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 121D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 121 (b) to FIG. 121 (d), normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are players who win a big hit with a special symbol. In this control example, the contents of each variation pattern table are defined so that the greater the selection of a variation pattern with a long variation time, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot.

  When a variation pattern indicating normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), or special reach (90 seconds) is set, a variation pattern command for indicating the change is sent to the sound lamp controller 113. The reach effect is set based on the fluctuation pattern command that is output and received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Here, in this control example, a plurality of reach effects are prepared. For example, among the inner reels 811, the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c are displayed on the effective line with the same display pattern (blue 7). Symbol R1 or red 7 symbol R2) stops and displays the symbol reach effect, combination symbol R3 stops at the specific position, and the lightning LED 671 lights up, and the outer reel 821 rotates. It has a turn reach production mode.

  That is, the main control device 110 outputs only a command indicating that the reach effect is executed and the variable display period as the variable display effect set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. It is configured to select which reach production mode is set as the reach production mode to be executed this time.

  Then, when setting the reach effect mode to be executed this time in the audio lamp control device 113, the current gaming state, the result of the special symbol lottery, the presence / absence of an operation on the frame button 22 by the player, the value that can be randomly acquired It is configured to set based on (the value of the effect counter). With this configuration, various reach effects can be provided to the player, so that the reach effect can be executed at various times in the execution process of the variable display effect. Can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In this control example, the contents of the reach effect mode to be executed this time are set at the timing when the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, that is, at the start timing of the new special symbol variation. Not limited to this. For example, the stop display mode (stop appearance) of the left inner reel 811a that first stops the variable display may be determined, and the reach effect mode executed this time may be set according to the determination result. By comprising in this way, the timing which sets a reach production aspect can be varied. In addition, since the timing for setting the reach production mode can be different from the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is started, that is, the timing at which the execution processing is concentrated in the pachinko machine 10, A situation in which a large load is temporarily applied can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an effect (so-called “gase effect”) that ends the special reach 3 (see FIGS. 114 and 115), which is a pseudo-variation effect, at an intermediate stage of the effect, for example, the lottery result of this time is out, and the change pattern In the case of “normal reach” in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set, a short gaze effect is executed in which the fluctuation display ends without establishing the first chance, and a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern. In the case of “super reach”, the first chance chance may be established, and a medium-gase effect that does not establish the second chance may be executed.

  By executing such a gaze effect, even if the 90-second variation time is not set, the effect mode similar to the pseudo variation effect can be executed, so the first half of the pseudo variation effect is given to the player. It is possible to make the part easy to experience, and it is possible to prevent the user from getting bored with the game without experiencing at least a part of the pseudo variation effect.

  Furthermore, for example, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, the special symbol big hit will be given at the timing when the second chance in the pseudo-variation effect can be established. You may comprise so that the combination of the display symbol (3rd symbol) for showing winning may be stopped-displayed. As a result, after the first chance is established, the effect whether or not the second chance is established (the effect whether or not the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line), or the blue 7 symbol The effect content can be set so that any of the effects in which R1 and the red 7 symbol R2 are in the reach state is executed. Therefore, even if which content of the effect is set for the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, for example, when a variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds is set, after the first chance is established (see FIG. 114 (a)), an effect for establishing the second chance ( 114 (b)) may be skipped and an effect (skip effect) for executing the final stage of the pseudo-variable effect (see FIG. 115) may be executed. Thereby, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player. It should be noted that, even in the production mode other than the special reach 3, it may be configured to execute the gaze production and the skip production corresponding to the set variation time length.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 66. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 120 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value matches the random number set in the second hit random number table (see FIG. 120 (c)), it is determined that the normal symbol wins. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 140 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 140 is opened only once for “0.2 seconds × 1” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 140 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 140 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 137).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 sets the jackpot lottery and display settings in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80 according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first per-random number table 202a, the first per-type selection table 202b, the second per-random number table 202c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. A counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, a probability variation flag 203g, an hour / middle counter 203h, a jackpot flag 203i, an hour / hour flag 203k, a counter buffer 203y, And at least a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas stores values of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big special lottery drawing of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the special symbol 1 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From this, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. The prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning can be accurately predicted.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning port 140 (special symbol 2), and the first winning port 64 (special symbol 1) with respect to the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. ) Is changed only to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (variable display unit) that is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the first winning opening 64 (start winning). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed at 80). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S504 in FIG. 131). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 128).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 128 and S505 in FIG. 131). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of retained balls on the variable display device unit 80 based on the number of retained balls notified by the display retained ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning port 140 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the processing of S510 in FIG. 131, and is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 128). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 128, S511 in FIG. 131). reference).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 66 at most four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 66 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 127). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 133).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S803 in FIG. 134: No).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol state. If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The initial value of the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF. In the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variation with time short and large jackpot) (the jackpot game of the jackpot game) When it is determined that it is (end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 138). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), it is referred to to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

  Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 129, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 129, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to. If the value is ON, the special symbol lottery is selected based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability.

  In this control example, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON is the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or jackpot C (2R probability variation with time short / no jackpot) in the jackpot control process (jackpot Game end timing), but it can be set so that a special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot ends can be performed in a high probability state. For example, it is set to ON when the jackpot game ending effect ends. The probability variation flag 203g may be set on until the special symbol lottery is executed when the condition for executing the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is satisfied. You may comprise.

  Further, the timing for setting off the probability variation flag 203g is assumed to be when the jackpot game is started, but is not limited to this, for example, a display symbol (second symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot It may be configured to be set to off at the timing when is stopped and displayed.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the big hit B (short hit big at 16R) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (ie, the end timing of the big hit game) by the big hit control process (FIG. 138). (See S1215). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the time is shortened in the normal symbol variation process (see S708 in FIG. 133), and is subtracted by 1 every time the variation time elapses in the special symbol variation process. (See S205 in FIG. 128). In addition, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is larger than 0 and the probability variation flag 203g described above is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the certain symbol certain variation state and the time reduction state.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is on, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state by the jackpot control process (S1104 in FIG. 138) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  The time reduction flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time reduction state (a high probability state of a normal symbol). If the value of the time reduction flag 203k is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol state. If the value of the time reduction flag 203k is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (ordinary symbol low probability state). This time-short flag 203k has an initial value set to OFF, and when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (the jackpot game end timing). Is set to ON (see S1216 in FIG. 138). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), it is referred to to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

  As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the hour / short flag 203k are set to ON, and the hour / short game is given together with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the big hit C (2R probability change existence short time no big hit), although the probability change flag 203g is set on, the time reduction flag 203k remains off, and it becomes a latent probability gaming state where only the probability variation game is given.

  Here, the latent game state (special symbol probability change state) is a high probability that the lottery based on entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 is a big hit, If it is not suggested that the game is in the latent game state by changing the production mode, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a latent game. On the other hand, in the short-time game, since the number of times and the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 are changed, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a short-time game. It is.

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the game is a probability-changing game when the time-short game is given together with the probability-changing game based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (when the probability-changing gaming state is set). When only the probability variation game is given based on the jackpot C (2R probability variation time short / no-large jackpot), it is difficult to recognize that the probability variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). Thereby, it is necessary for the player to guess whether the game state is a normal game or a probability-changing game, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data. An area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201 A stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Have.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 137), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 136) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 135) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an outer reel operation table 222c, an inner reel operation table 222d, a symbol operation table 222e, a special effect scenario table 222f, and a symbol group storage area 222g. ing.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is already well known and will be described briefly. However, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and shows a rough variation indicated by the variation pattern command. More detailed variation content is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a from the content (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 123, it demonstrates based on the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in this control example. FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 222a in the variation pattern selection table in this control example. In this control example, when the set variation pattern (variation time) is long (long period) in addition to the special symbol lottery result or determination result, the third symbol is referred to by referring to the dedicated variation pattern table. The variable display mode is set.

  Next, the contents of the long fluctuation pattern table 222a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram in which the contents defined in the long variation pattern table 222a3 are schematically designated. As shown in FIG. 123, the variation pattern table 222a3 for long variation includes the type of variation time (for example, 60 seconds or 90 seconds) set by the current special symbol variation, the lottery result of the current special symbol variation, An effect mode is set based on the currently set operation scenario (action pattern) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223j.

  The outer reel operation table 222c is a data table in which the operation content of the outer reel 821 is stored. In the outer reel operation table 222c, a plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 are set, and correspond to the variation pattern set in the variation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145). The operation scenario to be determined is determined.

  In the operation scenario determined here, the operation content (motor data) of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c is set in association with the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). Each time the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) is executed, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is updated (see S3102 in FIG. 150), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3104 in FIG. 150). ). Based on the motor data set here, the driving of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c is controlled by the motor MPU.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, dynamic display (third display until the display symbol for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped in correspondence with the special symbol variable display (third display). Apart from the symbol variation display), an effect display for driving the outer reel 821 and the inner reel 811 is executed as an effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol.

  In other words, the display design printed on the display surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 can be switched between the case where the display symbol is used as the third symbol and the case where the display symbol is used as the effect design for the effect. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which variation display mode (motion display mode) is for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and to provide an unexpected game. .

  Moreover, it is also configured to switch the variation display mode for showing the third symbol in one dynamic display executed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. More specifically, for example, when a variation pattern in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 is displayed for the first 30 seconds. The display symbol printed on the outer reel 821 is used as the third symbol for the second half 30 seconds as the third symbol. Thereby, it is possible to set a variation display mode that is difficult for a player to predict, and to provide a more surprising game.

  In this control example, any one of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the 7-segment display unit 1600 is configured to have a variable display mode for displaying the third symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a light emitting means (display means) composed of a plurality of LEDs may be provided at a specific location on the game board 13, and the 3rd symbol variation display may be executed using the light emitting means (display means). . As a result, all the variable display modes using the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be used as the variable display mode for effects, so that it is possible to execute effects with a higher degree of freedom. The production effect can be enhanced. Further, during the variation display period of the special symbol, the light emitting means (display means) described above is used to notify that the special symbol is being variably displayed, and only when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the inner reel 811, The third symbol may be stopped and displayed using either the outer reel 821 or the 7-segment display unit 1600.

  The inner reel operation table 222d is a data table in which the operation content of the inner reel 811 is stored. In this reel operation table 222d, a plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 are set, and corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145). The operation scenario to be determined is determined.

  In the operation scenario determined here, the operation content (motor data) of the inner reel drive motors KM1a to 1c is set in association with the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). Each time the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151) is executed, the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q is updated (see S3202 in FIG. 151), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3204 in FIG. 151). ). Based on the motor data set here, the driving of the outer reel drive motors KM1a to 1c is controlled by the motor MPU.

  The symbol operation table 222e is an operation of each device (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, the displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80 according to the set game state and game conditions. It is the data table in which the operation information referred when setting the initial state (operation pattern) of a mode is stored. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example sets a plurality of variable display modes (operation display modes) for indicating the lottery result of special symbols (for example, a variable display mode using the inner reel 811 and a variable display using the outer reel 821). Mode, any one of the variable display modes using the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be set). For example, when a different display state is set due to a different game state being set, it is necessary to position various devices in an initial state corresponding to the changed display state. The symbol operation table 222e stores initial states (operation patterns) of various devices corresponding to the respective variable display modes, and therefore, drive control to be executed for the various devices when the variable display mode is varied. It can be performed accurately.

  Further, in the symbol operation table 222e, each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, The special motion control is executed for the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the displacement member 670), and the initial state (motion pattern) of the special effect is stored in the symbol motion table 222e.

  In addition, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won and the jackpot game is executed, each device provided in the variable display device unit 80 (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, the displacement member 670). ) Is executed, and the symbol action table 222e also stores an initial state (action pattern) of the jackpot effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 124, the contents stored in the symbol action table 222e will be specifically described. As an action pattern when a normal state or a latent state is set as a gaming state, Reel 811 (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c) is defined as operable (indicated as “◯” in FIG. 124), and outer reel 821 (left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, right outer reel) The reel 821c) is defined as a first region (indicated as “first” in FIG. 124) formed of a transmissive member, and a 7-segment display portion 1600 (left 7-segment display portion 1600a, middle 7-segment display portion 1600b, right 7-segment display portion 1600c) is defined as non-display (indicated as “x” in FIG. 124), and the displacement member 670 (left displacement member 670a, middle displacement member 670b, right displacement member 67). c) a first position (most open state (see FIG. 114 (a))) operation pattern (first operation pattern defining a) is stored.

  When the first operation pattern is selected, the inner reel 811 is rotated in response to the special symbol variation display, and the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed as the third symbol. (See FIG. 110 (a)).

  Next, the inner reel 811 (the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c) can be operated as an operation pattern when the short-time state or the probability variation state is set as the gaming state (in FIG. 124, The outer reel 821 (the left outer reel 821a, the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c) is a second region in which the light emitting region 822 is formed (indicated as “second” in FIG. 124). 7 segment display unit 1600 (left 7 segment display unit 1600a, middle 7 segment display unit 1600b, right 7 segment display unit 1600c) is defined as operable (denoted as “◯” in FIG. 124), and the displacement member 670 (left displacement member 670a, middle displacement member 670b, right displacement member 670c) is an operation pattern that defines the first position (the most open state (see FIG. 114A)). 2 operation pattern) are stored.

  When this second motion pattern is selected, the variable display of the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed in correspondence with the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 (FIG. 111). (See (a)). In this control example, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even when the second operation pattern is set. That is, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even when the second area of the outer reel 821 is displayed and the player cannot visually recognize the rotation state of the inner reel 811.

  By configuring in this way, for example, when a problem occurs in the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the lottery result of the special symbol cannot be notified without a sense of incongruity by the display mode of the 7-segment display unit 1600, The outer reel 821 is rotated so that the player can visually recognize the inner reel 811. The lottery result can be stopped and displayed using the inner reel 811.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description of the contents defined in the symbol operation table 222e will be continued. In a state where the first motion pattern is set as the motion pattern, the content of the special reach (first special performance) executed when the first performance condition is satisfied is defined as the motion pattern “motion 3”.

  In this “operation 3”, only the inner inner reel 811b among the inner reels 811 can be operated “O”, each outer reel 821 is set to the first position, and among the seven segment display unit 1600, the left seven segment display unit 1600a. And the right 7-segment display portion 1600c can be displayed, and the left displacement member 670a and the right displacement member 670c of the displacement member 670 can be variably operated in the first position to the third position. The operation details are specified. When this operation pattern “operation 3” is set, the effect (special reach 1) described above with reference to FIG. 112 is executed.

  In addition, in the state where the first operation pattern is set as the operation pattern, the contents of the special reach 2 (second special effect) executed when the second effect condition is satisfied are defined, and the first operation is set as the operation pattern. The contents of special reach 3 (third special effect) that is executed when the third effect condition is satisfied in a state where the pattern is set are defined. In addition, “Action 6” is defined as an action pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game.

  In the special effect scenario table 222f, the operation control content for each device (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670) when the special effect is executed is defined in correspondence with the elapsed time. In this data table, the contents of the operation control corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223i which is set when the special effect is executed and periodically updated are stored.

  Next, the contents of the special effect scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special effect scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 125, the special effect scenario table 222f includes various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel) when special effects (reach) 1 to 3 executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example are executed. 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) are defined in accordance with the elapsed time (value of scenario counter 223 i). Since the scenario counter 223i is configured to update the counter value every 1 millisecond as will be described later, the scenario is actually defined in the special effect scenario table 222f in milliseconds. In FIG. 125, the scenario is defined in seconds (S units) for convenience of explanation.

  First, the special effect (reach) 1 is defined in association with a special effect scenario having an effect period of 60 seconds (60S), and can be set when a variation time of 60 seconds is set. In the special effect (reach) 1, each inner reel 811 starts to rotate at a timing when the remaining variation time is 60 seconds, that is, when a special symbol variation is started, and each outer reel 821 is rotated to each inner reel 811. An operation scenario is defined in which the rotation state is positioned in the first region (first position) so that the player can visually recognize the rotation state, and the displacement member 670 is positioned in the first position.

  Thereafter, the left inner reel 811a is stopped when the remaining fluctuation time is 55 seconds, the right outer reel 821c is stopped when the remaining fluctuation time is 50 seconds, and the middle inner reel 811b is stopped when the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds. Stop, that is, all the inner reels 811 display a temporary stop, and the 7-segment display unit 1600 is all lit. Then, the left 7-segment display unit 1600a and the right 7-segment display unit 1600c are displayed with a pattern simulating “7” at the timing of the remaining variation time of 35 seconds, and the middle inner reel at the timing of the remaining variation time of 34 seconds. 811b is changed again (see FIG. 112). The operation scenario is defined so that the inner reel 811b stops at a timing when the remaining fluctuation time is 5 seconds.

  As described above, when various operation controls are performed on a plurality of devices (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670), an operation scenario for each device is defined in advance. By doing so, special effects can be executed smoothly.

  The symbol group storage area 222g is data in which information for limiting the symbol types (“0” to “9”) that can be selected when setting the display symbols to be stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 is stored. A display symbol which is an area and is to be stopped and displayed using a symbol type included in the set symbol group is set.

  The symbol group storage area 222g is a storage area in which a symbol group referred to when setting the stop display mode of the third symbol is stored. Here, the contents of the symbol group storage area 222g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol group storage area 222g.

  As shown in FIG. 126, three symbol groups (symbol groups A to C) are defined in the symbol group storage area 222g, and each symbol group has a different number. Specifically, the symbol group A has the numbers “0, 1, 7”, the symbol group B has the numbers “2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9”, and the symbol group C has “0, The numbers “9” are stored in association with each other.

  In this symbol group storage area 222g, the time-short state is set as the gaming state, and the display mode of each stopped symbol when the variable display of the third symbol (see FIG. 111) using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed. It is used when setting. As described above, in this control example, only one segment (light emitting area 822) constituting 7 segments is formed in a different form, and this light emitting area 822 is visually recognized by the player even when the other segments are turned off. It is formed as a segment that is easy to do.

  Therefore, in this control example, a process of setting a stop symbol form is executed in order to suppress misidentification of the player, and the symbol group storage area 222g is used in the process.

  Returning to FIG. 122 (b), the description will be continued. FIG. 122B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a remaining short time counter 223g, At least a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, an effect counter 223j, a gaming state storage area 223k, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stopped symbol storage area 223n, a returning flag 223l, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided. It has been.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 1 and the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 2). In each of these areas, winning information is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) or the special symbol 2 (second special symbol). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the variable display device unit 80), like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts up to four times the maximum number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and holds it. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2308 in FIG. 142). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol in the variable display unit 80. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. The value of the counter 223b is configured to be notified to the player using a dedicated display means.

  In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has the maximum number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main controller 110 at the maximum. It is a counter that counts up to once. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c adds the reserved ball number by entering the second winning opening 140, and the special display 2 is different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 on the dedicated display means. Since it differs only in the point used for the display of the number of reserved balls, and others are the same, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  It should be noted that, based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, the operation contents to be output to the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are made different. For example, a special voice or light emission mode that is executed only when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to store the reserved ball.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern reception process executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2302 in FIG. 142), and the fluctuation display in the variable display device unit 80 is displayed. Is set to OFF (see S2602 in FIG. 145). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The variation pattern command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Based on the received display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 identifies devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) that execute the variation display of the third symbol, and the corresponding MPU ( Display control is executed using the segment MPU 114a and the reel MPU 114b).

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2305 in FIG. 142), and is turned off when the stop type is set (FIG. 145). S2609). When the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. The display control device 114 displays the variable effect stop display so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80. Control.

  In the present control example, the third symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation display described above using various devices (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the 7-segment display unit 1600) controlled by the display control device 114. In addition to the display, it is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect variation display for suggesting a lottery result of a special symbol and a jackpot effect variation display executed during the jackpot game. The suggestion effect variation display command is a suggestion effect variation display command that is set for a device other than the device subject to the third symbol variation display when the display lamp variation pattern command is set by the sound lamp control device 113. Is executed when the display control apparatus 114 receives the message.

  Further, when the display jackpot start command set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the jackpot effect variation display is executed based on the contents included in the command. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of executing the third symbol variation display, the suggestion effect variation display is performed using a device in which the third symbol variation corresponding to one special symbol variation is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which device is executing the third symbol variation, and to provide an unexpected game.

  In addition, in a device in which display symbols are printed in advance, such as the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, the display symbol is changed to the third symbol based on the display variation pattern command set by the sound lamp control device 113. Since the pattern used as the suggestion effect and the pattern used as the effect design for the suggestion effect can be switched, an unexpected game can be provided by the player.

  The remaining short-time counter 223g is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol fluctuations until the short-time state ends. The remaining short time counter 223g indicates that the short time state is set in the state setting process (see S2317 in FIG. 144) executed in the command determination process (see S2212 in FIG. 142) of the sound lamp control device 113. When it is determined that a status command has been received (S2506: Yes in FIG. 144), a value of 100 is set (S2507 in FIG. 144), and the display variation is displayed in the variation display setting process (see S2606 in FIG. 145). After setting the pattern command, 1 is subtracted (see S2606 in FIG. 145).

  Then, in the variation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146), when the current value is referred to and the value is determined to be 5 or less (S2709: Yes in FIG. 146), it can be executed during the time-saving state. The remaining number display process (see S2710 in FIG. 147) for displaying the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (remaining short number of times) is executed, and the remaining short time number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 (FIG. 111 (b)). )reference).

  That is, this control example is configured to notify the player of the remaining short number of times when the remaining short number of times in the short time state reaches five times. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the short-time state is abruptly terminated without notifying the player. Further, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the remaining short time is displayed immediately after the time reduction state is set, and it becomes difficult to grasp the stop display contents of the third symbol.

  In this control example, the period in which the remaining short number of times is displayed is a period in which the remaining short number of times is 5 or less. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the remaining short number of times may be 10 or less. Further, there is no need to continuously display the remaining short number of times, and for example, the remaining short number of times may be displayed when it is a multiple of ten. Furthermore, in this control example, the remaining short number of times is always displayed during the period in which the remaining short number of times is displayed, but it may be configured to determine whether or not to display the remaining short number of times by lottery. It may be configured that the player can select whether or not to display the remaining number of times by operating the frame button 22.

  The specific remaining period flag 223h is a flag for indicating whether or not it is a period for displaying the remaining short number of times in the time reduction state, and is set to ON when it is a period for displaying the remaining short number of times. is there. The specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON when the remaining number display process (see S2710 in FIG. 147) is executed (see S2801 in FIG. 147), and the value of the remaining short time counter 223g becomes 0. It is set to off (see S2806 in FIG. 147).

  Also, it is referred to in the stop symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) for setting the stop display mode (stop symbol) of the third symbol (see S3406 in FIG. 153), and is determined to be set to ON. In this case (S3406: Yes in FIG. 153), a stop symbol using a numerical value different from the numerical value of the remaining short time displayed is set (see S3408 in FIG. 153).

  By comprising in this way, since it can prevent that the stop display mode (stop symbol) of the 3rd symbol and the display mode which shows the remaining short number of times become the same display mode, Information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and information indicating the remaining short time can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The scenario counter 223i is a counter that is referred to when determining the timing for executing the operation control for each device (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the displacement member 670) included in the variable display device unit 80, and is a variable display setting. In the variation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146) executed in the process (see S2213 in FIG. 145), when the operation scenario (production scenario) to be executed this time is set (see S2707 in FIG. 146), the setting is made. A value corresponding to the operated scenario (production scenario) is set (see S2708 in FIG. 146).

  The set value is subtracted in an operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3005 in FIG. 149). When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is greater than 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 149), the operation control content for each device (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the displacement member 670) included in the variable display device unit 80. Referenced to set.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, in the operation scenario (production scenario), the operation control content corresponding to each device is defined in association with the value of the scenario counter 223i. The operation control content to be executed in the current process is determined on the basis of the value of the scenario counter 223i at the time of execution of S149 of (149) and the currently set operation scenario (production scenario). Set the operation command (motor data) according to the operation control content. Then, in the command output process (see S2202 in FIG. 141) of the sound lamp control device 113, an operation command is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 applies to each device based on the contents of the received operation command. Perform the action.

  In this control example, when an operation scenario (production scenario) is set, a value corresponding to the time of the operation scenario (production scenario) is set in the scenario counter 223i, and the value of the scenario counter 223i is set every 1 millisecond. It is configured to subtract. That is, when an operation scenario (production scenario) for 30 seconds is set, “30000” is set as the value of the scenario counter 223i, and the scenario counter 223i is executed every time the operation control process (S2211 in FIG. 149) is executed. However, it is only necessary to be able to discriminate the progress of the operation scenario. For example, there is a time measuring means for measuring the passage of time since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A storage means for storing timekeeping information at a timing at which an operation scenario (production scenario) is set, and a difference between the timekeeping information stored in the storage means and the current time information timed by the timekeeping means And the progress of the operation scenario (production scenario) may be determined based on the calculation result.

  Further, in this control example, the operation control contents of a plurality of devices (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the displacement member 670, etc.) included in the variable display device unit 80 are collectively defined in one operation scenario (effect scenario). By doing so, it is configured to make it difficult for deviations in the operation contents of a plurality of devices, but not limited to this, it is configured to specify an operation scenario (production scenario) for each device, A dedicated scenario counter may be provided for each operation scenario. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of operation control patterns using a plurality of devices included in the variable display device unit 80 by combining a plurality of operation scenarios.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selection of various effects (variation patterns, notice effects, etc.) and various lotteries in the audio lamp control device 113, and is 0 in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the audio lamp control device 113. To 198 (not shown).

  The gaming state storage area 223k is a data area for storing information for indicating the current gaming state included in various state commands output from the main control device 110, and on the sound lamp control device 113 side. This is used to determine the currently set gaming state. In this control example, each time a different gaming state is set in the main controller 110, and every time power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set. Since the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the state command is set, the current game state can be reliably determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  In addition, the gaming state storage area 223k of this control example has an area for storing the currently set gaming state and an area for storing the gaming state set immediately before. For example, just before the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game), it is configured so that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot can be determined. It is possible to set different presentation modes when the time reduction state is set, and when the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set and the time reduction state is set after the end of the jackpot.

  The returning flag 223l is a flag for indicating that the reel operation check process is currently being executed after power-on, and is set to ON when the reel operation check process is being executed. . This returning flag 223l is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process (see S2013 in FIG. 140) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (see FIG. 140). 140 (S2104 of 140), when the outer reel 821 moves to the second position (S2102: Yes in FIG. 140), it is set to OFF (S2113 in FIG. 140).

  When it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed from when the reel operation confirmation process is performed until it is detected that the outer reel 821 has moved to the second position (S2105 in FIG. 140). It is determined whether the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2103 in FIG. 140). This in-return flag 223l is determined that the outer reel 821 has not reached the second position even though 10 seconds have elapsed since the reel operation check process was executed (S2105: Yes in FIG. 140). When an error command is set (S2107 in FIG. 140), it is set to OFF. It is also set to OFF when the reel operation confirmation process is normally executed (see S2113 in FIG. 140).

  The operation mode storage area 223m stores information for determining which is the current operation mode (operation pattern). If the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability state, “operation 1” is stored. If the current game state is the short-time state or the probability variation state, “operation 2” is stored. “Operation 3” is stored, “Operation 4” is stored if it is during the special reach 2, “Operation 5” is stored if it is during the special reach 3, and “Operation 6” is stored if it is a big hit. . Each operation mode (operation pattern) is set with reference to the symbol operation table 222e.

  In this control example, various devices (an inner reel 811, an outer reel 821, a 7-segment display unit 1600, a displacement member 670) disposed in the variable display device unit 80 according to the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223m. ) In the operation mode (the initial mode (initial position) until the operation control is executed and the presence / absence of the operation control target).

  Note that holding means (backup means) capable of holding information for indicating the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223m even when the power is turned off may be provided. Thereby, even after the power failure recovery, it is possible to set an appropriate operation mode for the operation modes of the various devices of the variable display unit 80.

  The stop symbol storage area 223n is a storage area for temporarily storing the set stop symbol display mode. In the stop symbol storage area 223n, the stop executed when it is determined that the stop type selection flag is set to ON in the variable display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145) (S2607: Yes in FIG. 145). Information indicating the stop symbol set in the symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) is stored.

  In the present control example, a short time state is set as the gaming state (the operation pattern (operation mode) is “operation 2”), and the 7-segment display unit 1600 is used to perform the variable display of the third symbol. Is established (when the remaining special symbol fluctuation count (remaining short time count) in which the short time state is set becomes 5 or less), the 7-segment display unit 1600 is used to display the remaining short time count.

  In the state of displaying the remaining short number of times in this way, when the display mode indicating the same number is displayed with the stop symbol of the third pattern (symbol of the number) and the value indicating the remaining short number of times display, There is a problem that it is difficult to understand whether the displayed display mode is for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol or for indicating the number of remaining times. Therefore, in the present control example, when the remaining short number of times is displayed, a process of controlling so that the stop symbol of the third symbol (similar to a number) is different from the value indicating the remaining short number of times. The stop symbol set in this process is stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n.

  The outer reel operation counter 223p is a counter that is referred to when determining a period during which an operation instruction is given to the outer reel 821, and is an outer reel control process (S3002 in FIG. 150) of the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). When the value of the scenario counter 223i indicates that it is the timing to operate the outer reel 821 in the operation scenario (when the outer reel operation table is set), a value indicating the period during which the outer reel 821 is operated (END) Data) is set (S3107 in FIG. 150).

  While the outer reel operation table 222c is set, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is incremented by 1 (see S3102 in FIG. 150) in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the audio lamp control device 113, Reference is made when determining whether the value has reached the END data (see S3103 in FIG. 150). Based on the reference result of S3103 in FIG. 150, the operations of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c are controlled.

  The inner reel operation counter 223q performs a process of changing the target from the outer reel 821 to the inner reel 811 with respect to the above-described outer reel operation counter 223p, and processing for setting and referring to the counter value. The difference is that the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) is changed to the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151). Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in this control example, an operation scenario is managed based on the value of the scenario counter 223i, and when the operation scenario is the timing for operating any of the various devices, Configured to operate a dedicated counter. As described above, the main counter (scenario counter 223i) for managing a large flow of operations and the sub-counters (outer reel operation counter 223p, inner reel operation counter 223q) for managing the operation of each device are divided. Thus, since the number of items managed by the main counter can be reduced, the scenario counter 223i that is frequently executed can be simplified.

  Further, for example, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to perform only management of the counter corresponding to the main counter, and the display control device 114 is configured to manage the counter corresponding to the sub-counter. While reducing the processing load of 113, the operations of various devices can be managed in an integrated manner, and the operations of the various devices can be synchronized.

  The power-off flag 223y is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main controller 110 detects power-off, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. The power-off process is set and executed (S2217 in FIG. 141). When the power-off flag 223y is on in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 139), the RAM work area is cleared and the data is read, and the power-off flag 223y is set off. (S2010 in FIG. 139). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process at the time of power interruption can be reused by the data reading process by the data reading process in the startup process at the time of power restoration, and the game is continuously executed. Can do.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 142) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 127 to 138. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the variable display device unit 80 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66. Through-gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 127), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display and variable display device performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variation display (variation time) of the third symbol performed in the unit 80.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the variable display device unit 80, and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In other words, in this control example, a new special symbol change occurs after the stop display indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit until the end of the jackpot game (until the end of the jackpot game ends). Configured not to start. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new special symbol change is started during the jackpot game and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game.

  It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, during the period when a stop display indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is being executed or during the ending period of the big hit game, a new special symbol change May be set as a period during which the game can be started, or may be set as a period during which a new special symbol variation can be started even during the jackpot game. Thereby, the execution frequency | count of special symbol fluctuation | variation can be increased.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable symbol display in the special symbol). (N203) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (that is, there is a special symbol 2 reserved memory) (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 137) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no special symbol 2 reserved ball) (S204: No), It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (that is, the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 Since both have no holding balls, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and is changed by calculation. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

  In the process of S208, a special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S213). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed. This is a process for determining a condition (for example, a variation time) regarding a production pattern (variation pattern) of a variation effect performed by one symbol display device 37A, 37B and the variable display device unit 80.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S302). In the processing of S302, it is determined whether or not the current probability is being changed by determining whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.

  When it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the high-probability time for the first per-random number table (see FIG. 120A) are used. Based on the jackpot determination value, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random values set in the first random number table (see FIG. 117 (a)). As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random values may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) of the special symbol, the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 is displayed. Based on the value and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table for low probability. As a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “0” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits this match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), the jackpot The display mode at the time of jackpot indicating is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80. Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with a random value stored in the first hit type selection table. In this first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any one of “0 to 39” is the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit), which is one of the values “40 to 79”. In this case, the jackpot type is jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R), and the jackpot type in the case of any of “80 to 99” is jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot).

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot (big hit variation pattern) is determined from the variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 121) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307). Specifically, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using the variation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S310.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S305: No), the display state at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). ). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined according to the set gaming state. Specifically, when the current gaming state is a normal state or a latent state, a variation pattern is determined using a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121 (c)), When the current gaming state is a probability variation state or a time-short state, a variation pattern is determined using a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121 (d)). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S310.

  In this control example, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that differs depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the set gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a different variation pattern may be determined according to the current number of reserved balls. Further, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern is set using the same variation pattern table regardless of the set gaming state. Not limited to this, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined by using a variation pattern table that differs according to the set gaming state and the number of reserved balls stored. It may be configured.

  In this control example, the same variation pattern table (outgoing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2) is used when the normal state is set as the gaming state and when the latent state is set. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from knowing whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state based on the determined variation pattern.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of this control example, for example, a variation pattern table corresponding to each gaming state is provided, and a variation pattern table (normal variation pattern table) used during a normal state and a latent probability state are provided. The content defined in the variation pattern table (latent probability variation pattern table) used in the above may be slightly different. Specifically, the normal variation pattern table and the latent probability variation It is preferable that the variation pattern types (variation times) that can be selected by the pattern table are unified and the selection ratio of each variation pattern is different. By configuring in this way, the current gaming state is not identified to the player from the determined variation pattern type, but the player can predict the current gaming state according to the selected variation pattern type selection ratio. it can. Therefore, the player can be watched with respect to the variation pattern of special symbol variation (outgoing variation pattern) executed a plurality of times.

  Furthermore, the special variation pattern type (variation time) determined only when the latent probability variation pattern table is used may be selected with a low probability (for example, 1%). Thereby, the player can be made aware of the current gaming state only when the special variation pattern type is determined. Therefore, a special advantage (information that can grasp the current gaming state) advantageous to the player can be provided for the special symbol fluctuation executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play, and the interest of the game can be improved. Can be improved.

  In the process of S310, a change pattern command for notifying each determined change pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S310), a stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is ended to display a special symbol. Return to the fluctuation process.

  Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127).

  In the stop setting process (S215), first, stop display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The display mode of the stopped symbols to be stopped at this time is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) in FIG. 129 (see S306 and S308 in FIG. 129).

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on and the jackpot C is reached. In this case, the yellow LED is turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops. In addition, as long as it is a lighting mode which can identify not only the above-mentioned LED display color and lighting mode but also the jackpot type and the fluctuation state, other lighting modes may be used.

  After the process of S261 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S262). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the jackpot start is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

  On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the current lottery result is out of place (not a big hit) (S262: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S269). . When it is determined that the value of the hour / midtime counter 203h is not 1 or more (0) (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S269: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265. In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 130, when the variation time of the special symbol elapses, the processing corresponding to the result of the special symbol variation of this time is executed immediately. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the process of S262 may be executed after a predetermined time (predetermined stop display period) has elapsed since the stop display of the first symbol display device was set (see S261 in FIG. 130). good. In other words, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the special symbol variation start process ends, and the stop display is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the special symbol that is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 127), and determines whether or not there is a ball winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140, This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process of the values when there is a start prize.

  When the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 131) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  And, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 137) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the processing of S505, the RAM 203 stores the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S507 to S512, the same processing is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140 with respect to the processing from S501 to S506. The only difference with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 140 is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. And when it determines with the ball | bowl not having won the 2nd winning opening 140 in the process of S507 (S507: No), a prefetch process is performed after the process of S512 (S513). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the prefetching process (S513), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S513).

  In this prefetch process (FIG. 132, S513), it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is a certain change (S602), and the gaming state If it is certain (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 120A) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the gaming state is not certain (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120A) (S604), and the process of S605 Move on to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is terminated. In the prefetch processing (S513), not only in the present embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outreach reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated and the voice lamp control device 113 is instructed by a winning information command. May be configured to be notified.

  In this control example, the pre-reading process is executed both when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. For example, the pre-reading process is executed only when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 corresponding to the special symbol 2 in which the special symbol change start process is preferentially executed. You may comprise so that it may do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the first symbol associated with the second winning opening 140 are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 520 and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 133), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device is in the middle of displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S708). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the variable display device unit 80, and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 120 (c)).

  In the process of S708, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the processing of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the second random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 120 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S712: Yes) The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S714). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S714: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit for the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S715). If the result of determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off The number of opening times and the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second winning opening 140 Is set to 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S719). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S719: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hits of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the release period of the second winning opening 140 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S722). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 133) when the fluctuation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a win (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric combination 520 is set by the process of S725, the electric combination is performed when the electric combination opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed next. Open / close control is started, and the open / close control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 134), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (FIG. 137), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 137), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 127) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) or the start winning process (see FIG. 131) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the variable display device unit 80 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 131) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or specified. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 65a is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). Details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the first electrical accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 129), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start in devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 129). , 37B are stopped (lighted).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 133) or the process of S721, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 133). )

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 135 has been executed, the power-off process after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S1001) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (S1104 in FIG. 138), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 130) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203k are turned off (S1202), the opening command is set (S1203), and this processing is ended as it is. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1204). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80, and the special symbol jackpot. Includes during the predetermined time after the game ends. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1204 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the processing of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). When it is determined in the processing of S1205 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206) and newly started. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1207), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1205 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208). If the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1208, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is the end timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball thrown time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the big hit flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and an ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set in the hour / minute counter 203h (S1217), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot type is A or C in the process of S1213 (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the hour / short flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 155. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S2217 (see FIG. 141) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S2214: Yes in FIG. 141), it executes a power-off process in S2217. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2217 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process at S1514 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2217, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2217, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the variable display device unit 80. May be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S2217 is executed (see S2217 in FIG. 141). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S2217 is executed, the process of S2008 when the power-off flag 223y is turned on leads to the process of S2008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2217 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S2010). The initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2011). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S2012), reel operation confirmation processing is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to main processing. Details of the reel operation confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2011, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2011), and interrupt permission is set. (S2012), a reel operation confirmation process is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 140, the reel operation confirmation process (S2013) which is one process in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reel operation confirmation process (S2013). In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), a process for confirming whether the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 operate normally when the power is turned on is executed.

  In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), first, the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the second position (non-transparent area) (S2101). Here, by moving the outer reel unit 820 to the non-transparent area (second position), it is possible to make the operation confirmation process of the inner reel executed later invisible. Next, it is determined whether or not the outer reel unit 820 has detected at the origin position of the second position (S2102). If it is determined that the origin of the outer reel unit 820 is not detected (S2102: No), is the returning flag 223l turned on, that is, whether the outer reel unit 820 is moving to the origin of the second position. Whether or not is determined (S2103). If it is determined that the returning flag 223l is not on (S2103: No), the returning flag 223l is set to on (S2104), and the process returns to S2102.

  Returning to the processing of S2102, it is determined whether the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin of the second position (S2102). If it is still determined that the outer reel unit 820 is not detected at the origin of the second position (S2102: No), it is determined whether or not the returning flag 223l is set to ON in the processing of S2104 (S2103). . When it is determined that the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2103: Yes), a predetermined time has elapsed after the returning flag 223l is set to ON, that is, the return of the outer reel unit 820 is started. It is determined whether (in this control example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (S2105). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the return (S2105: No), the process returns to S2102 because the return is in progress. On the other hand, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of recovery (S2105: No), an error command for notifying the abnormality of the outer reel unit 820 is set (S2106), and the power is shut off. Loop endlessly. The abnormality of the outer reel unit 820 is notified by the display lamp 34. It should be noted that a sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the outer reel unit 820, or an error message may be displayed on the variable display device unit 80.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2102 that the outer reel unit 820 has been detected at the origin position of the second position (S2102: Yes), next, the operation confirmation processing of the inner reel unit 810 is executed (S2107). . Next, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation processing of the inner reel unit 810 in S2107 has been completed (S2108). If it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 has not been completed (S2108: No), the process of S2108 is looped until the operation confirmation process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 has been completed (S2108: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation of the inner reel unit 810 is confirmed to be normal in the process of S2107 (S2109). When it is confirmed that the operation of the inner reel unit 810 is normal (S2109: Yes), the inner reel unit 810 is moved to the initial removal symbol row (S2110), and then the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the first position ( (Transparent region) (S2111), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, after the normality of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 is confirmed, each reel is moved to the initial position, and immediately after the start-up process (see FIG. 139) is completed. There is an effect that a game can be started. On the other hand, if an operation abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is found in the process of S2109 (S2109: No), an error command indicating an operation abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is set (S2112), and this process ends. . The abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is notified by the display lamp 34 as with the outer reel unit 820. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the inner reel unit 810, or the variable display device unit 80 may display an error message.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S2201 was executed (S2201). If not (S2201: No), the processing proceeds to S2212 without performing the processing of S2202 to S2211. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S2202 to S2212 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S2212, the variation display setting processing in S2213, etc. in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S2213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2203 to S2213 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S2202). ). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2208 described later (S2203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called.

  Further, when recovering from a power failure due to a power failure or the like, an effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 136). . The voice lamp control device 113 creates a display variation pattern command in the power-on notification process (S2204) based on the reception of the effect permission command including that the special symbol is changing, and the display control device. It transmits toward 114. The display control device 114 discriminates this variation start command by a simple command determination process (see FIG. 118B), and executes variation display for power-on based on the variation pattern based on the received command (FIG. 118). 82 (b) or (c)). Since the display variation pattern command created here is for executing simple variation display as described above, it is simpler than that selected in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146) described later. It is a thing. As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the player can be informed that the power is on with good response when recovering from a power failure.

  In this control example, in addition to the variable display using the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be executed. Therefore, at the time of turning on the power, no matter which device is used for the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display for turning on the power may be executed by the fluctuation display using the 7-segment display unit 1600. As a result, the reel operation that consumes more electric power due to the motor operation after the power is turned on is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress a sudden increase in power consumption. Further, even when the timing until the variable display is stopped (remaining period) is unknown, the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by using the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be changed to an arbitrary third symbol at the stop timing. It can be made easy.

  Furthermore, after an effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power-off is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 136), the command is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the fluctuation display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by the simple command determination process (refer to 118 (b)), and the display mode upon power-on in the display mode based on the received command (FIG. 82 (b)). Or (see (c)) is stopped.

  Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify the variable display device unit 80 that power is supplied. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2205 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2205, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting effect process, the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 is changed to the initial mode (for example, the mode in which the displacement member 670 is changed to the fourth position) when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time. Setting for switching to is performed, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2207). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S2208), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the variable display unit 80. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the variable display device unit 80, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2209, the effect execution management process is executed (S2210). In the effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the segment display device 600 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in the effect execution management process, the lamp editing process of S2208 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2209 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the variable display device unit 80.

  After the performance execution management process, an operation control process for controlling the operation of the reel and the displacement member is performed (S2211). Details of the operation control process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the operation control process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2212). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2213. In the process of S2213, a variable display setting process is executed (S2213). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the variable display device unit 80 to perform variation effects. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process (S2213) is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2214). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2214 (S2214: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2216), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2217). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2218), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2215: No), the process returns to S2201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2215: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the variable display unit 80 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2212). This command determination processing (S2212) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S 2212), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S2301). When the variation pattern command is received (S2301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2302), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command received this time (S2303), and this processing ends. . The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 145) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the variable display device unit 80 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command is not received in the processing of S2301 (S2301: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2304). When the stop type command is received (S2304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2306). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2304: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserve ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2307). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2307: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2308). In the process of S2309, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c to the display control device 114 is set. After the process of S2308 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (start winning prize) or a special symbol lottery is performed. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is released, so that every time a start prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S2308. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S2308 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the variable display device unit 80.

  In the process of S2307, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S2307: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2309). If it is determined in the processing of S2309 that a winning information command has been received (S2310: Yes), winning information (such as a special symbol lottery result) based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S2310), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the winning information command is not received (S2309: No), it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot is received (S2311). In the process of S2311, if a command related to jackpot is received (S2311: Yes), the jackpot related process is executed (S2311), and this process is terminated. Examples of commands related to jackpots include an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. In addition, as processing corresponding to the received command relating to the jackpot, for example, there is processing for setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 143, the jackpot related process (S2312) which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S2312). In the jackpot-related processing, processing for causing the variable display device unit 80 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won. When the jackpot is won, the main controller 110 Processes corresponding to various commands transmitted from are executed.

  In the jackpot related process (S2312), first, it is determined whether the jackpot related command received by the command determination process (S2212) has received the jackpot start command (S2401). When the jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S2402), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the variable display device unit 80.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that a jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2403). When the round number command is received (S2403: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S2404), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the information indicating the round number is transmitted as the round number command from the main controller 110, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the control device 110, in the case of a configuration in which information indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2403 that the round number command has not been received (S2403: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2405). If it is determined that an ending command has not been received (S2405: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2405: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2406), and the gaming state after the big hit is read from the gaming state storage area 223k (S2407). Next, an operation pattern corresponding to the information read in the processing of S2407 is determined from the symbol operation table 222e (S2408). Specifically, after the jackpot is over, the operation time 2 is determined as the operation pattern from the symbol operation table 222e (see FIG. 124) because the time reduction or the probability variation state is set. Next, the variable display device unit operation corresponding to the operation mode determined in the processing of S2408 is set (S2409), and this processing ends.

  In the present control example, as described above, the display mode by the segment display device 600 is used in the certainty change or short-time state (see FIG. 110B). Since the variation time in the short-time state is set to 1 second or 2 seconds, if the operation pattern is set after the jackpot end, the outer reel unit 820 is placed in the player's visual recognition area from the start to the end of the variation. There is a possibility that a problem that the two areas 821a1 to 821c3 cannot be switched occurs. In this control example, by setting the operation pattern of the variable display device unit during the ending, the outer reel unit 820 can be switched before the end of the jackpot, and problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 142, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S2311 that a command relating to jackpot has not been received (S2311: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2313). If it is determined in step S2313 that the stop command has been received (S2313: Yes), the variable display stop process being executed is executed (S2314), and the display stop command is set (S2315). This process ends.

  The display stop command set by the process of S2315 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. And sent to the variable display device unit 80. When the variable display device unit 80 receives the display stop command, the variable display device unit 80 stops the variation effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2313 that a stop command has not been received (S2313: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2316). In the process of S2316, when it is determined that the status command is received (S2316: Yes), the status setting process is executed (S2317), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the state setting process (S2317) which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the state setting process (S2317). In the state setting process (S2317), a process for extracting the current gaming state from the command received from the main control device 110 and setting the operation mode of the variable display device unit 80 is executed.

  In the state setting process (S2317), first, the current gaming state is extracted from the information included in the state command received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process (S2212) (S2501). Next, a symbol action corresponding to the current gaming state is set using the symbol action table 222e (S2502). The operation mode of the inner reel 811 is set (S2503), and the operation mode of the outer reel 821 is set (S2504). Next, the operation mode of the 7-segment display unit 1600 is set (S2505). In this control example, as shown with reference to FIG. 124, the operation modes of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670 differ depending on the corresponding gaming state, so the processing of S2503 to S2505 The operation modes are respectively set in.

  Next, it is determined whether the received status command is a command indicating a shift to the time-saving state (S2506). If it is determined that the command indicates a shift to the short time state (S2506: Yes), the remaining short time counter 223g is set to 100 (S2507), and the process proceeds to S2508. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2506 that the received state command is not a command indicating a shift to the time-saving state (S2506: No), the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area 223k (S2508). This process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 142, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of S2316 (S2316: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed (S2318). ), The process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the variable display device unit 80, the command is displayed as the variable display device. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the unit 80.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the variable display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2213). This variable display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is mainly used to execute a variable effect in the variable display device unit 80. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S2601: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2607. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and then the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is set. A variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S2603).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the variation pattern selection process (S2603) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S2603). In this variation pattern selection process, a variation pattern type corresponding to the rendering mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the performance counter 223j counted by the sound lamp control device 113. is there.

  In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a long variation (S2702). In the process of S2702, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is a long fluctuation (S2702: Yes), the effect counter acquired in the process of S2701 from the long fluctuation pattern pattern table 222a3 (see FIG. 123B). Based on the value of 223j, a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command received in the process of S2303 of the command determination process (S2212) is determined (S2703). In the process of S2703, by setting the long variation pattern pattern table, it is possible to perform variation display according to the special reach 1 to each production period. Next, the process proceeds to S2707.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2702 that there is no long fluctuation (S2702: No), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is running short (S2704). In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the current gaming state is in a short time (S2704: Yes), the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command in the process of S2703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 142). Based on the type and the effect counter 223j, the corresponding variation pattern is selected from the probability variation time variation pattern selection table 222a2 (S2705), and this process is terminated. Based on the selected variation pattern, it is set as a variation pattern command for display in a variation display setting process described later (see S2604 in FIG. 145).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2704 that the current gaming state is not short (S2704: No), the corresponding variation pattern is changed to the normal variation based on the extracted variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j. The pattern is selected from the pattern selection table 222a1 (S2706), and the process proceeds to S2707. Thus, by performing the process of the variation pattern selection process (S2603), it is possible to perform a variation display according to each effect period (effect mode).

  Next, an effect scenario corresponding to the variation pattern determined in any of the processes of S2703, S2705, and S2706 is set (S2707), and the value of the scenario counter 223i is set based on the set effect scenario (S2708). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining short time counter 223g is 5 or more (S2709). If it is determined that the value of the remaining short time counter is 5 or more (S2709: Yes), the remaining number display process is executed (S2710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the value of the remaining short time counter 223g is less than 5 (S2709: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Details of the remaining number display process (S2710) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the remaining number display process (S2710). This remaining number display process (S2710) is executed in the above-described variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146), and is a process for setting a command for displaying the remaining number of times on the segment display device 600.

  In the remaining number display process (S2710), first, the specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON (S2801). Next, the value of the remaining short time counter 223g (n) is read (S2802). Next, the value of n−1 is calculated (S2803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of n−1 calculated in the process of S2803 is 0 (S2804). When it is determined that the value of n−1 is 0 (S2804: Yes), the display number command indicating “END” is set as the display mode of the number display period (1S) (S2805), and the specific remaining period The flag 223h is set to OFF (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of N-1 is not 0 in the process of S2804 (S2804: No), the display mode of the number display period (1S) is “n−1” calculated in the process of S2803. A display frequency command indicating a value is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2809.

  In this control example, as described above, the remaining short time is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 until the next fluctuation starts after the fluctuation in the short-time state stops (see FIG. 111B). . When the remaining short number of times is n, the remaining short number of times is displayed after the fluctuation of the nth change is stopped, so the number obtained by subtracting 1 from n is the remaining short number of times. In this control example, the remaining short number of times is displayed after the fluctuation stops. However, the remaining short number of times may be displayed before the fluctuation starts.

  After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern received this time is read (S2808). Next, in the process of S2808, it is determined whether or not the read fluctuation time is 1 second (S2809). When it is determined that the time is 1 second (S2809: Yes), a process of rewriting the determined variation pattern into a shortening variation pattern is executed (S2810). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time is not 1 second in the process of S2809 (S2809: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2603 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the variable display device unit 80 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S2603, and the command is transmitted to the variable display device unit 80. Therefore, the setting is made (S2604). In the variable display device unit 80, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variable display device unit 80 performs variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started. When the process of S2604 is finished, next, a notice selection process for setting a notice effect based on the result of determination of success or failure according to the current effect mode is executed (S2605).

  Details of the notice selection process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S2605). This advance notice selection process (S2605) is a process for setting a notice effect based on the result of determination of validity according to the current effect mode, which is executed in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 145).

  In the advance notice selection process (S2605), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2901), and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in a short time (S2902). If it is determined in the processing of S2902 that the current gaming state is in the shortest time (S2902: Yes), the result of the determination of whether or not each reserved ball is stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the value of the effect counter 223j. Based on the above, the short-time / medium-time notice effect, which is the notice effect of the short-time effect period, is selected (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2907.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2902 that the current gaming state is not in a short time (S2902: No), the result of determining whether or not each reserved ball is stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the effect counter 223j Based on the value, the normal notice effect that is the notice effect of the normal effect period is selected (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906.

  In the process of S2905, it is determined whether or not the normal notice effect selected in the process of S2904 is a notice effect of shutter rotation (S2905). In the process of S2904, if it is determined that the selected normal notice effect is a shutter turning notice effect (S2905: Yes), a shutter notice scenario is set (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2905 that the selected time notice effect is other than the notice effect of shutter rotation (S2905: No), the process of S2906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2907. To do.

  When the processing of S2903, S2905, or S2906 is completed, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2907), and this process ends. The display advance command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is variable in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display device unit 80. When the variable display device unit 80 receives the display notice command, the variable display device unit 80 displays a notice effect according to the command on the variable display device unit 80.

  Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2605 is finished, the value of the remaining short time counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S2606), and then it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2607). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S2607: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus this change display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2607: Yes), stop symbol setting processing is executed (S2608).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the stop symbol setting process (S2608), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S2213), will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol setting process (S2608). The stop symbol setting process (S2608) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80 based on the current gaming state.

  In the stop symbol setting process (S2608), first, the current gaming state is read from the gaming state storage area 223k (S3401). The game state storage area 223k is set in the process of S2508 of the state setting process (see FIG. 144). Next, in the process of S3401, it is determined whether or not the read current gaming state is running short (S3402). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not short (S3402: No), a normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3409.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 154, the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) which is one process in the stop symbol setting process (S2608) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403). The normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80 when the current gaming state is normal.

  In the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), first, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S3501). Next, the stop symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n is read (S3502). Next, based on the read stop symbol (previous stop symbol) and the current variation, a display range capable of stop display is set (S3503). Next, the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set from the display range in which stop display is possible (S3504), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 153, the description will be continued. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is in a short time (S3402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (S3404). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (S3404: Yes), a stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group C in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3405), and S3409. Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is not a winning variation (S3404: No), it is determined whether the specific remaining period flag 223h is on (S3406). If it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is on (S3406: Yes), the value (n) of the remaining short time counter 223g is read (S3407). Next, the stop symbol of the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b is made different from the value of n-1, and the stop symbol is set using the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g (S3408).

  As described above, by setting the stop symbol and the remaining short time to be different in the process of S3408, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the stop symbol and the remaining short time. Next, the set stop symbol is stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n (S3409), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, when it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is not on (S3406: No), a time-stopped symbol setting process is executed (S3410), S3409 is executed, and this process is terminated. .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 155, the short time stop symbol setting process (S3410) which is one process in the stop symbol setting process (S2608) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-short stop symbol setting process (S3410). The short stop symbol setting process (S3410) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the segment display device 600 when the current gaming state is short.

  In the time-short stop symbol setting process (S3410), first, reading of information in the winning information storage area 223a is executed (S3601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the information read in the process of S3601 (S3602). If it is determined that there is no information corresponding to the read information (S3602: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group B in the symbol group storage area 222g ( S3603).

  As described above, the symbols “2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9” are stored in the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g (see FIG. 126). When the display by the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed, all of the symbols are displayed using the light emitting area 822. In this control example, the outer reel 821 is set in the player's visual recognition area in order to show the variation result as the display mode by the 7-segment display unit 1600 during the time reduction. And the display mode in 7 segments is shown using the light emission area 822 as well. However, since the player can recognize the light-emitting area 822 even when the light-emitting area 822 does not emit light, there is a possibility that the light-emitting area 822 may be mistaken as a fluctuation result. In this control example, when a deviation variation result is shown, the player can clearly recognize the symbol by selecting a symbol that uses the light emitting area 822. In this control example, the symbols that use the light emitting area 822 are always used as the symbols that are out of place, but the symbols that indicate the previous variation result may not be used.

  If it is determined in the process of S3604 that the next change is a hit (S3604: Yes), a stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group A in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3605). ). In the symbol group A in the symbol group storage area 222g, numeric symbols “0, 1, 7” are stored (see FIG. 126). As described above, in the present control example, when the variation result of deviation is displayed in a short time, the design using the light emitting region 822 is always displayed. However, when the result of winning variation is displayed, the light emitting region is displayed. The 822 is configured not to emit light. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that the off symbol and the winning symbol can be clarified, and the player can easily recognize.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the next change is not a hit (S3604: No), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group C in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3606). End the process.

  Returning to FIG. After executing the stop symbol setting process (S2608), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2609), and based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated. The command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2610). In the variable display device unit 80, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the details of the operation control process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the operation control process (S2211). This operation control process (S2211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) described above, and executes a process for controlling the variable display device unit 80 in accordance with the current effect mode.

  In the operation control process (S2211), first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3001). If it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S3001: No), the timing is not the timing for controlling the variable display device unit 80, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3001 that the value of the scenario counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3001: Yes), the outer reel control process is executed (S3002).

  Details of the outer reel control process (S3002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2211), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the outer reel control process (S3002). This outer reel control process (S3002) executes a process for controlling the outer reel 821 in accordance with the current effect mode.

  In the outer reel control process (S3002), first, it is determined whether or not the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101). If it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101: Yes), the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S3102). Next, it is determined whether the set data is END data (S3103). If it is determined that the set data is not END data (S3103: No), motor data corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223j is set (S3104), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3103 that the set data is END data (S3104), the outer reel operation table setting area is reset (S3105), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the outer reel operation table 222c is not being set (S3101: No), it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is a value indicating the start of the operation of the outer reel unit 820. (S3106). If it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is a value indicating the start of the operation of the outer reel unit 820 (S3106: Yes), the value of the operation counter corresponding to the operation content is set (S3107), and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S3106, when it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not a value indicating the start of the outer reel operation (S3106: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to FIG. After executing the outer reel control process (S3002), the inner reel control process (S3003) for controlling the inner reel unit 810 is executed. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the inner reel control process (S3003). The inner reel control processing (S3202) is merely the processing target changed from the outer reel unit 820 to the inner reel unit 810 with respect to the above-described outer reel control processing (S3002 in FIG. 150). Omitted.

  After executing the inner reel control process (S3003), the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing details of the displacement member control process (S3004). In the displacement member control process (S3004), only the object of the process is changed to the displacement member 670 with respect to the above-described outer reel control process (FIG. 150), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. When the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed, the value of the scenario counter 223i is subtracted by 1 (S3005), and this process ends.

  In this control example, the variable display device unit 80 is configured to be controlled in the order of the outer reel unit 820, the inner reel unit 810, and the displacement member 670. However, the control order may be changed.

  In the first control example, the 7-segment display unit 1600 uses a configuration that displays a symbol (third symbol) imitating a number (0 to 9), but the 7-segment display unit 1600 (light emission of the outer reel 821). A pattern imitating an alphabet or a character may be displayed using the segment of the region 822). In this case, for example, the displacement member 670 is changed to a position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811 while the variation display is executed using the inner reel 811, and the displacement member 670 is the fourth. Each outer reel 821 is positioned in the second area (area having the light emitting area 822) while it is positioned, that is, during a period when the player cannot visually recognize (difficult) the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. In this way, when the displacement member 670 returns to the initial position (first position), a variable display effect using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed. A game in which the 7-segment display unit 1600 executes the variation display of the third symbol in the middle of the variation display effect by displaying the symbols imitating “S”, “E”, “G” from the left of the unit 1600. Change start display mode for informing the user From shows, it may be configured to perform the variable display effect using a 7-segment display unit 1600.

  As described above, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is used for explaining the contents of the effect and informing the game state in addition to the change display of the third symbol, that is, a plurality of display means (internal reels 811, By using display means that does not display the third symbol among the outer reels 821 and the 7-segment display unit 1600), it is used to notify the player of information related to the game other than the special symbol lottery result. Since the amount of information that can be notified to the player during the display effect can be increased, even if the liquid crystal display device is not used, a game that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 198. In the first control example described above, the variable display device unit 80, that is, the reel display by the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, and the segment display by the 7-segment display unit 1600 are displayed as display means for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. The pachinko machine 10 used was described. On the other hand, the second control example is different in that the third symbol display device 81 using a liquid crystal display is used as the display means for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

  Furthermore, the second control example is different from the first control example described above in that the sound output control of the pachinko machine 10 is described in detail. Specifically, in this second control example, the tempo (BPM (beat per minute)) of the fluctuation sound (BGM) output during the special symbol fluctuation display (during the third symbol fluctuation display) can be varied. The stop sound of the third symbol is made variable in accordance with the tempo of the fluctuation sound (BGM) to be reproduced.

  In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third symbol corresponding to the BGM reproduced at different tempos, the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third symbol can be made to have a sense of unity, and the production effect Can be increased.

  First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 156, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example is replaced with the variable display device unit 80 provided at the center of the game board 13 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that a third symbol display device 81 is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Second Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the second control example, the configuration of a device that receives various commands output from the sound lamp control device 113 is different from the first control example described above. Specifically, it is different in that various commands set by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output to the third symbol display device 81. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the display control apparatus 1140 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the audio lamp control device 113.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a RAM 303 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing various control programs executed by the MPU 301.

  The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input port 305 and the bus line 304. Also, the audio data designated by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type in the audio synthesis unit 306. For example, audio data corresponding to BGM is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to a stop sound is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to a warning sound is output to CN3.

  The voice synthesizer 306 is configured by a known voice synthesizer LSI that outputs the synthesized voice data input to each channel to the amplifier unit 307 as synthesized voice data. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. Accordingly, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308.

  In the second control example, the number of channels of the voice synthesizer is set in correspondence with the voice data output from the voice lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of voice data are set. (For example, jackpot game audio data, stop sound audio data) may be output through the same channel. In this case, a plurality of audio data output to the same channel may be set as audio data that cannot be generated at the same timing. With this configuration, the number of channels included in the audio output device can be reduced, so that the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

  The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which an audio file (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like is stored. When output of various audio data is instructed by the audio lamp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the audio file storage area 302a and output to a corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

  Specifically, music data (BGMA, BGMB) related to music (BGM) and stop sound data (stop sound A, stop sound B) related to a stop sound are stored in the audio file storage area 302a. In this control example, the music (BGM) can be executed at different tempos. When different tempos are set for the same music, the same music data is used. A process for changing the data reproduction speed is executed (see S9211 in FIG. 196). With this configuration, it is not necessary to store music data corresponding to each tempo, so that the storage amount of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 158, the RAM 303 includes at least a music data group storage area 303a, a music pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a music timer 303d.

  The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing an audio file (music data group) corresponding to a sound to be reproduced (BGM, stop sound, etc.). By reproducing the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b, one music is reproduced. In this music data group storage area 303a, a command (audio BGM command) output from the audio lamp control device 113 to instruct the reproduction of music or a display symbol (third symbol) stop sound is reproduced. When the command (voice stop sound command) output for instructing is received, the music data group corresponding to the music instructed by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a and stored ( (See S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 196).

  In this control example, a music data group (audio file) is stored for each type of audio to be reproduced. In other words, the audio file used when playing the BGM and the audio file used when playing the stop sound are stored separately, and the audio played for each read audio file is output. It is configured to do. Each audio file is output to a different channel.

  The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data is being reproduced from the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a. The music pointer 303b is set to “00H” when the reproduction of music is instructed (the voice BGM command is received) (see S9212 in FIG. 196). Along with this, playback of BGM audio data corresponding to the pointer value “00H” is set.

  In this control example, a plurality of pointer values are set for one music piece. For example, “A melody”, “B melody”, “Cho 1”, “Cabi 2” for one music piece. The pointer value is set corresponding to "." As a result, it is possible to easily vary the location where the reproduction of the specific music is started according to the value of the pointer set first.

  For example, when playing a music, the value of the music pointer 303b to be set first, the update order of the music pointer 303b, the variation time of the special symbol to be set, the game state being set, You may make it vary according to the lottery result of a special symbol. Thereby, in the case where the same music is played, depending on which part the music is played, or the arrangement content of the music (for example, the arrangement that shifts from “A melody” to “Cho 1”), Since the game content can be suggested to the player, the player can be interested in the sound output from the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, when a stop sound reproduction is instructed in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol (a voice stop sound command is received), a pointer value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is reproduced is set. (See S9206 in FIG. 196).

  The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by one each time reproduction of one piece of music data set in the music data group storage area 303a is completed. When the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each type of music and the pointer value is further updated, the value is updated to “00H”. That is, when the music is played to the end, the music is played again from “A melody”.

  The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. Therefore, when the music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and the reproduction of the music is set, the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be reproduced is set in the maximum value storage area 303c. Is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 196).

  The music timer 303d is a timer that times the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. In the music timer 303d, a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data is set every time reproduction of new music data is set. Note that the reproduction time of each piece of music data is defined in association with the type of music data in the music data group storage area 303a. During the reproduction of music, it is determined whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown in the figure, the music timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

  In the second control example, the number of channels of the voice synthesizer is set in correspondence with the voice data output from the voice lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of voice data are set. (For example, audio data for jackpot games and audio data for stop sounds) may be output through the same channel. In this case, a plurality of audio data output to the same channel may be set as audio data that cannot be generated at the same timing. With this configuration, the number of channels included in the audio output device can be reduced, so that the product cost can be reduced.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball wins (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140, a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. The Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a 14-inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 1140, which will be described later, for example, three symbols, upper, middle and lower. A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the display of the gaming state according to the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 159, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 159 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured to imitate numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on a rear symbol that imitates an animal.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and after the variable display ends, the big win Is configured to occur. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts in the vertical direction, and about 3/4 on the upper side is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the right-down diagonal lines and the right-up diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot movie (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball fired for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball entering the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140, In many cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the player has left the game and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the third ball corresponding to the new winning ball is entered. Symbol variation display is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been executed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. . In this control example, while the variable display based on the special symbol lottery is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the ball is in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. In the case of winning a prize, the number of balls entered is held up to four times for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the sub display area Ds. This is also shown in the small region Ds1. Based on the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of held balls whose variation display is currently held. In this control example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be held, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are set for the player. In order to easily grasp, the display mode of the first reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the display mode of the second reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed differently. It is configured to do.

  Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed. The lottery result of special symbols is shown. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display area Dm. In the small area Dm1, three 3rd symbols are displayed in a simple manner with only one of the numbers “1” to “9”. Even in the small area Dm1, a big hit is started by stopping and displaying three third symbols composed of the same numbers.

  As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example, the lottery display with the high effect of showing the lottery results of the special symbols on the five effective lines (V1 to V5) using the entire surface of the main display area Dm ( Main fluctuation display) and fluctuation display (sub fluctuation display) executed smaller than the main fluctuation display in the small area Dm1 of the main controller 110 are configured to be executed. Thereby, for example, even if the decorative movable member provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is moved to a position that covers the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is executed in the small area Dm1. The sub-variable display can surely notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol.

  In addition, for example, in the main fluctuation display, a reach state (a part of the combination of the third symbol for indicating that the jackpot has been won in the state where the fluctuation of the two symbol rows out of the three symbol rows is stopped is displayed. When the main variation display is temporarily turned off in order to largely change the aspect of the effect performed in the main display region Dm, only the sub variation display of the small region Dm1 is left. It is possible to make the player know that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner.

  In this control example, the display position of the small area Dm1 is fixed above the center position of the main display area Dm, but the position where the small area Dm1 is formed may be variable. In this case, it may be configured to be variable according to the presence or absence of the movable movable member for decoration and the effect mode executed in the main variation display. Further, the size of the small region Dm1 may be varied, or a period in which only one of the sub variation display and the main variation is executed may be provided.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the same number of first reserved symbols that imitate the face of a bird are displayed as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and the second reserved symbol that imitates an egg is the second The same number of reserved balls as the special symbol is displayed. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding holding balls, the reserved symbols are executed to enter the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the change display corresponding to the holding ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed, for example, when a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

  In this control example, the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  The display control device 1140 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Here, details of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 1140. The display control device 1140 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models with the same specifications, the display control device 1140 is made into a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 1140 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 1140 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 1140 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. Note that the number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 1140. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes long, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 180) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control apparatus 1140, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 1140. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 1140 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 is started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 180).

  Here, referring to FIG. 161, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 161 shows that the display control device 1140 turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 1140 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 1140 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. 161 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 1140 displays the display variation pattern command shown in FIG. 161 (b). As shown in FIG. 161, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and “◯” as shown in FIG. 161 (c). A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 161 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and when it is “extra special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 161 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 1140 takes the time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and a ball is detected at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 The power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 161 (b) and 161 (c) are alternately displayed. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image on the three-symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If a winning ball is detected at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 160, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 162, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 162 (b) shows the backside A corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the backside B to D corresponding to the “empty stage”. . FIG. 163 shows the rear surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 displays the corresponding back face. First, the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 163, the back image on the back E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is the 3rd pattern in the state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (a), an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (b), a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 163 (a) is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 163 (a) to (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 where all the image data corresponding to the entire rear surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is displayed. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control apparatus 1140 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, a back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 163 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 163 (a) and (b) excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 163 (a) to (b)). ) And image data corresponding to an image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or an image between FIGS. 163 (a) and 163b) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the rear surfaces B to D are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Bets can be, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back E, the images in FIGS. 163A to 163B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 163 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 163 (b) to 163 (c) and 163 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 163 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 163 (c) to (a) are displayed for normal use while the images of FIGS. 163 (a) to (b) are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images shown in FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b) and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 163 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 163 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the back B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 160) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 160, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 159 (b)) with the numbers “1” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. The As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 has started a variation effect after the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 has been entered, but the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not started immediately.

  In the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to a main symbol not numbered "1" to "9" is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “youth” and “female” are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. Thus, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 1140 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character in the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 1140 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 1140 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 1140 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, so that the display control device 1140 receives the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 1140 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 1140 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot AF. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 164) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 166) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 1140, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 1140 is limited, and there is a risk that diversification of controllable presentation images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 1140, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 165 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 165).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 165, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 166) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 165, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 1140 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 180). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 192 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 182 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 182 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 182) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 182 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 192 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 192 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, describing the contents of drawing instructions is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 182 (b) In step S6303), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 166), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Accordingly, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 1140.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 167 described later, various sprites for creating a vertical scroll display screen (vertical scroll display data group) and a horizontal scroll display screen (horizontal scroll display data group). A drawing list corresponding to the various sprites for creating a display screen (common display data) used in common with the vertical scroll display and the horizontal scroll display is created. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Here, in the drawing list of this control example, as shown in FIG. 166, the first sprite to be drawn becomes a sprite related to the vertical scroll display data group, then becomes the sprite related to the horizontal scroll display data group, and finally the common display data. It is configured to be a sprite. The rear image (the image arranged on the rearmost side of the horizontal scroll display data group) in the horizontal scroll display data group is a game of the image of the vertical scroll display data group created on the rear side of the rear image. It is set so that a person cannot visually recognize.

  Thereby, when the horizontal scroll display is performed, the vertical scroll display formed on the back side with respect to the display data related to the horizontal scroll display is not displayed. When the predetermined condition is satisfied and the player can visually recognize the vertical scroll display, the horizontal scroll display data group is executed by executing a process (transparent process) in which all the sprites of the horizontal scroll display data group are displayed transparently. In addition, the player can visually recognize the vertical scroll display formed on the rear side.

  In this way, by always drawing a plurality of variable display modes and changing the variable display mode to be displayed so that the player can visually recognize according to the presence or absence of a predetermined condition, Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, since a plurality of variable display modes are always created, for example, even if the variable display mode is changed according to the player's operation, the variable display mode can be changed smoothly. .

  Furthermore, in the present control example, as described above, the common display (for example, the holding ball symbol display) that is displayed in common is displayed both when the vertical scroll display is executed and when the horizontal scroll display is executed. Since it is formed on the foremost side, common display can be executed without being affected by other display data (regardless of whether or not the horizontal scroll display data is subjected to transparency processing).

  In this control example, the vertical scroll display data and the horizontal scroll display data are completely independent from each other to create the drawing list. However, the vertical scroll display and the horizontal scroll display are different. For sprites (for example, effects) that can be shared, the information is described only in the display data on the front side (horizontal scroll side), and when changing the scroll direction, the sprites (for example, effects are drawn) For example, the display position coordinates of (sprite) may be changed to a value corresponding to the scroll direction. Thereby, the amount of sprites in the entire drawing list can be reduced.

  As described above, in this control example, as the variable display mode for displaying the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (one liquid crystal display), the vertical scroll display and the horizontal scroll display can be set. Even if it is not determined which variation display mode is to be displayed at the time of starting the variation of the third symbol by constructing the image data for displaying each variation display mode in parallel ( For example, even when the variation display mode to be displayed is changed based on the operation contents of the player on the frame button 22 during the variation display of the third symbol), the variation display mode can be changed smoothly. In addition to this, the variable display mode can be changed smoothly by creating image data related to multiple variable display modes in parallel. It may be used that can be configured.

  Further, in the present control example, different variable display modes can be executed without changing the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, as in the first control example described above, Display area shielding means (for example, a movable combination) that covers a part of the display area of the display means (in the second control example, the third symbol display device 81) for variably displaying the symbols so that the player can hardly see the symbols. When the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific variation pattern is set), the display area of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is made variable. Alternatively, a variable display mode corresponding to the display area may be set.

  In this way, when the size of the display area for variably displaying the third symbol is varied and the variable display mode corresponding to the varied display region is set, the third symbol is displayed in the same direction. Even if the variation display mode to be varied is set corresponding to the display area, it is possible to make the player think that different variation display is being executed, so it is easier to reduce the amount of sprites in the entire drawing list Can do.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 182 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 189). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 193). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 193). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 1140 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 194).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 182 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the contents of image display in this control example will be described. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various images created based on the drawing list. As shown in FIG. 167, this control example is configured such that one display image is created by superimposing images (layers) in the type order shown in the drawing list described with reference to FIG. A common display data group (common layer group) for displaying common information such as the number of reserved balls and an error symbol is formed on the foremost side (player side). (Horizontal scroll layer group) is formed, and the vertical scroll display data group (vertical scroll layer group) is formed on the innermost side.

  Further, it is configured such that transmission processing (processing for making all color information colorless) can be performed on all images belonging to the horizontal scroll layer group. According to the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, normally, a back image formed at the innermost position of the horizontal scroll layer group is created for an image on the far side, that is, for vertical scrolling. When the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the player operates the frame button 22), the transparent process is performed on all images belonging to the horizontal scroll layer group. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the vertical scroll display that is displayed on the back side (rear side) of the horizontal scroll layer group.

  Next, the contents of the display screen during the presentation executed by the third symbol display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen using the variable display layer 1 (horizontal scroll layer group), and FIG. 168 (b) shows a variable display layer 2 (vertical scroll layer). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen using (group).

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the third symbol is normally displayed in a variable manner by horizontal scroll display, and during horizontal scroll display, as shown in FIG. 159 (a). The third symbol is variably displayed in correspondence with the lottery result of the special symbol using five effective lines (V1 to V5).

  When the player enters the reach state (so-called double reach state) on the active lines V4 and V5 during the horizontal scroll display (see FIG. 168 (a)), when the player operates the frame button 22, the switch flag 223aa Is set to ON, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the vertical scroll display shown in FIG. 168 (b). As shown in FIG. 168 (b), the vertical scroll display is configured to display only one effective line, and the main symbol imitating the numbers “2” and “3” in the horizontal scroll display. The display is switched from the double reach state to the reach state of only the number “3”.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, it is more advantageous for the player that the main symbols simulating odd numbers are a big win than the main symbols simulating even numbers are a big win. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), during horizontal scrolling display, it is difficult to know which main symbol will be a big hit, until the main symbol stops timing. However, by switching to the vertical scroll display shown in FIG. 168 (b), it is possible to notify the player that a big hit is likely to be an advantageous big hit, and a sense of security can be achieved. Can be given.

  In this way, by switching to the variable display with different scroll directions and changing the number of effective lines of the main symbol, the content of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol can be changed, and the player gets bored. It is possible to provide a game that does not come. In this control example, the scroll direction is changed to provide a different variable display mode by reducing the number of effective lines. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the scroll direction is different. By doing so, the number of effective lines may be increased. In this case, it is preferable that the reach state is established by switching to the vertical scroll display although the reach state is not performed during the normal horizontal scroll display. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to play a game with a sense of expectation for jackpot until the change display is completed.

  Further, in this control example, the method for establishing the switching condition for switching the scroll direction is defined as the player operating the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. When set, it may be configured to always switch, or the player may operate the frame button 22 so that the scroll direction does not change.

  In addition, in this control example, the display control device 1140 is configured to create both the horizontal scrolling variable display image and the vertical scrolling variable display image, so at any timing the switching condition can be changed. Even if it is established, the scroll direction can be switched immediately, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this control example, a variation pattern for horizontal scroll display and a variation pattern for vertical scroll display are set as a variation pattern for indicating a lottery result of one special symbol, and a display image is formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a main symbol indicating a big hit is stopped on one scroll display, the main symbol indicating a big hit is stopped on the one scroll display. The screen may be continuously displayed, and the effect image during the big hit game may be displayed on the other scroll display side. With this configuration, the current jackpot symbol can be easily confirmed by operating the frame button 22 and switching the display screen at any timing during the jackpot game.

  In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, a variable display for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed in one scroll display, and the other scroll You may comprise so that the fluctuation display for showing the lottery result of a 2nd special symbol by display may be performed.

  In this control example, when the display screen showing the variable display is switched, the configuration in which the variable direction of the third symbol is switched is used. However, if the variable display mode for showing the result of the jackpot lottery to the player is different, If it is a configuration to be notified, it is not limited to the configuration of the present control example, for example, a variable display for displaying a jackpot lottery result in a combination of three symbols on one display screen is executed, On the other display screen, it may be configured to show a lottery result with only one symbol stop display mode. On one display screen, a variable display mode imitating a reel is executed. On the other display screen, You may comprise so that the fluctuation | variation display mode imitating 7 segments may be performed.

  Further, in this control example, a configuration in which two display screens can be displayed in one liquid crystal display device is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two liquid crystal display devices are arranged in an overlapping manner, You may comprise so that it may switch to a different fluctuation | variation display mode by operating a device variably.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the aspect of the fixed stop sound of the special symbol in the second control example will be described. As will be described later, in the second control example, two types of BGMA and BGMB are set as BGM output during a period in which the special symbol is changed. In the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the sound effect counter 223ab described later is the timing at which the special symbol starts to fluctuate (the timing at which the fluctuation pattern command is output from the main control device 110 and received by the sound lamp control device 113). Is acquired, and the type of BGM is determined based on the acquired value and the lottery result (winning or losing) of the special symbol. The BGM type is determined not only for the BGM contents (BGMA, BGMB) but also for the BGM tempo.

  In this embodiment, even if it is the same BGM, it is possible to make the player feel as if various BGMs are being output by changing the output tempo, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game. . Further, by varying the BGM tempo, even if the variation display (dynamic display) is performed with the same variation pattern, different variation patterns are executed depending on the BGM tempo that is output in accordance with the variation display. It can be made to think, and it can be made to feel various variations of special symbols.

  Here, the variation of the special symbol is mainly in the order determined in advance by the variation pattern after the symbol is scrolled at a high speed after the variation display (scroll display) of all the symbol sequences is started. Each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed after the high-speed scroll state is changed to the low-speed scroll display state. Specifically, in the example configured with three symbol rows, the left symbol row is changed to the low-speed scroll state from the state where the left, middle, and right symbol rows are scrolled at high speed, and then the right symbol row is displayed. After the low-speed scroll state is reached in the order of the row and the middle symbol row, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed, the right symbol row is stopped and the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed. After that, after the stopped left, middle, and right symbols are in a state of fluctuation fluctuation indicating that they are temporarily stopped (a state in which fluctuation is displayed slightly in a predetermined cycle up and down), the fluctuation period has passed, Based on the reception of the confirmation command output from the control device 110, the confirmation stop display (static display) is performed.

  Here, at the timing when each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state from the scroll display state, a sound effect of a symbol stop sound (for example, Dern) is output to notify the player that the symbol is stopped and displayed. It is output separately from BGM. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the symbol has been stopped in an easy-to-understand manner, and to the player what kind of determination result the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol row will be. It can be expected.

  However, as in this control example, by using various BGMs or changing the tempo of the BGM, the output state, tempo, and stop sound of the symbol are output at the BGM symbol stop timing that was output. May not match as music, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Specifically, even though the BGM was a fast tempo, by outputting a design stop sound with a slow tempo, the BGM and the stop sound did not match, giving a sense of incongruity as a special design variation effect, There may be a problem that the BGM that has been output at the timing when the symbol stops stops and becomes a poorly cut BGM. In this control example, the special symbol variation period (variation pattern variation period) is variously set, but the output BGM repeatedly outputs music (songs or phrases) shorter than that period. The music is output in a necessary output period. By being configured in this way, at the stop timing of the symbol, the output BGM does not necessarily have a good timing, and the player is likely to feel uncomfortable.

  Here, in this control example, the type of the stop sound to be output is changed and set according to the tempo and type of the BGM that is output, and is output. As a result, it is possible to output a symbol stop sound that matches the tempo and type of the BGM, thereby reducing the sense of discomfort given to the player at the symbol stop timing.

  Referring to FIG. 169, an example in which BGMA tempo 120 (BPM 120) is selected and tempo 80 (BPM 80) is selected as output BGM when variation pattern A (12 seconds) is executed. The stop sounds that are output will be described in comparison with each other. In the variation pattern A, the left symbol sequence is stopped 8 seconds after the start of variation, the right symbol sequence is stopped 10 seconds later, and the middle symbol sequence is stopped and displayed 12 seconds later.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the BGMA (tempo 120) is composed of a BGM in which four quarter notes are played in one measure 2 seconds, and is controlled so that one measure is repeatedly output. In BGMA (tempo 120), one quarter note is output every 0.5 seconds (one quarter note is played every 0.5 seconds). In BGMA (tempo 120), the stop sound A is set to be output as the stop sound. The stop sound A is configured such that an eighth note stop sound is output at the tempo 120 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the stop sound B is composed of a sound “Duck, Duck”, and is configured to be output in total for about 0.5 seconds. Here, in BGMA (tempo 120), as shown in FIGS. 169 (a) to (b), at the timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the output of the quarter note indicated by α1 is actually started. However, since it is the output timing of the stop sound, the stop sound A is output without outputting the sound. In this way, in practice, BGMA (tempo 120) stops the output of BGM at the timing when the sound corresponding to the quarter note is output. At that timing, the output of the eighth note of stop sound A is output. Therefore, the player can feel that the stop sound A is output in accordance with the timing at which the sound is actually output, thereby reducing a sense of incongruity. Similarly, at the right symbol sequence stop timing of 10 seconds from the start of variation, stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α2 is output by BGM, and the middle symbol sequence stop timing of 12 seconds from the start of variation. Then, the stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α3 is output.

  In this way, with BGMA (tempo 120), a short one-measure music of 2 seconds is repeatedly output, so that the player learns the music pattern early and is conscious of the type of sound to be output next. However, at the symbol stop timing, the stop sound A is output in synchronization with the sound output timing set in the BGM, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the BGM is deteriorated. In addition, after the stop sound A is output at the stop timing of the left symbol and the right symbol, the output of the BGM is output as the time elapses. Specifically, even when the symbol is stopped, the BGM playback process is continued, and the BGM output channel is set to mute during the stop sound output period.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (c), in the BGMA (tempo 80), the same content of one measure as that of the BGMA (tempo 120) is output in 3 seconds. At the stop timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation, in BGMA (tempo 80), it is not the timing at which a new note is output, but the timing at which the previously set note is continued. In the background music of BGMA (tempo 80), the time corresponding to the new note (β1) is actually output after 8.25 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Here, in BGMA (tempo 80), as shown in FIG. 169 (c), a stop sound B composed of triplets is output based on the left symbol stop timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Has been. Since this stop sound B is output at tempo 80, a new note sound is output after 0.25 seconds, and a sound corresponding to a new note is output after 0.25 seconds. By being configured in this way, the sound corresponding to the note in the stop sound B at the output timing corresponding to the note of β1 that should have been output 8.25 seconds after the start of fluctuation in BGMA (tempo 80) ( The second note of the triplet is executed, so even if the sound that should have been output at BGMA (tempo 80) is not output by the output of the stop sound B, the stop sound B will be output at that timing. Since the sound is output, the uncomfortable feeling that the player feels can be suppressed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), in the stop sound B output at the stop timing of the right symbol sequence 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the timing at which the sound of the stop sound B is output (the third in the triplet). ) Is output at the same time as the output timing of the sound corresponding to the note β2 output 10.5 seconds after the start of fluctuation of BGMA (tempo 80). Can be combined with the player, and the player's uncomfortable feeling can be suppressed. Furthermore, at the stop timing of the middle symbol sequence 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the note output timing in BGMA (tempo 80) coincides with the output timing of stop sound B, so that it is uncomfortable that a stop sound is output. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, even when the BGM tempo is changed and output, the stop sound that matches the tempo change is selected and output, so that the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match can be suppressed. In addition, even when the BGM tempo is flexibly changed by lottery or the like, the stop sound is set to the reference tempo by converting the stop sound according to the tempo change and outputting it. Then, it can be configured to output a stop sound that is easily matched.

  Further, in this control example, since the lottery ratio of the BGM selected based on the lottery result is set to be variable, a BGM having a tempo that can be easily selected when winning is output, thereby determining whether the player is successful or not. It can be expected early that the result is a win.

  Next, referring to FIG. 170, the output contents of various sounds for variation pattern B (18-second variation) in which a variation time different from variation pattern A (12-second variation) described above with reference to FIG. 169 is set. Explain. 170 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the fluctuation pattern B (18-second fluctuation). FIG. 170 (b) shows each case where BGMA is reproduced for the fluctuation pattern B. FIG. FIG. 170 (c) is a timing chart schematically showing the output timing of each sound when BGMB is reproduced with respect to the variation pattern B. FIG. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (b), when the variation pattern B having a variation time of 18 seconds is set, the stop timing of each symbol row is set at a timing different from the variation pattern A having a variation time of 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 170 (a), the left symbol row stops after 14 seconds from the start of change, the right symbol row stops after 16 seconds from the start of change, and the middle symbol row stops after 18 seconds from the start of change. Is set to The stop timing of each symbol row is set corresponding to each variation when the variation time is different, or when the effect mode to be executed is different even in the same variation time, The stop timing shown in FIG. 170 (a) is merely an example. Further, the order in which the symbol sequences are stopped and the interval at which each symbol sequence is stopped are also set according to the effect mode to be executed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be stopped simultaneously, It may be configured to stop based on the fact that the person has operated the operating means (frame button 22).

  According to the example shown in FIG. 170 (b), the timing at which each symbol sequence stops differs from the example shown in FIG. 169 (b), but as in the example shown in FIG. 169 (b), A stop sound A (an eighth note with consecutive digits) can be output (reproduced) in accordance with the stop timing of each symbol row.

  Thus, by setting the type and tempo of the stop sound that is output (played back) in accordance with the stop timing of the symbol sequence, based on the content (rhythm) of the BGM to be played back and the playback speed (tempo), Because it is possible to play a stop sound that matches both the timing at which the BGM is played and the stop timing of the symbol sequence, it is possible to produce a video and sound with a sense of unity for the player. Can be provided, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), the type of stop sound is determined in accordance with the content (rhythm) of the BGM to be played back, and then the tempo of the stop sound is varied, thereby allowing the stop sound to be changed. The reproduction timing (timing to beat a beat) may be configured to match both the timing to beat a beat in the BGM being played and the stop timing of the symbol sequence.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), when the timing when the BGM beats and the timing when the stop sound beats completely match, both sounds may be output. In this case, only when it is determined that a slight deviation has occurred between the timing when the BGM beats and the timing when the stop sound beats, the mute processing for muting the BGM sound is executed. What is necessary is just to comprise. As a result, the emphasized sound can be output without impairing the rhythm of the sound being played back, only when the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats completely match, The fact that the symbol has stopped can be emphasized and notified.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), the BGMB is configured so as to repeatedly reproduce a rhythm using a triplet of eighth notes instead of quarter notes with respect to BGMA. As a stop sound (stop sound B) corresponding to, a stop sound composed of one triplet (note that a quarter note outputs a sound (one beat) divided into three equal parts and beats three times) Is set.

  Then, the stop sound B is reproduced at the timing when the left symbol sequence stops (after 14 seconds from the start of fluctuation), and the beats β1 and β2 of the BGMB overlapping the stop sound B (γ1, γ2) are set to mute. To do. Note that, according to the example shown in FIG. 170 (b), it is determined that the output timings of the beat following the beat β2 of the BGM and the beat following the beat γ2 of the stop sound B completely match. The sound is output (emphasized output) for any beat. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player that the left symbol row has stopped in accordance with the tempo of the BGMB.

  Similarly, at the timing when the right symbol sequence stops (16 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the beats β3 and β4 of the BGMB overlapping the beats γ3 and γ4 of the stop sound B are set to mute, and the beats between them are set. Emphasize output. Finally, when the middle symbol sequence is stopped and displayed (when the variable display period ends), the BGM playback ends at the timing when the variable display period ends, but is set according to the type of BGM. Since the output of the stop sound B (triplet) is output after the end of the variable display period, that is, over the fixed period, it seems that BGM is being reproduced even after the end of the variable display period. Can be made.

  In this control example, the BGM reproduction is started based on the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the BGM reproduction is terminated at the variation stop timing (determined period arrival timing). As a result, the BGM playback position at the special symbol variation start timing can be made constant at all times. Therefore, at the special symbol variation start timing, the stop timing of each symbol sequence and the type of BGM being executed can be easily determined. The processing for setting the stop sound can be simplified, but as a configuration other than this, a configuration in which a specific BGM is always played back in a loop regardless of the fluctuation state of the special symbol is used. May be. In this case, means for determining the stop timing of each symbol sequence corresponding to the variation pattern set this time at the variation start timing of the special symbol, and means for determining the reproduction position of the BGM being reproduced at the start of variation of the special symbol And determining the type of stop sound after determining the BGM playback status near the stop timing of each symbol row.

  Further, the BGM type may be changed during the change of the special symbol, or the BGM tempo may be changed. In this case, the timing of setting the type of stop sound is not the time of starting the change of the special symbol, but a predetermined time when the stop timing of each symbol row arrives (BGM cannot be changed again until the stop timing comes) The process of determining the type and tempo of the BGM being played back may be executed before the period of time. Thereby, it can respond smoothly also to BGM which changed suddenly.

  Further, for example, when the reserved ball number determining means for determining the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the determination result of the determining means determine that the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more), In a pachinko machine configured so that a variation pattern in which a variation time is set shorter than when it is determined that the number is less than a predetermined number is set, the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced is varied according to the number of reserved balls, specifically May be configured such that a fast BGM is easily set when the number of reserved balls is large.

  Further, in this control example, the type of stop sound output in response to the stop timing of the third symbol is selected from predetermined data defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, BGM discrimination means for discriminating the tempo and rhythm of the BGM to be played back may be provided, and a stop sound may be generated according to the discrimination result of the BGM discrimination means. In this case, for example, the beat set as the stop sound is set according to the rhythm of the BGM (for example, the stop sound of 2 beats, the stop sound of 3 beats), and the playback of the stop sound set according to the tempo of the BGM is performed. A process for setting the speed may be executed. In addition, the stop sound output period may be varied according to the determination result of the BGM determination means.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when the stop sound and BGM overlap at the stop timing of the third symbol, the stop sound is output with priority over BGM. For example, a determination unit for determining whether or not the current special symbol lottery is determined and a variable unit for changing the setting of the sound output when the determination result of the determination unit is a big hit are provided. When the sound output setting is varied by the variable means, the BGM may be output with priority over the stop sound. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the stop sound from being output at the timing at which the stop sound is always output, that is, at the stop timing of the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with an uncomfortable feeling different from normal.

  In this control example, in order to output only one sound when the stop sound and BGM overlap, a process for muting the other sound is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to synthesize and output overlapping voices, and in this case, it is preferable to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not to synthesize overlapping voices according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol depending on whether or not the overlapping voice is synthesized.

  In addition, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a time counting means (for example, RTC) having a backup power source capable of continuously counting the current time is provided, and the time counting means provides a predetermined time (for example, noon ) Is timed, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with the time effect execution means capable of executing the specific time effect, one stop sound is selected from the stop sound group corresponding to the BGM reproduced during the time effect. It may be configured to be able to set. In this case, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured so that when the plurality of pachinko machines 10 having the same specification are installed side by side, the stop sounds set from the same stop sound group are different between the adjacent pachinko machines 10. You may comprise so that the stop sound set according to a number may differ.

  By configuring in this way, the same BGM can be reproduced simultaneously with respect to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by the time effect, and further, corresponding to the same BGM and different modes (for example, scale, rhythm, Since the stop sound of the tempo and the period) can be reproduced by the adjacent pachinko machine 10, it is possible to execute a sound effect full of realism that is difficult to realize with a single pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the varying time (variation pattern) of a different length is set according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol, the third symbol is displayed until the first predetermined period has elapsed. When each fluctuation pattern is configured to execute high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation that cannot stop and display the 3rd symbol), and then execute low-speed fluctuation of the 3rd symbol (low-speed fluctuation that can stop and display the 3rd symbol) The above-described stop sound and BGM processing is executed after the fluctuation pattern is set so that the low-speed fluctuation period is constant regardless of the set fluctuation time length. You may do it. In this case, it is preferable to determine the BGM for low speed fluctuation at the timing of switching from the high speed fluctuation to the low speed fluctuation, and to determine the type of stop sound based on the determined BGM.

  By configuring in this way, even when a variation pattern having a plurality of different variation times can be set, the stop timing of the third symbol can be shared, so that the stop sound and BGM are set. Processing can be simplified.

  In the present control example, processing for BGM and stop sound is described as a plurality of sounds output from the pachinko machine 10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and output timing and output of other sounds The aspect may be adjustable. Specifically, the type of sound (operation sound) that is output when the frame button 22 is operated can be varied according to the type of BGM being played back, or matched to the beat timing of the BGM being played back. The operation sound output timing may be adjusted, or the abnormal sound for notifying the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a beat of the abnormal sound at a timing different from the beat of the sound being reproduced. It may be configured as described above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the abnormal sound from being absorbed by the BGM beat being played back by the pachinko machine 10 and missing the abnormal sound being output.

<Electric Configuration of Main Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described. The second control example is different from the first control example described above in that a variation pattern 2 table 202aa is used instead of the variation pattern table 202d, and the other configurations are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the variation pattern 2 table 202aa is provided with a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 for the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) of the first control example described above. Is different. This off-set (probability change) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 selects a variation pattern when a special variation of the special symbol is a short variation as a gaming state, a short-time state, and the special symbol lottery result is out of play. This is a data table that is referred to at the time and that defines a variation pattern of different variation times based on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 and the determined stop type.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 172 (b), the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 will be described. FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1. As shown in FIG. 172 (b), when the stop type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is “completely out” and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 190”, “Short deviation (12 seconds)” is selected, and if it is in the range of “191 to 198”, “Extraction (18 seconds)” is selected. When the stop type is “reach” and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 190”, “normal reach (30 seconds)” is selected and “191 to 197”. Is selected such that “various types of super reach (60 seconds)” is selected, and in the case of “198”, “various types of special reach (90 seconds)” is selected.

  Here, when “short off (12 seconds)” or “out (18 seconds)” is selected, the BGM and stop sound setting processing described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170 is executed. . In addition, in FIG. 169 and FIG. 170 described above, the setting process of the BGM and the stop sound when the special symbol lottery result is out of the description has been described as an example, but in the case where other variation patterns are set The same setting process is executed for.

  When various variation patterns are selected with reference to the deviation (probability variation) variation table 2 table 202aa1, variation pattern commands for indicating the variation patterns are set, and output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands. Is done. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets an effect mode to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the received variation pattern command.

<Electric Configuration of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 173 and FIG. 174, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the target (device) for executing the variable display of the third symbol on which the sound lamp control device 113 performs operation control is different from the first control example described above. Specifically, in the first control example described above, the third symbol is variably displayed using the variable display device unit 80, whereas in the second control example, the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the third symbol. The difference is that the three symbols are variably displayed.

  Here, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 173 (a). FIG. 173 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the ROM 222 of the second control example is different from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above in that the outer reel operation table 222c, the inner reel operation table 222d, the symbol operation table 222e, and the special effects. The scenario table 222f and the symbol group storage area 222g are deleted, and the BGM type selection table 222aa and the stop sound selection table 222ab are added. Furthermore, it is different in that the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a are associated with various types of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that the specific contents (contents indicating the production mode) defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a are the same as those of a well-known game machine using a liquid crystal display device, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The BGM type selection table 222aa is a data table for selecting a BGM to be played back during the variation display of the third symbol executed in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol. Here, the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in this control example, different BGM types (BGMA, BGMB) based on the lottery result of special symbols (result of determination of success / failure) and the value of the acquired audio effect counter 223ab, and Different tempos (BPM 80, BPM 120) are selected.

  Specifically, when the determination result is “winning (big hit)” and the value of the sound effect counter 223ab is in the range of “0 to 69”, “BGMA (BPM120)” is selected as the BGM. When the range is “70 to 89”, “BGMA (BPM80)” is selected. When the range is “90 to 99”, “BGMB (BPM120)” is selected. doing.

  When the determination result is “out” and the value of the audio effect counter 223ab is in the range of “0 to 89”, “BGMA (BPM80)” is selected and the range of “90 to 99” is selected. In this case, “BGMA (BPM 120)” is selected.

  That is, in the second control example, the BGM type and the tempo that are reproduced during the variable display are varied according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, BGM (BGMB (BPM 120)) that is selected only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, or BGM (BGMA) that is more easily selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. (BPM120)) is provided. This configuration allows the player to predict the lottery result of this special symbol based on the BGM that is played back during the special symbol variation display (during the third symbol variation display). It is possible to give interest to the voice output from the voice output device 226 as well as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the person.

  Further, in this control example, a BGM with a faster tempo is more easily selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Thereby, the feeling of exaltation with respect to a player can be heightened. Although not described in detail, in this control example, the remaining period in the short-time state is determined as an element for selecting the BGM, and the selection ratio of the BGM type is varied based on the determination result. Specifically, when it is determined that the remaining time in the short-time state (short remaining time) is 10 or more, the BGM having a slow tempo is easily selected, and the remaining time in the short-time state (short remaining time) ) Is less than 10 times, a BGM with a fast tempo is easily selected. Thereby, it can be heard by voice that the time-short state is approaching, which is a game state advantageous to the player. In addition, by changing the selection ratio of the BGM type according to the remaining short number of times, for example, when a BGM with a fast tempo is selected in a state where a large number of remaining short times remain, this special symbol lottery is a big hit Then, you can give the player a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since a common process can be executed between the BGM tempo selected in accordance with the short remaining time and the BGM tempo selected in accordance with the special symbol lottery result, the process of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. The load can be reduced.

  In this control example, the BGM type and playback speed (tempo) are selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the remaining time in the short-time state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a table for selecting the type of BGM and a table for selecting the tempo of BGM may be different, and any element may be selected from each table according to different conditions. As a result, the BGM to be played back is determined by combining the elements selected from each table, so that the BGM can be diversified. In this case, it is preferable that the BGM type can be selected using an operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, and the BGM tempo can be variably selected depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. .

  Also, in this control example, the BGM tempo is more likely to be faster if the jackpot is won, but it is sufficient that the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol according to the BGM tempo. The BGM with a slow tempo may be easily reproduced. Further, in this control example, a specific tempo is selected as the tempo of the BGM to be played back. However, the tempo may be changed during playback of the BGM. In this case, for example, the BGM is played at a common tempo until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the BGM is played, and thereafter the BGM is played according to the selected BGM playback speed. It is good to constitute so that. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the lottery result unpredictable by voice immediately after the special symbol variation is started, so that the player is interested in various effects during the special symbol variation. Can do.

  Furthermore, information for indicating the type of BGM currently being executed and the playback speed (tempo) may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to visually recognize the information related to the voice that is currently being reproduced, so that a game that is easier to understand can be provided.

  The stop sound selection table 222ab is a data table for selecting the type of sound (stop sound) to be reproduced in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the type of stop sound is made different according to the type and reproduction speed of BGM reproduced during the special symbol variation or the variation pattern set. Thereby, the stop sound corresponding to both the fluctuating display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the BGM output from the audio output device 226 can be reproduced. And voice production can be enhanced.

  Here, the contents of the stop sound selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), in this control example, different stop sounds are generated depending on the BGM type selected using the BGM type selection table 222aa and the variation pattern (design stop timing) set this time. It is configured to be selected.

  Specifically, when the BGM type is “BGMA (BPM120)”, the symbol stop timing is stopped at both timing A (see FIG. 169 (a)) and timing B (see FIG. 170 (a)). When note A (an eighth note with consecutive digits) is selected (see FIG. 169 (b)) and is “BGMA (BPM80)”, the symbol stop timing is timing A (see FIG. 169 (a)), and timing B In any of the cases (see FIG. 170 (a)), when the stop sound B (triplet) is selected (see FIG. 169 (c)) and is “BGMB (BPM120)”, the symbol stop timing is the timing A. The stop sound B (triplet) is selected at any of timing (see FIG. 169 (a)) and timing B (see FIG. 170 (a)).

  Returning to FIG. 173 (b), the description will be continued. FIG. 173 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The RAM 223 of the second control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example described above in that a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, a returning flag 223l, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stopped symbol storage area 223n, an outer reel The difference is that the operation counter 223p and the inner reel operation counter 223q are deleted, and a switching flag 223aa and an audio effect counter 223ab are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The switching flag 223aa is a flag for indicating that a switching condition for switching the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and is set to ON when the switching condition is satisfied. Specifically, in this control example, when the gaming state is waiting, by operating the frame button 22, the scroll mode of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. When the switching condition is established based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the standby state (when the frame button operation for changing the scroll mode is executed), it is turned on. When the change flag command of special symbol variation is received in the state where the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, that is, when a new special symbol variation is executed, a switching command for switching the scroll mode Is set.

  As described above, in this control example, when an operation for changing the scroll mode is performed while waiting in the gaming state, a change display in which the scroll mode is changed from a special symbol change to be executed thereafter is executed. It is composed. In this control example, the scroll mode is configured to change even when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a specific variation display (when the player operates the frame button 22). Since the scroll mode is changed immediately after the frame button 22 is operated, the switching flag 223aa is not turned on.

  It should be noted that there is provided a clocking means for clocking the elapsed time since the switching flag 223aa is set, and when the clocking means clocks the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), the switching flag 223aa May be configured to be set to off. Thus, even if a player who has played a game before has stopped the game by performing an operation to turn on the switching flag 223aa when stopping the game, the next player can change in a scrolling manner. The situation where a game is performed can be suppressed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the information for showing the scroll aspect currently set may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in standby.

  The audio effect counter 223ab is a counter used when selecting the BGM type in the audio lamp control device 113, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the audio lamp control device 113. (Not shown).

  Next, contents defined in the ROM 302 and the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 175 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 302 of the audio output device 226, and FIG. 175 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226. It is.

  The contents of the audio file storage area 302a defined in the ROM 302, the music data group storage area 303a, the music pointer 303b, the maximum value storage area 303c, and the music timer 303d defined in the RAM 303 are as follows. Since it was mentioned above with reference to FIG. 158, it abbreviate | omits.

  The confirmation flag 303e is a flag for indicating that the command for indicating that the special symbol is confirmed and displayed from the sound lamp control device 113, and is a command for indicating that the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is set to ON (see S9217 in FIG. 196). Then, in the sound setting process (see S9002 in FIG. 198), it is referred to at the end timing of the music data being played back (S9403 in FIG. 198), and when set to ON (S9403: Yes in FIG. 198). Then, it is determined as normal and set to OFF (S9404 in FIG. 198). On the other hand, if it is set to OFF in the process of S9403, the process of configuring the music pointer value to 00H is executed again (see S9405 in FIG. 198).

  In other words, in this control example, music data is set in advance according to the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol is confirmed and displayed at the reproduction end timing of the music data, that is, at the end time of the fluctuation time. If the confirmation command indicating that the confirmation command has been received and it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received, that is, the special symbol variation has not ended even though a predetermined variation time has elapsed. When it is determined, the music is loop-played. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where only the reproduction of the music ends first when the variation of the special symbol does not end due to a malfunction, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. .

<Control Process Performed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, the control of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179. In addition, the point changed with respect to the 1st control example is demonstrated and illustration and the description are abbreviate | omitted about the same control.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S2263), the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 145: S2603) is changed to the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), compared to the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 145: S2213) in the first control example. It is different in that a voice setting process (S2651) is added. Since other processes are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 177, the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S2653) which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S2263) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of this variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653).

  In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), if the details of the variation pattern are determined based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 and the switching flag 223aa is set to ON (from vertical scroll to horizontal Timing for switching from scrolling or horizontal scrolling to vertical scrolling) Processing for outputting a command necessary for the switching setting is executed.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223j and the extracted variation pattern type (variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command). ), The variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern 2 table 202aa (S2751). Thereafter, it is determined whether the switching flag 223aa is on. If the switching flag 223aa is on (S2752: Yes), a display switching command and a voice switching command are set (S2753). If the current setting is vertical scrolling, a display switching command and a voice switching command for instructing to change to horizontal scrolling are set. On the other hand, if the current setting is horizontal scrolling, a display switching command and a voice switching command for instructing to change to vertical scrolling are set. If it is determined in the process of S2752 that the switching flag 223aa is off (S2752: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the voice setting process (S2651), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (S2263), will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the voice setting process (S2651). In this voice setting process (S2651), the type of BGM to be output during the change of the special symbol is determined, and the process of determining the stop sound type of the special symbol is executed based on the determined type of BGM.

  In the sound setting process (FIG. 178: S2651), the value of the sound effect counter 223ab is acquired (S3701). A BGM type is determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa (see FIG. 174 (a)) based on the acquired value of the voice effect counter 223ab and the result of the determination (a determination result of the special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command). S3702). A voice BGM command corresponding to the selected BGM type is set (S3703). The stop timing of each symbol row is extracted (analyzed) from the current variation pattern (S3704). Based on the determined BGM stop type and each symbol sequence stop timing, the stop sound type is determined from the stop sound selection table 222ab (see FIG. 174 (b)) (S3705). A voice stop sound type command corresponding to the determined stop sound type is set (S3706). A voice command necessary for other effects is set (S3707), and this process is terminated.

  Thus, since the BGM type is determined based on the determination result, it is possible to predict the determination result at an early stage based on the output BGM, and to have an expectation for winning.

  In this control example, the BGM type of the special symbol that varies based on the determination result is determined by lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of stage (background) data on which the variation of the special symbol is executed is obtained. It may be configured that the background is determined by lottery and the BGM corresponding to the background is selected. In such a configuration, for example, a morning background and a night background are set, a BGM with a fast tempo is output in the morning background, and a BGM with a slow tempo is output in the night background. With this configuration, it is possible to output a BGM having an impression that matches the background even with the same BGM.

  In this control example, the same BGM is set at different tempos. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different BGMs are output at different tempos, and a stop sound that matches the tempo is set. You may comprise as follows. Further, a plurality of BGMs are set and switched and output during one fluctuation so that a stop sound is selected and output in accordance with the tempo of the BGM output at the stop timing of the symbol. It may be configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2257) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2257). In this frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S2257), the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the frame button 22 is operated (waiting (waiting)) or executing a specific production (reach display mode of W reach) Middle)), a process for switching and setting the setting for switching between vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling is executed.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (FIG. 179: S2257), first, it is determined whether an operation on the frame button 22 has been detected (whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed)) (S3801). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3801: Yes), it is determined whether the state of the pachinko machine 10 is waiting (standby) (S3802). If it is determined that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is waiting (S3802: Yes), the switching flag 223aa is set to ON (S3803), and this process is terminated.

  Here, when the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, the setting of vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling is switched and changed when a special symbol change is newly started from the standby state. Thereby, when a player plays a game, it is possible to play the game in a scroll direction that matches the player's preference.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3802 that the user is not waiting (S3802: No), it is determined whether the specific effect is being executed (S3804). Here, the specific effect indicates an effect period in which a special symbol is displayed in a W reach display mode in a variation pattern that becomes W reach. The specific effect is not limited to W reach but may be another effect.

  In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (S3804: Yes), if the current setting is vertical scrolling, a display switching command for instructing to change to horizontal scrolling The voice switching command is set (S3805). On the other hand, if the current setting is horizontal scrolling, a display switching command and a voice switching command for instructing to change to vertical scrolling are set. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (S3804: No), other frame button processing is executed (S3705), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3801: No), this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device 1140 in Second Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 180, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 1140 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 1140 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes long, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. Therefore, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first flash memory in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 1140 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a low read speed particularly when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 1140 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. A predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 180). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 181, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 180. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 192 (a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7502 in FIG. 192 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 182 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 182 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 1140 takes the time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  Further, in the display control device 1140 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display image setting process (S6351) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187.

  In the display image setting process (S6351), when a switching command is received by the command determination process (S6302), a process for transmitting the image information of the variable display layer 1 is executed. Details of the display image setting process (S6351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the display image setting process (S6351), the display setting process (S6303) is then executed. In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a back image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the back image after change is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 166 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 1140 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, it corresponds to the stop type (big hit A to F, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command. The stop type table and the stop type counter to be compared are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140, will be described. First, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 183, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S6451). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S6451: Yes), the invalid flag 233k is set to ON (S6452), and the process returns to S6401.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (S6451: No), it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Also, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table ends. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 184 (b), details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described. FIG. 184 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of big hits A to F, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete release) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned on. (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a command opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 185 (a), details of the opening command process (S6411) will be described. FIG. 185 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (b). FIG. 185 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 187 (a), details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 187 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .

  Also, in the task processing (S6304), if it is specified that either the back A or B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7102 From this, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. If it is determined in step S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If this is the case (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and processing returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 187 (b), details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described. FIG. 187 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined, and the error Processing is executed so that a warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the process of S7202. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 183. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 184 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 184 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188, details of the display image setting process (S6351) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140, will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing this display image setting processing (S6351).

  In the display image setting process (S6351), first, it is determined whether or not an invalid flag (not shown) is set to ON (S7151). This invalid flag is set to ON in the process of S6452 when it is determined in the command determination process (S6302) that the display switching command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. If it is determined in the process of S7151 that the invalid flag is set to ON (S7151: Yes), the image information of the horizontal scroll display data among the variable display data set in the display data table buffer. Is rewritten to transparent information (S7152), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the invalid flag is off (S7151: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191, the details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140, will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 189, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 189. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. Time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404). Next, the process proceeds to S7405.

  In the process of S7405, the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S7505, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 189, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S7206 together with the warning image developed previously, and for each sprite, Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 1140, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and thus a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, a display data table for demonstration is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S 6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140, will be described. First, FIG. 192 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140, will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). FIG. 192 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 182 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 182 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) (see S7501: No in FIG. 192 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 1140 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 1140. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192 (a) and S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (see FIG. 189, S6303) executed earlier. The information described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 1140 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed previously, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 194, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 1140, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 166) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of the sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. To send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 182 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Output Device 226 in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198. In the second control example, the voice command set by the voice lamp control device 113 is output to the voice output device 226 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2202 in FIG. 141). Is configured to output voice data corresponding to the received voice command.

  In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 that can receive a command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, various display commands to be output to the display control device 1140, and voice By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of effect modes (effect display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (Visual display mode) and production audio mode (auditory audio mode) output from the speaker via the audio output device 226 can be set in a unified manner. Therefore, when a plurality of effect modes are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect.

  In this control example, the visual display mode and the audio sound mode described above are used as a plurality of performance modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, what is necessary is just to perform the effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory performance mode for stimulating the player's olfaction is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the special symbol lottery result. In this way, by configuring a plurality of types of effect modes as appropriate so as to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes that are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process.

  When the main process of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process that performs a process according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S9001). Details of the command determination process (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 196. When various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 are received, the command determination process (S9001) is made to correspond to the received voice commands. A process for outputting the sound is executed. After the processing of S9001, voice setting processing for executing playback of the voice data and updating of the value of the music pointer is executed (S9002). Details of the voice setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 303 (S9003). If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S9005), and the power interruption processing is executed (S9006). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S9007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to S9001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes.

  Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interruption process (see FIG. 195 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process to be described later, and a process according to the read command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a command determination process (S9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 195 (a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process (S9001). In this command determination process (S9001), control according to the types of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  In the command determination process (S9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (S9201: No), the command The determination process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S9202), and then the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area For all the commands, the command type is analyzed (S9203).

  Then, in the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice stop sound command that outputs a voice (stop on) at the timing of stopping each third symbol (S9204), and the voice stop is performed. If it is determined that there is a sound command (S9204: Yes), the sound file (stop sound data group) corresponding to the stop sound notified by the command is read from the sound file storage area 302a of the ROM 302 and read. The audio file (stop sound data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, a value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is reproduced is set as the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the stop sound data is set in the music timer 303d (S9206).

  When the processing of S9206 is completed, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the current music data group storage area 303a is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207). The reproduction of stop sound data is set to CN (channel) 2 of the unit 306 (S9208), and the process proceeds to S9209.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9204, when it is determined that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include the voice stop sound command (S9204: No), or the process of S9208 described above is executed. In this case, it is then determined whether or not there is an audio BGM command among the commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9209). If it is determined in step S9209 that there is an audio BGM command (S9209: Yes), an audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received audio BGM command is read from the audio file storage area 302a. Then, the read audio file (music data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

  When the processing of S9210 is completed, a playback speed corresponding to the BGM tempo indicated by the received audio BGM command is set (S9211). Next, “00H” is set for the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the BGM data is set in the music timer 303d (S9212). Next, BGM correction processing (S9213) is executed.

  Here, in this control example, even when the same BGM is reproduced, the tempo of the reproduced BGM can be varied. Specifically, the audio file storage area 302a corresponds to music of a standard tempo (for example, BPM (beat per minute) 80, that is, a tempo in which a quarter note performs 80 beats per minute). Audio data indicating the standard tempo music read from the audio file storage area 302a is stored in the tempo corresponding to information (tempo information) indicating the tempo included in the BGM command for music received this time. Thus, the playback speed of the audio data is made variable.

  In this way, by configuring the audio device stored in the storage means (audio file storage area 302a) so that different tempos can be set by varying the playback speed, the audio of the same tempo can be set for the same music piece. The need to store the file in the storage means (voice file storage area 302a) can be eliminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 197, the BGM correction process (S9213) which is one process in the command determination process (S9001) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. In the BGM correction process (S9213), a process of creating a corrected audio file is executed when the output period of BGM and stop sound overlap. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the content of the BGM correction process (S9213).

  In the BGM correction process (S9213), first, an audio file of stop sound data stored in the music data group storage area 303a is read (S9301). The stop sound data read in the process of S9301 is stored in the process of S9205 of the command determination process (S9001 in FIG. 196). Next, an audio output period (period in which the stop sound is reproduced) is extracted from the read audio file (S9302), and the extracted audio output period of the stop sound data is compared with the audio output period of the BGM data (S9303). . Next, in the process of S9303, as a result of comparing the stop sound data and the BGM data, it is determined whether there is an overlapping period in which the audio output periods overlap (S9304). If it is determined that there is an overlap period between the stop sound and the BGM (S9304: Yes), a corrected sound file in which BGM data corresponding to the overlap period is corrected to mute is created (S9305), and the music data group storage area The BGM audio file stored in 303a is rewritten to the corrected audio file created in the process of S9305 (S9306), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9304, when it is determined that there is no overlap period between the sound output periods of the stop sound data and the BGM data (S9304: No), it is not necessary to create a corrected sound file, and thus this process ends. .

  As described above, in this control example, BGM (music, tempo) corresponding to the special symbol variation is set by the audio lamp control device 113, and the stop sound corresponding to the set BGM mode is set. It is configured. Thereby, even when the tempo of the BGM is changed, a stop sound corresponding to the tempo can be reproduced. When the set timing of BGM (beating timing) and the stop timing of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol variation do not match, the playback period is set as the type of stop sound. Is configured to set a long stop sound and to set a stop sound to beat at both the set BGM beat timing and the third symbol stop timing. With this configuration, even when the BGM tempo is varied, a stop sound corresponding to both the set BGM tempo and the stop timing of the third symbol can be reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to set a production mode in which voice and display that do not give the player a sense of incongruity are combined, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present control example, the sound output device 226 generates a sound file of a stop sound that is reproduced in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol and a sound file of BGM that is reproduced in response to the special symbol variation. It is configured so that it can be set separately, and when reproducing each set audio file, the BGM sound is set to mute for portions where the audio playback timing overlaps.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the BGM sound and the stop sound sound are simultaneously output and the volume is partially increased. Furthermore, even when the timing of hitting the beat of BGM and the timing of hitting the beat of the stop sound are slightly different (for example, 0.05 seconds), the voice can be reproduced without giving the player a sense of incongruity. .

  Returning to FIG. After executing the BGM correction process (S9213), the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the current music data group storage area 303a is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9214). The reproduction of BGM data is set in CN1 of the speech synthesizer 306 (S9215), and the process returns to S9201.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9209, when it is determined that the voice BGM command is not received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S9209: No), it is determined whether there is a voice confirmation command (S9216). If it is determined that there is a voice confirmation command (S9216: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON (S9217), and the process returns to S9201.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9216 that there is no voice confirmation command (S9216: No), it is determined whether there is a voice switching command (S9218). If it is determined that there is a voice switching command (S9218: Yes), the voice file data is switched and set (S9219), and the process returns to S9201. On the other hand, in the process of S9218, when it is determined that the voice switching command is not received (S9218: No), the process according to the other command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S9214). The process returns to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command for instructing the reproduction of the sound effect, the reproduction of the sound effect of the type specified by the command is set. If the command is an instruction to reproduce a warning sound, the reproduction of the warning sound of the type specified by the command is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, details of the audio setting process (S9002) executed in the main process (see FIG. 195 (a)) by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process (S9002).

  In this sound setting process (see FIG. 198), first, it is determined whether or not BGM is being played back (S9401). If it is determined that BGM is not being played back (S9401: No), a single sound effect is generated. This means that there is no possibility of switching to other audio data during the reproduction of the audio, and thus this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9401 that the BGM is being played back (S9401: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the music data being played back (S9402). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the music timer 303d is 0, and when it is determined that it is not the reproduction end timing of the music data (that is, the value of the music timer 303d is not 0) (S9402: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9402, when it is determined that the end timing of the music data being played has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9402: Yes), In the data group storage area 303a, a process for setting the reproduction of the music data next to the music data that has been reproduced this time is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON (S9403). If it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is on (S9403: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to off (S9404), and the process proceeds to S9406. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is not on (S9403: No), the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to 00H (S9405).

  That is, normally, the value of the music timer 303d corresponding to BGM is set in accordance with the special symbol fluctuation stop timing, and the BGM is also stopped at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation stops. However, if the sound lamp control device 113 cannot receive the stop command for indicating the change stop of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON. The BGM is configured to be reproduced from the beginning without being performed. As a result, when the variation of the special symbol is not stopped (when the command to indicate that the variation of the special symbol has been stopped), only the BGM is stopped first. Can do.

  Next, in the process of S9406, it is determined whether or not the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current music data group (S9406). ).

  In the process of S9406, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. And update (S9407), and the process proceeds to S9409. On the other hand, if it is determined in S9406 that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is changed to “ 01H "(S9408), and the process proceeds to S9409. By updating the value of the music pointer 303b by the processing of S9408, the music can be reproduced in a predetermined order.

<Another example of the second control example>
Next, another example of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. This different example is different from the second control example described above in that a variable display device unit 80 used in the first control example described above is provided instead of the third symbol display device 81. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in this separate example is a combination of the configuration of the first control example and the configuration of the second control example described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, with respect to the operation control of the inner reel 811 described in the first control example described above, the rotation speed of the inner reel is made variable in accordance with the set BGM tempo. . In this way, by changing the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 in accordance with the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced, it is possible to execute a realistic effect depending on the sound and the rotation state of the inner reel 811. More specifically, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 increases as the BGM tempo increases.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 199, the contents of the voice setting process 3 (S2671) executed in the present another example will be described. This voice setting process 3 (S2671) is a BGM determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa with respect to the voice setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 178) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the second control example described above. The type tempo (BPM) is determined (S3751), and if the determined BGM tempo (BPM) is determined to be 120 (S3751: Yes), a high speed is set as the reel rotation speed (S3753). When it is determined that the tempo (BPM) of the recorded BGM is not 120 (that is, 80) (S3751: No), the difference is that a low speed is set as the reel rotation speed (S3752). Since the rest is the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description is omitted.

  With this configuration, drive control is performed so that the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 corresponds to the BGM determined using the BGM type selection table 222aa in order to suggest the player the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the above-described another example, the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 is configured to vary according to the set BGM. However, the operation contents other than the inner reel 811 are varied according to the set BGM. You may comprise.

  Operation at the start of rotation of the inner reel 811 so that the timing at which the player grasps the tempo of the BGM executed this time is the same as the timing at which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 executed this time. It is good to comprise so that control may be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 before the BGM is reproduced and grasps the current lottery result.

  In this example, the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 is made variable in accordance with the set BGM tempo, but other operation control may be executed for the inner reel 811. For example, according to the type and tempo of the BGM, the rotation of the inner reel 811 is temporarily stopped, the rotation speed is temporarily increased or decreased, and the rotation direction is temporarily changed. May be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to achieve an effect with a sense of unity with the set BGM, using not only the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 but also the rotation mode.

  Furthermore, in this other example, a configuration is used in which the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 of the variable display device unit 80 used in the first control example described above is varied in accordance with the set BGM tempo. In addition, for example, the variable display speed of the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the variable display speed of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be varied.

  In this example, the variation speed (the rotation speed of the inner reel 811) of the third symbol (the symbol that is variably displayed to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol) is varied in accordance with the set BGM tempo. Although configured, there is a problem that it is difficult to stop the predetermined stop symbol of the third symbol by changing the variation speed of the third symbol.

  In view of the above-described problems, for example, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be set based on information obtained by changing the variation speed of the third symbol. Thereby, since the stop symbol corresponding to the set variation rate of the third symbol can be displayed, it is possible to execute the variation display that does not give the player a sense of incongruity. As another countermeasure, when a plurality of third symbols are stopped and a lottery result of a special symbol is displayed by a combination of the plurality of stopped third symbols, the timing for stopping each third symbol is set. You may comprise so that it may be determined corresponding to the set fluctuation speed of the 3rd pattern. Furthermore, the third symbol is stopped in a predetermined stop display mode by setting the variation rate of the third symbol during high-speed variation to a low speed and continuing the variation of the third symbol for a predetermined period at the low variation rate. You may comprise as follows.

  In the first control example described above, a plurality of display means (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) capable of variably displaying the identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol are provided, The display areas of the plurality of display means (areas that can be visually recognized by the player) are arranged so as to overlap each other, and are configured to set various variable display modes by switching the operation mode of each display means. . By comprising in this way, a various fluctuation | variation display mode can be provided with respect to a player, and it can suppress getting tired of a game early.

  In the first control example, display means (inner reel 811 and outer reel 821) using a medium on which the third symbol is printed in advance, and display means (7-segment display unit 1600) using seven segments are provided. Although it is used, any other configuration may be used as long as it is a display means capable of displaying the 3rd symbol to the player. For example, it is configured by the liquid crystal display used in the second control example described above. The 3rd symbol display device 81 may be used as one of the display means, and a specific display can be obtained by irradiating light from the side to a transparent acrylic plate which is engraved to show a specific display mode. Display means using a light guide plate that allows the player to visually recognize the aspect, or display means using an organic EL may be used as one of the display means. Further, as in the above-described second control example, a plurality of image layers may be created for one liquid crystal display, and the image layers to be actually displayed may be switched.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the display means for executing the variable display of the third symbol is switched according to the set gaming state, so that the variable display mode being executed is grasped. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the currently set gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display mode may be set so as to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently set gaming state.

  In the first control example described above, a dual reel structure in which reel-type display means are arranged in an overlapping manner is used, and the outer reel (outer reel 821) of the dual reel structure (side closer to the player's viewpoint) is used. An area (first area) in which the player can visually recognize the reel (inner reel 811) provided inside the double reel structure and an area that is difficult to visually recognize (second area, third area) are formed. When the variable display of the third symbol is executed using the reel 811, the outer reel 821 is variably operated to the first area, and when the variable display of the third symbol is executed using the outer reel 821, It is configured to execute using the second area and the third area of the outer reel 821.

  Thereby, a some change display mode can be easily set using a double reel structure. Furthermore, in this control example, since the three-frame variable display mode is set using both reels of the double reel structure, more variable display modes can be set, and the production effect Can be increased.

  In this control example, in addition to the above-described reel display by the double reel structure, a special symbol lottery result is also notified to the player by 7-segment display using the segment display device 600. Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol can be notified to the player in more various display modes, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, in the present control example, the display method of the symbol (the third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is varied according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example displays the lottery result of the special symbol according to the reel stop mode, unlike the conventional gaming machine that displays the lottery result of the special symbol using the liquid crystal screen. It is configured. In such a gaming machine, information other than a special symbol lottery result using a liquid crystal screen as in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a continuous effect in which the expectation of winning a big hit increases as it continues (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) Since there is no display area for notifying the player of information indicating the number of times that is executed, there has been a problem that it is difficult to clearly notify the player of the process for the continuous performance. On the other hand, in the present control example, by changing the display area that the player can visually recognize by operating the displacement member 670, the player is notified of the process for the continuous effect (the number of executions of the continuous effect). It is composed. Thereby, even if it is the pachinko machine 10 which does not have a liquid crystal display device, the process of a continuous production can be recognized easily by a player.

  In this control example, the configuration in which the process of continuous production is notified to the player by changing the display area of the reel display is used, but the process of continuous production is used for the player using other configurations. You may comprise so that it may alert | report. Specifically, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) is varied or the sound effect during the reel operation is varied according to the number of times that the continuous performance is executed. It may be configured.

  Further, in the present control example, when the above-described continuous effect is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the display area of the reel display is gradually narrowed according to the number of executions of the continuous effect. With such a configuration, the smaller the display area of the reel display for the player, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots, so that it is possible to provide an easily understandable gaming machine for the player. .

  In addition, by operating the displacement member 670 to narrow the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of effective lines that display the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) ) Is reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol.

  In the first control example, the time (variation time) from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the lottery result is stopped and displayed is changed according to the set gaming state. Specifically, in a gaming state where a special symbol lottery is likely to be executed (short-time state, probability variation state), it is easy to set a short variation time in order to increase the number of special symbol lotteries executed per unit time. In a gaming state (normal state) in which symbol lottery is difficult to be executed, a long variation time is easily set to reduce a period in which a special symbol lottery is not being performed (period in which the special symbol has not changed). doing.

  In this control example configured as described above, a reel display with a slow speed (for example, 0.2 seconds) for changing the third symbol displayed in the display area in a gaming state (normal state) in which a long variation time is easily set. To execute a 7-segment display with a fast speed (for example, 0.05 seconds) for changing the symbols displayed in the display area in a gaming state (probability variation state, short-time state) in which a short variation time is easily set. It is composed. As a result, even when a plurality of display methods having different variable speeds of the third symbol are used, the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is surely stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. Can be made.

  In this control example, as if multiple lottery results are displayed during a dynamic display period (during a variable display period) in which a display symbol for displaying a single lottery result of a special symbol is dynamically displayed. It is configured to execute a pseudo-variable effect that is shown.

  In this pseudo-variation effect, during a single dynamic display period, a re-change effect that starts a change again after stopping the display symbol (temporary stop display) is configured to be executed a plurality of times. As the number of times this re-variation effect is executed increases, the possibility of winning a jackpot increases.

  Here, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using the liquid crystal display device, for example, by displaying the number of re-variation effects (pseudo continuous number) executed during the pseudo-change effect on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, Although it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effect for the player There has been a problem that it is difficult to easily report (number of pseudo-continuous times).

  Therefore, in this control example, each time the re-variation effect is executed, the displacement member 670 is varied to notify the player of the number of executed re-change effects. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Further, in this control example, each time the re-variation effect is executed, the displacement member 670 is made variable so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 800 becomes narrow, and every time the re-change effect is executed. The number of effective lines in the display area is reduced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the effective lines to be watched by the player, and thus it is possible to suppress the process of missing and displaying the combination of display symbols corresponding to the jackpot. .

  In this control example, the pseudo-variation effect described above, that is, the effect of changing the effective symbol sequence in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is executed using the period during which one special symbol variation is executed. Although it comprises, it may comprise so that the production which changes an effective symbol sequence over multiple special symbol changes may be performed as composition other than that.

  In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see S513 in FIG. 132) executed by the main controller 110 described later with reference to FIG. The lottery result may be determined in advance, and an effect (continuous effect) may be set so as to cross a plurality of special symbol variations based on the prior determination result. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol multiple times during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, so the special symbol executed at any timing for the player It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the continuous production has been executed in response to the fluctuation display.

  Further, in this control example, a configuration is used in which the pseudo-variation effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually decreases, but the player can be changed by changing the effective line of the third symbol. For example, it may be configured to provide a new variation display effect. For example, the pseudo variation effect may be executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

  In this control example, when the pseudo variation effect is executed, the more the number of re-variations increases (the longer the variation time that is set), the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the reach display is performed when the number of pseudo-stops of the third symbol during the pseudo-variation production is a predetermined number, the possibility of winning the jackpot increases. You may comprise. Thereby, in the period from the execution of the pseudo variation effect to the end, it is possible to play the game while always giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the jackpot.

  Further, in this control example, a new effective line is formed by combining the display symbols printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) disposed in the variable display unit 80. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display pattern is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a decorative movable accessory is positioned at a specific position, a new effective line is formed. It may be configured. In addition, the display symbol may be stopped first, and a new effective line may be formed when the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) emits light thereafter. In this way, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by forming a new effective line by combining the display symbol capable of variable display and the elements other than the display symbol so as to satisfy the predetermined condition. In this case, not only the variation display mode of the display symbols but also the light emission mode of the light emitting means and the movable mode of the decorative movable accessory are watched, so that the player is not bored with the game early. can do.

  In this control example, when the remaining short number of times becomes less than 5, the remaining short number of times is notified to the player using 7 segments. As a result, it is possible to notify in advance the period until the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (the short time state that is more advantageous than the normal state) is completed, so the short time state suddenly ends and the player feels uncomfortable. It can suppress giving.

  In addition, in this control example, during the special symbol variable display period, first, the display symbol for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped (see FIG. 110 (a)), and then the remaining short time is displayed. It is configured to be. Then, a display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is set so that the display symbol indicating the same number as the number of remaining short times is not displayed on the 7-segment display of the remaining short time. It is composed.

  By configuring in this way, the display mode of the display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display of the remaining short time number indicating the remaining short time number can be made different. The number of times can be reliably notified.

  Further, in this control example, after the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is not necessary to display the short time remaining display indicating the short time remaining time, that is, when the special symbol jackpot is won. In this case, since the display symbol is set regardless of the number of remaining short times displayed next, the display symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won should be set without limitation. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the display symbols that are stopped and displayed according to the privilege (the number of prize balls or the game state set after the end of the jackpot game) given by the winning jackpot.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the short remaining number of times is displayed using the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The short remaining number of times may be displayed using the segment display unit 1600a or the right 7-segment display unit 1600c. In this case, for example, when it is configured to display the remaining short number of times using the left 7-segment display unit 1600a that is first stopped and displayed, the game is played in a state in which the remaining short number of times to be displayed is grasped in advance. As a result, if the same number as the remaining short time displayed next is stopped and displayed as a display symbol for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol on the left 7-segment display portion 1600a, the lottery result of this time is a big hit Can be grasped in advance. Further, the 7-segment display unit 1600 that displays the remaining short time count may be appropriately changed.

  Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, this control example is configured to display a special symbol variation display and a remaining short time count display within one variation display period (including symbol determination time). The remaining short time display is executed for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the set special symbol variation time. Therefore, for example, when the set change time of the special symbol is 2 seconds, the special symbol change display of 1.5 seconds is performed regardless of the execution of the remaining short time display, and then 0.5 seconds. If the special symbol fluctuation time is 1 second, it is determined whether or not the remaining short number of times is displayed. If the remaining short number of times is not displayed, 1 second is displayed. When the special symbol variation is executed, the remaining short time display is executed. In this state, 0.5 seconds of short variation is executed as the special symbol variation, and then 0.5 seconds remaining short time display is performed. Is configured to run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute both the special symbol variation display and the remaining short time count display within one special symbol variation display period.

  In this control example, as described above, the special symbol variation display and the remaining short time display are performed together within one special symbol variation display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a short time remaining number display may be performed so that special symbol fluctuation may be straddled. In this case, for example, a special symbol variation display for a certain time is executed regardless of the set variation time, and the remaining time that is the difference between the variation display execution time and the set variation time is reduced. It is good to set it as the time to display the number of times. As a result, the variation display mode of the special symbol can be made constant, a game easy to understand for the player can be provided, and the variation display mode pattern can be simplified. Can be reduced.

  In addition, a display lower limit time for executing the short remaining time display is set, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period during which the special symbol fluctuation display is executed and the set fluctuation time is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0 If the time is shorter than .5 seconds), it is preferable to display the short remaining time display across the period in which the next special symbol variation is executed. By comprising in this way, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain the remaining short time count reliably. However, in this case, since the change of the special symbol is started while the short remaining time display is being executed, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the new special symbol change has been started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is informed that the special symbol variation has started by blinking the area not used for the short remaining time display (in the example of FIG. 111 (b), the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a) blinks. Or the player can be informed that the special symbol variation has started by changing the emission color of the display mode of the short time remaining display mode (the display mode imitating “4” in FIG. 111 (b)). It is good to configure. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player that a new special symbol change has been started while executing the short time remaining display.

  In the case of executing the above-described processing, specifically, the following configuration is preferably provided in the sound lamp control device 113. First, variation time extraction means for extracting a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbol variation from information included in the variation pattern command output from main controller 110, and variation of the third symbol within the variation time of special symbol variation Setting means for setting the third symbol variation display time for executing the display and the remaining short number of times display time for executing the short time remaining number display, the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means, and the variation time extracting means extract A calculating means for calculating a difference between the fluctuation patterns (variation times), a lower limit determining means for determining whether the time calculated by the calculating means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second), and a lower limit determining means. Configured to turn on the continuation flag to indicate that the remaining short-time display does not end within the current fluctuation pattern period when it is determined that it is less than the lower limit fluctuation time That.

  The continuation flag is set to be turned off at the timing when the remaining short number of times display ends, and in a state where the continuation flag is set to on, that is, in a state where the remaining short number of times display is being executed. When a new variation pattern is set, a variation start display mode may be set to indicate that a new symbol variation is executed during the remaining short time display.

  Further, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time for executing the short remaining time display, and even if the shortest time among the plurality of different times is set, the short remaining time display is the current variation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to ON when it is determined that the process does not end within. Further, when the time reduction state is set, the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means is configured to be different between when the remaining short time display is executed and when it is not executed. When the number of times display is performed, the third symbol variation display time may be set more easily than when the number of times display is not performed.

  In this control example, the special symbol variation time includes the period during which the special symbol is variably displayed (symbol variation period) and the period during which the special symbol is stopped (symbol determination period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol change period of the special symbol and the symbol determination period may be divided and controlled. In this case, for example, the remaining short time display period is set in advance to be the same as the symbol fixed period, and the third symbol variation display time longer than the symbol variation period is set, or the remaining short number display period Is set in advance to be longer than the symbol determination period, and when it is determined that the remaining short time display cannot be executed during the symbol variation period, to indicate that it will not end within the current variation pattern period The continuation flag may be set to ON.

  In this control example, when the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (variable display by 7 segments) is executed, the symbol display mode for displaying the third symbol is configured to be variably displayed. Without being limited to this, a display manner different from the third symbol for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a display manner in which only one of the seven segments is lit) is changed and displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise. With this configuration, when the 7-segment display unit 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variation display of the 3rd symbol, if the specific 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed by the afterimage of light, The situation which gives a misunderstanding to a person can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600, the player visually recognizes the high-speed variable display period in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize each symbol display mode that is variably displayed, and the individual symbol display mode that is variably displayed. An easy low-speed fluctuation display period is set, and the high-speed fluctuation display period is configured to variably display a display mode different from the third pattern, and the low-speed fluctuation display period is configured to variably display the symbol display mode indicating the third pattern. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to suppress the sudden stop of the third symbol while suppressing the false recognition that the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light during high-speed fluctuation. .

  In the second control example described above, the tempo (BPM (beat per minute)) of the fluctuation sound (BGM) output during the fluctuation display of the special symbol (during the fluctuation display of the third symbol) is configured to be variable. Therefore, the stop sound of the third symbol is made variable in accordance with the tempo of the fluctuation sound (BGM) to be reproduced.

  In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third symbol corresponding to the BGM reproduced at different tempos, the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third symbol can be made to have a sense of unity, and the production effect Can be increased.

  In the second control example described above, even if the BGM is the same, it is possible to make the player feel as if various BGMs are being output by changing the output tempo, and the player gets bored with the game early. Can be suppressed. Further, by varying the BGM tempo, even if the variation display (dynamic display) is performed with the same variation pattern, different variation patterns are executed depending on the BGM tempo that is output in accordance with the variation display. It can be made to think, and it can be made to feel various variations of special symbols.

  In addition, even when the BGM tempo is changed and output, the stop sound that matches the tempo change is selected and output, so that a problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match can be suppressed. In addition, even when the BGM tempo is flexibly changed by lottery or the like, the stop sound is set to the reference tempo by converting the stop sound according to the tempo change and outputting it. Then, it can be configured to output a stop sound that is easily matched.

  Further, in this control example, since the lottery ratio of the BGM selected based on the lottery result is set to be variable, a BGM having a tempo that can be easily selected when winning is output, thereby determining whether the player is successful or not. It can be expected early that the result is a win.

  In the second control example described above, the visual display mode and the auditory sound mode described above are used as a plurality of presentation modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Anything may be used as long as it produces an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol to the player. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory performance mode for stimulating the player's olfaction is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the special symbol lottery result. In this way, by configuring a plurality of types of effect modes as appropriate so as to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes that are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example,
Once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until the big hit state occurs (for example, 2 times or 3 times) May be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, alepatchi, sparrow balls, slot machines,
You may make it implement as various game machines, such as a game machine with which what was called a pachinko machine and the slot machine united.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
When a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific condition. In this case, coins, medals and the like are typical examples.

In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever,
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or when a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the predetermined game value is given to the player on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is generated, and a large amount of balls are paid out to the player in the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball in the entrance and formed to be displaceable, the guide member is A pair of projecting portions projecting from the guide surface so as to be able to contact a game ball rolling on the guide surface, the pair of projecting portions being arranged along the guide surface. A gaming machine A1 that is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the guided direction.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball at the entrance and formed to be displaceable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members that have a guide surface that guides the game ball to the entrance and that are disposed across the entrance and are rotatably supported on the base end side. In this case,
Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 03-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member, and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member. According to such a technique, the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions.
Even when the game balls are guided (rolled) simultaneously on the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member, the respective game balls are moved in different directions (one is on the glass plate side and the other is Can be biased to the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can smoothly enter the entrance. However, the above-described conventional technique has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, a game ball entering from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass from the other side of the guide member. In this case, the game ball is not entered into the entrance, so the player's There was a problem that interest was impaired.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the guide member is provided with a pair of projecting portions formed so as to be able to contact a game ball that projects from the guide surface and rolls on the guide surface. Since the installation part is arranged at a position different from the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the projection part. By doing so, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

In addition, the pair of projecting portions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, thereby projecting the game ball entering from one side of the guide member. Can be brought into contact with the portion. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached from one side of the guide member passes through the guide member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members that are disposed with the entrance opening interposed therebetween, and the base end side of the guide member is rotatably supported, and the pair of wing members approach or separate from the distal end side. By rotating in the direction of rotation, a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass or an open state in which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of projecting portions project from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members. A direction in which the protruding portion of one wing member of the pair of wing members and the protruding portion of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface A gaming machine A2 that is arranged at different positions.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members that are disposed with the ball entrance interposed therebetween and rotatably supported on the base end side. The projecting portion projects from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members, and the projecting portion of one wing member and the projecting portion of the other wing member of the pair of wing members extend along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surface are brought into contact with the projecting portions, so that the game balls can be reliably secured. Can be biased. as a result,
It is possible to smoothly enter the entrance and to prevent clogging.

Further, the protruding portion of one wing member and the protruding portion of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member). When the game ball that has entered the guide surface in one wing member reaches the guide surface in the other wing member, the game ball is placed in the other wing member. It can be brought into contact with the protruding portion. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached the guide surface in one wing member passes through the guide surface in the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

In the gaming machine A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A2, the projecting portion is projected from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the distal end side of the wing member, and thus is guided to the guide surface. It is possible to secure an area where the game ball can roll until it comes into contact with the protruding portion. Therefore, the fall of the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed correspondingly, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

Further, since the projecting portion projects from the projecting surface at a position closer to the base end side than the distal end side of the wing member, the path of the game ball biased in contact with the projecting portion becomes the entrance port. It is possible to suppress the return to the path before the deviation before reaching (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily send the game ball from the guide surface to the entrance in the biased state.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a first area that continues from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member is formed on the guide surface, and is not in contact with the game ball guided through the first area. The protruding portion is formed with a size, and the first region of the guide surface in one wing member of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface in the other wing member are A gaming machine A4, wherein the gaming machine A4 is arranged at a different position along a guide surface in a direction orthogonal to a direction in which a game ball is guided.

According to the gaming machine A4, in the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first area continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member, and the gaming ball guided through the first area is not Since the projecting portion is formed with a size that makes contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first area, it can be avoided that the rolling speed of the game ball decreases, You can smoothly enter the entrance.

In this case, the first region of the guide surface of one wing member of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. When the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) through the first area of the guide surface of one wing member and the first area of the guide surface of the other wing member However, these game balls can be biased in different directions from each other, and can smoothly enter the entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member that rotatably supports the wing member is provided, and the base member includes a regulating portion that contacts the wing member and regulates the rotation of the wing member, A gaming machine A5, wherein the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A5, in any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 includes a base member that pivotally supports the wing member, and the base member abuts on the wing member to regulate the rotation of the wing member. Since the restricting portion is provided and the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the projecting portion is a portion projecting from the wing member (guide surface), the portion where the rigidity of the wing member is relatively high can be used as a stopper to contact the regulating portion of the base member. Accordingly, breakage of the wing member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion has a side surface formed substantially flush with a side surface on the base end side of the wing member, and is substantially flush with a side surface on the base end side of the wing member in the closed state. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that a side surface of the projecting portion to be formed is in contact with at least a regulating portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion has a side surface formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the base end side of the wing member Since the side surface of the projecting portion formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member is in contact with at least the regulating portion of the base member, a portion (side surface of the projecting portion) that is far from the rotating shaft is placed on the regulating portion of the base member. Can be brought into contact with
The reaction force input from the restricting portion to the wing member can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. Further, for example, compared with the case where the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member, the restricting portion of the base member can be separated from the entrance port, and the flow to the entrance port can be reduced. Space for roads can be secured. In addition to the side surface of the projecting portion, the base end side surface of the wing member may be brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing member can be further suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, in the closed state, provided with an interposition wall located between the opposing protruding portions, the pair of wing members are configured so that the protruding portions are not formed when viewed in the rotation axis direction. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the area to be played is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the projecting portions is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, the pair of wing members are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the protruding portion is protruded from the guide surface, the pair of wing members are further spaced apart by the protruding height of the protruding portion so that the game ball is not sandwiched between the protruding portions. A necessity arises and the space required for arrangement | positioning of a pair of wing | blade member increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the gaming machine A7 includes an interposition wall positioned between the opposing protruding portions in the closed state. In the direction view, the opposing distance of the guide surface in the region where the protruding portion is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the opposing interval of the protruding portion is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, Space required for disposing the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

That is, even when the pair of wing members start to close (even when the transition to the closed state starts) in a state where the game ball is guided (rolled) on the guide surface, there is an intervening wall between the opposing protruding portions. By being positioned, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged between the facing portions of the projecting portion and the game ball being sandwiched between the projecting portions.
A game ball discharged from between the facing portions of the projecting portion by the interposition wall is positioned between the opposing guide surfaces in the region where the projecting portion is not formed. Since it is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is never caught. As a result, the facing distance between the protruding portions can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for arrangement | positioning of a pair of wing | blade member can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members can be disposed in a space equivalent to the space necessary for disposing the conventional product without projecting the projecting portion on the guide surface.

In the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the interposition wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and positioned higher than the lower end of the entrance in the direction of gravity. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the interposition wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and is further upward in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the entrance. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide surface can be sent to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and can be entered into the entrance by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one wing member of the pair of wing members is disposed at a position where the closed state is formed and the position at which the other wing member is formed at the closed state The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the timing to be played is different.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one wing member of the pair of wing members is arranged at a position where the closed state is formed and the other wing member are Since the timing at which the closed state is formed is different, it is difficult to sandwich the game ball between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and the corresponding interval between the pair of wing members can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the space required for disposing the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is in a posture in which the guide surface faces the entrance, and in a closed position in which the game ball cannot enter the entrance, and in an orientation with the guide surface as an upper surface. It is formed so as to be able to rotate between an open position that allows the game ball that rolls out on the front side of the entrance and allows the entrance of the game ball rolling on the guide surface, and the guide surface of the guide member is It is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the entrance, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the entrance in a front view. In addition, the gaming machine A10 is characterized by being arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is in a position to be immersed below the entrance, and is in a closed position in which the game ball cannot enter the entrance and the orientation with the guide surface as an upper surface. The guide surface of the guide member is formed so as to be slidable between an open position that protrudes to the front side of the ball port and allows a game ball rolling on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance. A width equal to or larger than the width of the entrance hole is formed, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at a position sandwiching the entrance opening in a front view. The gaming machine A11 is characterized by being arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

According to the gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a guide surface of the guide member having a width equal to or greater than the width of the entrance. Formed,
The pair of projecting portions is disposed at a position sandwiching the entrance in front view, and is different in position in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since it is arranged, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the projecting portion, so that the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

In addition, one projecting portion and the other projecting portion are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of projecting portions. Therefore, one side in the width direction (
Alternatively, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered from the other side from flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member through the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 500 as an example>
A game entrance in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members disposed so as to sandwich the entrance, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the pair of wing members to open or close them When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members are disposed at an allowable position that allows the game ball to enter the entrance, and the pair of wing members are driven by the driving force of the driving means. In a gaming machine comprising a restricting means disposed at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entrance when the wing member is closed, the pair of wing members are closed or the pair The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the regulating means is formed so as to be maintained at the regulating position in a state where the wing member is opened from the outside.

Here, a ball entrance that allows game balls to enter, a pair of wing members that are disposed across the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close Driving means for causing
When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means and are arranged at an allowable position allowing the game balls to enter the entrance. There is known a gaming machine provided with a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entrance (for example, JP 2011-172833 A).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the permissible position, so that the game balls that have passed between the pair of wing members are inserted into the entrance port. Can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the restricting position. It is possible to regulate entering the ball.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated,
For example, since the pair of wing members can be forcibly opened from the outside and the restricting means can be displaced from the restricting position to the allowable position, the effect of restricting illegally entering the game ball into the entrance is effective. There was a problem that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the arrangement of the restricting means is formed so as to be maintained at the restricting position in a state where the pair of wing members are closed or the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. It is possible to suppress the means from being displaced to the allowable position. Accordingly, it is possible to easily restrict the game ball from being illegally entered into the entrance.

Note that the restriction position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the entrance is that it is sufficient to stop the game ball at a predetermined position. That is, when the entrance is provided with a passage through which the game ball that flows into the entrance and passes through the entrance, the restricting position by the restricting means (the position at which the game ball is stopped) is more than the entrance entrance. It may be upstream or downstream of the entrance (that is, in the middle of a route flowing from the entrance and passing through the passage). In the latter case, the restriction position by the restriction means may be upstream of the detection means with respect to the detection means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage in order to detect the passage of the game ball. It may be downstream.

The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is slid between the open slide position and the closed slide position by the driving force of the driving unit. The slide transmission member to be moved, and the slide transmission member that is rotated to the open rotation position by the slide displacement to the open slide position opens the pair of wing members and is closed by the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the closed slide position. A rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position and closes the pair of wing members, the restriction means is disposed on the slide transmission member, and the restriction is applied when the slide transmission member is slid to the open slide position. When the means is arranged at the allowable position and the slide transmission member is slid to the closed slide position, When the rotation transmission member is disposed at the open rotation position in a state where the restriction means is disposed at the restriction position and the slide transmission member is disposed at the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are By being engaged, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is restricted, and the gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is disposed at the open rotation position with the slide transmission member disposed at the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are disposed. And the sliding displacement of the slide transmitting member to the open slide position is restricted, so that it is easy to restrict illegally entering the game ball into the entrance.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members are forcibly opened from the outside illegally, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position with the slide transmission member disposed at the closed slide position. In such a state, the slide transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. Therefore, the restriction means can be maintained at the restriction position (the restriction means is allowed). It is possible to prevent unauthorized displacement from the outside to the position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside and the game ball is passed between the pair of wing members, the restriction means restricts the game ball from entering the entrance. it can.

In the gaming machine B2, a sliding groove extends on one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and a sliding projection protrudes from the other, and the sliding projection is slid along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member, and the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, thereby releasing the slide transmission member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that sliding displacement to the sliding position is restricted.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, a sliding groove is extended on one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and a sliding projection is projected from the other side. By sliding along the movement groove, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted and the rotation transmission member is rotated, and the slide projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby transmitting the slide. Since the slide displacement of the member to the open slide position is restricted, it is difficult to release the restriction while reducing the size.

That is, a means for regulating the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position can be formed by utilizing the slide groove and the slide projection for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the rotation transmission member for rotation. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by adopting a structure in which the sliding protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, unauthorized access from the outside to the engaging portion can be made difficult.
The restriction (engagement) can be made difficult to be released.

The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is slid between the open slide position and the closed slide position by the driving force of the driving unit. The slide transmission member to be moved, and the slide transmission member that is rotated to the open rotation position by the slide displacement to the open slide position opens the pair of wing members and is closed by the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the closed slide position. A rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position and at least capable of closing the pair of wing members, the regulating means is disposed on the rotation transmission member, and the rotation transmission member is rotated to an open rotation position. When the restricting means is disposed at the allowable position and the rotation transmitting member is rotated to the closed rotation position, the restricting means is In the state where the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is arranged at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, A gaming machine B4, wherein the rotation transmitting member is restricted from rotating to an open rotation position.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, in a state where the slide transmission member is disposed at the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is disposed at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member, the slide transmission member, Is engaged, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position is restricted, so that it is easy to restrict illegally entering the game ball into the entrance.

That is, from a state where the pair of wing members is closed, for example, the pair of wing members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or the rotation transmission member is directly operated to rotate the rotation transmission member to the open position. Even if it tries to make it, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged,
Since the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position is restricted, the restriction means can be maintained at the restriction position (that is, the restriction means can be prevented from being illegally forcedly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, the illegally entering the game ball into the entrance can be regulated by the regulation means.

In the gaming machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and an engagement portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. A gaming machine B5, wherein the protruding portion protrudes along a direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, a protruding portion that protrudes from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member that can be engaged with the protruding portion. And the projecting portion is projected along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide transmission member, so that the engagement between the projecting portion and the engagement portion is performed using the slide displacement of the slide transmission member. And the release of the engagement can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) with which the protrusion can abut, or a hole or a recess (slide transmission member or rotation transmission) into which the protrusion can be inserted. It may be a hole drilled in one of the members or a recess recessed. In other words, any member that can regulate the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position by abutting the engaging portion with the engaging portion may be used. In this case, the engaging portion is preferably a hole or a recess. Since the protrusion is inserted into the engaging portion, the space required for the arrangement of the protruding portion can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced. This is because it can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the protruding portion from the outside can be made difficult.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, and an open-side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. A gaming machine B6, comprising: a closing-side contact portion that contacts and closes the pair of wing members when closed.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmitting member is configured to contact the pair of wing members and open when they are rotated toward the opening rotation position. Since it has a closed side contact portion that contacts and closes the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside, Unauthorized external access to the rotation transmission member or slide transmission member can be made difficult.

In other words, when the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing contact portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member tries to rotate toward the open rotation position.
In this case, according to the present invention, the engagement of the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member can regulate the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. It can be regulated by part. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being forcibly opened from the outside and to make unauthorized access from the outside to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member difficult.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, urging means for urging the pair of wing members in the closing direction is provided, and the rotation transmitting member contacts the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. An opening-side contact portion that is opened and the pair of wing members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the closed rotation position. B
7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the gaming machine B7 includes biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position. Since the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the closed rotation position. When the pair of wing members are illegally forcedly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members are not brought into contact with the rotation transmission member, and it is possible to avoid the external force due to the forcible opening being applied to the rotation transmission member. As a result, the pair of wing members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member can be prevented from being damaged.

As the urging means, a spring that urges the pair of wing members in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force (
Examples thereof include a torsion spring and a coil spring) and a magnet that urges a pair of wing members in the closing direction by an attractive force.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the game machine includes a detection unit that detects a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the regulation unit has the regulation position downstream of the detection unit, and A gaming machine B8 characterized in that the game ball is regulated at a position where detection by the detection means is possible.
.

According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the gaming machine B8 includes a detecting unit that detects a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the regulating unit has a regulated position downstream of the detecting unit. At the same time, the game ball is regulated at a position where detection by the detection means is possible. For example, when the wing member is forcibly opened and the game ball is illegally flowed from the entrance, the detection means detects the game ball. Can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether the detection by the detection means has been continued beyond the predetermined time, it is possible to detect that the game ball has been illegally introduced.

<About the concept of the invention taking the decorative symbol display device 800 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a first reel formed to be rotatable and a second reel that is disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and is formed to be rotatable. A first outer peripheral wall formed in a shape and a first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall, and the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and has an outer surface A second outer peripheral wall facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and projecting radially inward from one axial side of the second outer peripheral wall, and its outer surface is an inner surface of the first side wall And a second side wall opposed to the second side wall at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall to the other. Machine C1.

Here, a first reel formed rotatably and a second reel arranged substantially concentrically inside the first reel and formed rotatably (that is, a double reel structure). A gaming machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-230893). Also known is a technique for removing dust adhering to the display surface of the reel and cleaning it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (For example, JP 2009-28241 A).

However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is,
In the double reel structure, a space for arranging the rotating brush described above cannot be secured between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel). The outer peripheral surface of the reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel has a first outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape,
A first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall, the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the outer surface is spaced from the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall by a predetermined interval. A second outer peripheral wall that faces each other, and a second side wall that protrudes radially inward from one axial side of the second outer peripheral wall and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the first side wall with a predetermined interval. And the standing portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall to the other, so that the standing portion is between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. A wind pressure is generated by being displaced in the circumferential direction, and the air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be caused to flow by using the wind pressure. Thereby, dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

In the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a surface continuous in the circumferential direction.

Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall or the second side wall, or when a part in the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall Since the wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion and the divided portion, the wind pressure is weakened, and accordingly, the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall are reduced. It becomes difficult to flow the air between.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a surface that is continuous in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can easily flow. As a result, using the wind pressure generated by the upright portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the second outer peripheral wall It is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the outer surface.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel includes a first support wall that is pivotally supported at the center and supports the first side wall, and the second reel has a shaft that is rotatable at the center. A gaming machine C3 comprising a second support wall that is supported and supports the second side wall, and an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the supporting wall that supports the first side wall or the second supporting wall that supports the second side wall. Via the opening, the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or the air is discharged from the outside between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Can inhale. That is, the flow resistance of the air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can easily flow (outflow or inflow) accordingly. As a result, using the wind pressure generated by the upright portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the second outer peripheral wall It is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the outer surface.

In the gaming machine C3, when the upright portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that at least the opening is formed in the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of the first reel or the second reel, Since at least an opening is formed in the other first support wall or the second support wall of the second reel, it is possible to easily exert an effect of reducing flow resistance by exhausting or sucking air through the opening. . That is, when rotating one of the first reel and the second reel on which the standing portion is erected, the other of the openings formed on the opening is stopped, so that the air through the opening is stopped. flow(
Exhaust or intake) resistance can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the upright portion is erected on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction. C5
.

In the gaming machine C5, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the inner surface of the first side wall and the second
Since the standing portions are erected in different positions in the radial direction on each of the outer surfaces of the side walls, the inner surface of the first side wall and the second inner surface of the first side wall are rotated regardless of whether the first reel or the second reel is rotated. The standing pressure portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction between the outer surfaces of the two side walls to generate wind pressure. Therefore, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased in the effect by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have light permeability, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6, which is arranged along a circumferential direction, and wherein the standing portion is erected on a second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed so as to be light transmissive, and the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. Since the plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the second reel through the first reel. In this case, since the standing portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel that is rotated more times than the first reel. In the effect by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased.

<Concept of Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted; and a transmissive member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means. The transmissive member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light emitting means are formed on the transmissive member. In a gaming machine arranged along a curve, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Here, a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and a transmissive member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are formed, the transmissive member is curved, and the plurality of light emitting means are curved of the transmissive member. A gaming machine arranged along the line is known (for example, JP 2013-106672 A). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals in the front view of the transmission member. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (string) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is biased because the interval between the light emitting means adjacent to some of the light emitting means is narrowed. Therefore, heat concentrates on some of the light emitting means, and the life is likely to be shortened.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between adjacent light emitting means in each light emitting means can be constant, and the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means. Can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat from concentrating on some of the light emitting means and to improve the life of each light emitting means.

The gaming machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting unit toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of section screens that are partitioned corresponding to the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the section widths of the plurality of section screens in the front view of the transmission member are set to be substantially the same.

Here, when a plurality of light emitting units are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curve of the transmission member, the plurality of light emission units are arranged at unequal intervals in the front view of the transmission member. The Rukoto. That is, in a front view of the transmissive member, a region where the interval between the light emitting units is narrow and a region where the light emitting unit is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member is provided, and the reflecting member corresponds to a plurality of light emitting means. The section widths of the plurality of section screens in the front view of the transmissive member are set to be substantially the same, so the light amount of each section screen visually recognized in the front view of the transmissive member is approximately Can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. For example, compared to the case where the light emitting surface is circular, Since diffusibility can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one section screen.

The light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the front-view rectangular shape of the light emitting surface means that the front-view shape of the encapsulating resin (front-view shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin) is rectangular.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface is along a tangential direction in a curved shape of the transmission member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged in a direction along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the transmissive member, The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the transmission member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the transmission member can be made uniform.

In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the section screen is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transmission member and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the transmission member, and the light emission surface of the light emitting means is the transmission surface A gaming machine D5, characterized by facing between the member and the section screen.

According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the section screen is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transmissive member and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the transmissive member. Since the surface of the transparent member faces the section screen, the substrate can be disposed in a posture orthogonal to the transparent member. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in disposing the unit including the transmission member, the substrate, and the reflection member. In this case, since the section screen is arranged in such a manner as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected on the section screen is transmitted to the back surface of the transmissive member. Uniform incidence is possible. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the transmission member can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member includes a continuous surface that is continuous with the section screen and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the continuous surface protrudes toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. A gaming machine D6, which is formed as a curved surface.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member includes a continuous surface that is connected to the section screen and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the continuous surface is the light emitting means. Therefore, the light reflected by the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the transmissive member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the transmission member can be made uniform.

<Concept of Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A rotating drum formed in a rotatable manner and a plurality of which are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval; and a decorative member that is disposed between the plurality of rotating drums and has at least a part being light transmissive. And a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and disposed on the back side of the decorative member, and the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. The gaming machine E1 provided with a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

Here, a rotating drum formed in a rotatable manner and a plurality of which are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and disposed between the plurality of rotating drums, and at least a part thereof is light transmissive. A decorative member and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted are provided, and the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. A gaming machine to be installed is known (for example, JP 2013-5927 A). According to this gaming machine,
Not only can the space between the rotating drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also the pattern of the decorative member is formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light emitting means transmitted through the decorative member. It is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the substrate is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently applied to the back surface of the decorative member. The pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. For this reason, there is a problem that the production effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged while the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the reflection member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member is provided, the posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. Even in the case where the substrate is provided, the irradiation range on the back surface of the decorative member by the light emitted from the light emitting means can be widened. Accordingly, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means can be increased accordingly, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means can be increased, the area excluding the pattern can be reduced, so that a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be formed.

In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and has an outer edge extending to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in a front view. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is positioned on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and the outer edge extends to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in front view. Since it is formed to be extended, it is easy to shield the axial end face of the rotating drum from the player (it is difficult to see). In addition, the design of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum can be brought closer to each other. It is easy to form a bodily experience.

In the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the area on the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the design on the decorative member A gaming machine E3 that surrounds a region to be formed, and that the back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the rotating drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted on the substrate and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the area on which the light emitting means is mounted on the substrate And the area where the pattern on the decorative member is formed, and the back surface of the reflective member
Since it is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the rotating drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate, the back surface of the decorative member is secured while ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means. Can be brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and the rotating drum can be inserted into the back side of the back surface of the decorative member (the rotating drum can be moved closer to the substrate). As a result, it is possible to easily shield (is difficult to visually recognize) the axial end surface of the rotating drum from the player, and to easily form a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the board.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the board. Different designs can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member depending on the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other surface.

In this case, the number of substrates disposed between the rotating cylinders arranged side by side can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arrangement | positioning of a board | substrate can be suppressed, it can be made to enter into the back | inner side of the back surface of a decoration member by that much (rotator is brought close to a board | substrate). As a result, it is possible to easily shield (is difficult to visually recognize) the axial end surface of the rotating drum from the player, and to easily form a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

<Concept of Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are arranged opposite to each other and are formed to be displaceable in directions close to or away from each other, and are formed to be displaceable in the same direction with the opposite sides in contact with each other. The base member, and the base member includes the first displacement member and the second member.
A first support mechanism and a second support mechanism for displacably supporting the displacement member, wherein a support mode of the first support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member; The second side which is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member abutted on one side of the second side
A gaming machine F1 characterized in that the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the displacement member.

Here, the first displaceable member and the second displaceable member that are disposed to be opposed to each other and can be displaced in the direction of approaching or separating from each other and that are displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other.
A gaming machine provided with a displacement member is known (for example, JP2013-106844A).
. According to such a gaming machine, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are brought close to a position where the opposing sides come into contact with each other, so that an object (for example, the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, The liquid crystal display device and the production member) are shielded, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in directions away from each other, so that the shield is released along with the displacement and the object can be visually recognized. It is possible to produce an effect. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the same direction (for example, reciprocal displacement in one direction and the other direction) in a state where the opposing sides are in contact with each other, while maintaining shielding of the object. Further, it is possible to perform an effect before the cancellation of the shielding (effect that focuses attention on the cancellation operation of the shielding).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult to closely contact the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed. If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of the effect is hindered.

On the other hand, the gaming machine F1 includes a base member, and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that support the base member to displace the first displacement member and the second displacement member,
The support mode of the first support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member, and is opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. Since the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that is the side, the first displacement member and the second side of the second displacement member are in contact with each other. The support mode of the support mechanism and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated by 180 ° about the center of one side and the other side of the opposite side). Thereby, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the support state is biased to one side, for example, one side and the other side have different structural member rigidity (dimensions, number of components, material, etc.), one side and the other side Different driving forces (for example, size, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) are transmitted from one side to the other, and the connection state (for example, the number of connected parts, the number of connected parts) between one side and the other side is different. (E.g., the amount of shaking), the ease of displacement to the other party on one side and the other side (the biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity,
Examples are those having different displacements (such as resistance during sliding and rotation), and combinations thereof.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are configured such that their own rigid side (low side) is compared with the counterpart low rigidity side (high side). ). Therefore, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes in (moves forward) the other side on the high rigidity side, On the side of low rigidity, a state of accepting (retracting) the opponent can be formed. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first drive unit that generates a driving force, a pair of first connection members that connect the first displacement member to the base member, and the pair of first connection members. The first driving means transmits the driving force of the first driving means to each other and is configured differently from each other.
The second support mechanism includes a second drive unit that generates a driving force, and a pair of second connections that connect the second displacement member to the base member. Members,
A gaming machine comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member that transmit the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connection members, respectively, and have different configurations. F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving unit that generates a driving force, and a pair of first coupling members that couple the first displacement member to the base member. The first support member includes a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member that transmit the driving force of the first driving means to the pair of first connection members, respectively, and the second support mechanism includes: A second driving means for generating a driving force; a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and the driving force of the second driving means is transmitted to the pair of second connecting members, respectively. Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member that are configured differently are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and there is a gap between the opposing sides. It can suppress forming.

In other words, in the state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism has, for example, a higher driving force side or a driving force transmission timing. While the other side is pushed in (moves forward) on the front side, a state in which the other side is accepted (retreats) can be formed on the side where the driving force is small or on the later side. as a result,
The opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as an aspect in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) are different from each other, for example, the rigidity (configuration of the component members) Examples include those with different member dimensions, number of arrangements, materials, etc., components with different connection states (for example, the number of connection parts, amount of rattling of connection parts, etc.), and combinations thereof. Is done. That is, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing differ depending on the difference in these configurations, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is the base member. A game machine F3 that is rotatably supported on the same axis.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the other end side is connected to the member and is pivotally supported on the base member so as to be coaxially rotatable, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other. At this time, even when the bias of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member or the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed between opposing sides. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state when the two are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, at least one of the first coupling member or the second coupling member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member In the state where the second displacement member abuts the opposing sides, the elastic body is interposed in an elastically compressed state between the first connection member and the second connection member. When the second displacement member is reciprocated in the same direction while abutting the opposing sides, the state in which the opposing sides are in contact can be easily maintained even when the bias of the support mode is used.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is a first that generates a driving force.
A drive means, a pair of first connection members that are driven by the first drive means and connect the first displacement member to the base member, and first biasing forces that apply different urging forces to the pair of first connection members, respectively. 1 The one side biasing member and the 1st other side biasing member are provided, The said 2nd support mechanism is driven by the 2nd drive means which generate | occur | produces a driving force, and the said 2nd displacement A pair of second connecting members that connect the member to the base member, and a second one-side biasing member and a second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the pair of second connecting members, respectively. A gaming machine F5 characterized by

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates the driving force, the first driving means, and the first driving mechanism.
A pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, Second
The support mechanism includes a second driving unit that generates a driving force, a pair of second coupling members that are driven by the second driving unit and that couple the second displacement member to the base member, and the pair of second coupling units. Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the members are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the opponent (progresses, for example, on the side with a large biasing force). ) And a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent on the side having a small urging force. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration.
That is, the biasing force applied to each of the pair of first connecting members may be different by changing the position at which the biasing force is applied, or by different elastic deformation amounts. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is a first that generates a driving force.
Driving means, a pair of first connecting members driven by the first driving means and connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and an urging force applied to one of the pair of first connecting members A second urging member that is driven by the second driving unit and that couples the second displacement member to the base member. A gaming machine F6, comprising: a pair of second connecting members; and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates the driving force, the first driving means, and the first driving mechanism.
A pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacement member to the base member; and a first biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. Attached to one of the pair of second connecting members and a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving means and connect the second displacement member to the base member. Since the second urging member for applying the force is provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacing member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the other party on the side on which the urging force is applied, for example ( It is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent on the side where the urging force is not applied. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member is connected to the second member.
A first torsion spring that applies an urging force in a direction to approach the displacement member, and the first connection member is rotated in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member; At least one of a connecting position between one leg of the torsion spring and the first connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding part. Game machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the first leg is formed as a torsion spring and is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member.
Since the first torsion spring is provided that applies an urging force in the direction in which the displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member, the first connecting member is displaced when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction approaching the second displacement member. The driving force of the first driving means necessary for rotating the can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Thus, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position separated from the second displacement member from the stop position, the displacement can be started smoothly. it can.

In this case, as the first connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connection member or the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions of the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where the force is applied is increased, so that the first displacement member approaches the second displacement member. The urging force in the direction to be made can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member is stopped, the displacement can be stopped reliably, so that the damage caused by the collision can be suppressed. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member with the opposite sides in contact with each other
When the displacement member is reciprocally displaced in the same direction, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocal displacement can be increased and the effect of presentation can be improved.

In the gaming machine F7, formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is brought close to the first displacement member. A second torsion spring that applies a biasing force to the first displacement member, and one leg of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. A gaming machine F8, wherein at least one of a connection position between the first connection member and the second connection member or a connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

According to the gaming machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the gaming machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Become. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are the same height (arranged at the position in the gravitational direction), the position where they abut is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravitational direction, and the two are separated from each other. The configuration of the gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the position to be retreated (retreat position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

In the gaming machine F7, the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by the upward displacement in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F7, the first displacement member is moved closer to the second displacement member by the upward displacement in the gravity direction. The urging force in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced upward in the gravitational direction can be strengthened as the position is increased (that is, in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced upward in the gravitational direction as the first displacement member is positioned upward in the gravitational direction). Can be weakened).

Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced (raised) from the stopped state toward the upper side in the gravitational direction, the displacement (rise) can be started smoothly and the raised first displacement member is stopped. In this case, the displacement can be stopped reliably by not only the action of gravity but also the urging force is weakened. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage accompanying the collision with the second displacement member.
On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member displaced (lowered) downward in the gravitational direction, the biasing force is strengthened, so that the biasing force counters the action of the gravity that continues to descend. be able to. As a result, the first displacement member can be reliably stopped.

In the gaming machine F9, formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member. A second torsion spring for applying an urging force to the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by a displacement upward in a gravitational direction, and the second displacement member is moved to the first displacement member. As the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to approach the second
At least one of a connecting position between one leg of the torsion spring and the second connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding part. Game machine F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F9, one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is formed as a torsion spring. A second torsion spring for applying a biasing force in a direction away from the first displacement member;
Since the displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the upward displacement in the gravity direction, when the second displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the first displacement member, that is, the second displacement member is moved in the gravity direction. When it is necessary to displace (raise) against this, the driving force of the second driving means required to rotate the first connecting member can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring.
Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the second displacement member is brought closer to the first displacement member, the connection position of one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions of the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the length of the distance from the winding portion to the force application position. The urging force in the direction (the direction of raising upward in the direction of gravity) can be weakened. Therefore,
For example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed. Can be improved and the production effect can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Independent drum before drum)
When the determination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means A privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player, wherein the identification information is composed of a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols, and the gaming machine A gaming machine G1 comprising: dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing the row; and switching means for switching operation contents dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (symbol) for showing a jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface A gaming machine including a display device (for example, a reel-type display device or a belt-type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Issue gazette). The above-mentioned gaming machine notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating the medium on which the symbols are actually printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, since the variable display can be executed only in a predetermined display mode (display mode that only displays printed symbols) and the variation of the effect display becomes scarce, the player can enter the game. There was a problem of getting bored early. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that has improved the fun of the game by diversifying the variation display variation.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the operation content in which the symbol sequence is dynamically displaced is switched by the switching means, it is possible to switch various effects due to the dynamic displacement of the symbol sequence, and the player gets bored with the game early. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the troubles.

  In the gaming machine G1, the identification information is composed of a first symbol row constituted by a plurality of symbols and a second symbol row that can be arranged on the front side or the rear side of the first symbol row. The dynamic displacement means is configured to displace the direction in which the first symbol row is dynamically displaced and the direction in which the second symbol row is dynamically displaced in a different direction, and the switching unit includes: The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the operation content is switched by switching the visual state between the first symbol row and the second symbol row.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G1, the visual state is switched by the switching means, so that it is possible for the player to switch between the first symbol row and the second symbol row for visual recognition. There is an effect that the excitement of the game can be improved by showing the dynamic displacement that is displaced in different directions.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first symbol row is arranged on the rear surface side of the second symbol row, and the second symbol row has a transmission portion that makes the first symbol row visible. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the switching means is configured to vary the operation content visible to the player by varying the position of the second symbol row.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the visual state of the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be changed by changing the position of the visible transmitting portion, and various displays are possible. There is an effect that can be performed.

  In either the gaming machine G2 or G3, a plurality of the first symbol sequences are arranged so that the determination result is notified by a combination of symbols of each symbol sequence when the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped. The second symbol sequence is configured by one symbol sequence, and the determination result is notified by one symbol when the symbol sequence is stopped. A gaming machine G4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the number of symbol rows differs between the first symbol row and the second symbol row. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Drum in normal time, 7 segments in short time)
Determination means capable of executing determination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means; dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing the identification information displayed on the display means; In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a plurality of different gaming states are provided. A settable gaming state setting unit, and a dynamic displacement mode determining unit that determines a mode of dynamic displacement by the dynamic displacement unit corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting unit. And the identification information is composed of a plurality of different symbols, and indicates the determination result by combining the plurality of different symbols, and the dynamic displacement means is the gaming card When the first gaming state is set by the setting means, the plurality of different symbols are displaced in a predetermined order and dynamically displaced, and the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. In the case of a plurality of different symbols, the gaming machine is configured such that it can be displaced dynamically from one symbol to another arbitrary symbol. H1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (symbol) for showing a jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface A gaming machine including a display device (for example, a reel-type display device or a belt-type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Issue gazette). The above-mentioned gaming machine notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating the medium on which the symbols are actually printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, since only the variable display according to the order of the printed symbols can be executed, the player can easily predict the game result (identification information (the symbol to be stopped)), and the player There was a problem of getting bored early in the game. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

  According to the gaming machine H1, since the effect is such that the displacement content of the symbol differs depending on the gaming state, it is possible to switch between a case where the symbol type to be displaced next can be predicted and an effect that makes prediction difficult. However, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine H1, the identification information includes a symbol row in which the plurality of different symbols are arranged and a display symbol in which a part of the plurality of different symbols is lit and displayed. The displacement means is for dynamically displacing the symbol row in the first gaming state, and for dynamically displacing the display symbol by controlling lighting in the second gaming state. A gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the symbol row is dynamically displaced in the first gaming state, and in the second gaming state, the display symbol is dynamically displaced by lighting control. In the second gaming state, it can be dynamically displaced in a short time, and there is an effect that it is possible to produce a short time effect.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the dynamic displacement mode determination means has a longer dynamic period when the first gaming state is set than when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine H3 that is configured to easily determine a dynamic displacement mode.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, in the first gaming state, a longer dynamic period than the second period is easily determined. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player of the dynamic displacement of the symbol.

<Feature I group> (Variable display area size)
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect, an effect means having an effect execution area in which an effect by the effect execution means is executed, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed In a gaming machine having a privilege granting unit, the game machine includes: a variable unit that varies the production execution region; and a variable control unit that varies the production execution region by the variable unit corresponding to the production to be executed. A gaming machine I1 characterized by this.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) for indicating a jackpot lottery result has been printed in order to execute an effect display on the game board surface to indicate the jackpot lottery result ( For example, a gaming machine including a display device (for example, a reel-type display device or a belt-type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating a reel or a belt has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Publication). The above-described gaming machine can make the player interested in the variable display, but since the apparatus is actually controlled by driving the apparatus, the liquid crystal display device is used. There is a problem in that it is difficult to vary the presentation mode of the variable display as compared with the conventional game machine used, and the interest of the game cannot be improved. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

  According to the gaming machine I1, since the effect execution area is changed corresponding to the effect to be executed, the effect that is being executed can be determined also by the effect execution area, and the executed effect is made easy to understand. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine I1 has an effect period determining means for determining an effect execution period to be executed by the effect execution means, and the effect execution means has a plurality of consecutive times within the effect execution period determined by the effect period determination means. The game machine is configured to be capable of executing a continuous effect in which the effect to be performed is executed, and wherein the variable control means varies the effect execution area in accordance with the number of executions of the continuous effect. I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1, the production execution area is changed in accordance with the number of executions of the continuous production, so the number of executions of the continuous production can be identified by the production execution area. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to make the game easy to understand.

  The gaming machine I1 or I2 includes a determination unit capable of executing determination, and the effect execution unit displays a stop after displaying a combination of a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged, The combination of each symbol sequence stopped and displayed on the effective line is configured to indicate the determination result by the determining means, and the effective line corresponds to the fact that the effect execution area is variable by the variable means. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it is set to be increased or decreased.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the effective line increases or decreases in accordance with the performance executed by the performance execution means, so that the player can expect various hits. It has the effect that it can be held and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Directing to create an effective line)
When the determination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means In addition, in the gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, the identification information is configured to be able to indicate the determination result by combining a plurality of symbols, After dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols, a dynamic display means capable of stopping and displaying the plurality of symbols in a combination for indicating the determination result on a predetermined active line, and a specific condition is established In this case, the gaming machine J1 has an effective line setting means capable of setting a specific effective line different from the effective line.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs) for displaying a jackpot lottery result have been printed in order to execute an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. Provided with a display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating a medium (for example, a reel or a belt), a plurality of identification information (stopped and displayed at a specific display position) There has been proposed a gaming machine that informs the player of the jackpot lottery result by a combination of symbols) (for example, JP-A-2003-144675). The gaming machine described above has a fixed display position at which identification information (symbol) is stopped and displayed in order to indicate the jackpot lottery result. There is a problem that the player is bored with the game at an early stage. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the specific effective line different from the predetermined effective line is set by the effective line setting means, so that the determination result specific to the predetermined effective line In addition to the display of the symbol for indicating the game, it can be expected that the specific condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, in addition to the plurality of symbols, the gaming machine J1 has a symbol display unit capable of displaying a symbol, and the effective line setting unit includes the symbol display unit and a part of the plurality of symbols. A gaming machine J2 is characterized in that when a specific combination is obtained as a result of combining, a specific effective line is set as establishment of the specific condition.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, a specific condition is established by a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, so that the interest is not limited to symbols displayed on a predetermined effective line. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine J2, the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is configured to start dynamic display when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed among the plurality of symbols. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the dynamic display is started when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the display of the specific symbol is expected to be displayed and the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine J3, the symbol display means is configured to dynamically display symbols by switching between a lighting state and a light-off state.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are dynamically displayed by switching between the lighting state and the extinguishing state. There is an effect that can be displayed.

<Characteristic K group> (7-segment display and short-time display)
When the determination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means In a game machine having a privilege granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player, a game in which a specific game state in which the determination by the determination means can be easily performed during a period until a specific condition is satisfied Characterized in that it comprises state setting means and notifying means for notifying a player of information corresponding to a remaining period until the specific condition is satisfied using at least a part of the identification information. A gaming machine K1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a display means (7-segment display) that performs lighting control and light-off control for seven segments in order to execute an effect display for showing a jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A gaming machine provided with a display device has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2002-11180). In addition, in a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display, it is possible to set a gaming state (for example, a short time state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and to display a remaining period on which the short state can be set on the liquid crystal display A gaming machine having a function (for example, a function for displaying the number of short remaining times) has also been proposed. By the way, since the gaming machine equipped with the 7-segment display device described above can only inform the player of information using seven segments, the gaming machine equipped with the conventional liquid crystal display can be compared with the player. Since the amount of information that can be notified decreases, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to notify the player of the above short time count. In addition, if a dedicated display means for executing the short remaining time display is provided, there is a problem that the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine increases. An object of the present invention is to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player by enabling the short-time remaining number to be notified by using a 7-segment display device that executes an effect display for showing a jackpot lottery result. And

  In the gaming machine K1, the display means has a 7-segment display unit, and the identification information is configured by symbols displayed by the 7-segment display unit.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, after dynamically displaying the identification information, a dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification result in a mode for indicating the determination result, and a period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the dynamic display means And a dynamic display period determining means for determining the game machine K3.

  In the gaming machine K3, after the identification information is stopped and displayed, a regulation for setting a regulation period for regulating the dynamic display of the identification information until the next dynamic display of the identification information is started. A game machine K4, comprising: a period setting means.

  In the gaming machine K3, after the temporary stop display is performed in the mode for indicating the determination result by the identification information in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit, A gaming machine K5, which is displayed by switching to a mode showing information.

<Characteristic L group> The number of effective lines can be varied by rotating the shutter. A determination unit capable of executing determination, a display unit for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and a display unit When the identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, the identification information is obtained by combining a plurality of symbols. The determination result is configured to be displayed, and after dynamically displaying the plurality of symbols, the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination for indicating the determination result on a predetermined effective line. A game machine L1 having dynamic display means capable of performing the above.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (symbol) for showing a jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface A gaming machine including a display device (for example, a reel-type display device or a belt-type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Issue gazette). The above-mentioned gaming machine notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating the medium on which the symbols are actually printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, since the variable display can be executed only in a predetermined display mode (display mode that only displays printed symbols) and the variation of the effect display becomes scarce, the player can enter the game. There was a problem of getting bored early. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that has improved the fun of the game by diversifying the variation display variation.

  According to the gaming machine L1, after a plurality of symbols are dynamically displayed, a plurality of symbols can be stopped and displayed in a combination for indicating a determination result on a predetermined effective line. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the game.

  The gaming machine L1 has a variable member capable of changing the size of the display area of the display means, and the variable member is variable, whereby the size of the display area is changed, whereby the effective A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the line is increased or decreased.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the effective line is increased or decreased by changing the variable member. Therefore, by changing the variable member, the degree of expectation for a specific determination result is changed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic M group> (BGM (stop sound) at the time of symbol stop is defined as a sharp BGM (stop sound))
In a gaming machine having determination means capable of executing determination, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, Dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit, and dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit A voice output means capable of outputting voice during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice type for setting a voice type output by the voice output means Setting means, wherein the voice type setting means sets the voice type according to the stop timing of the identification information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting unit. To do Gaming machine M1, characterized in that it.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has performed an effect display for showing a lottery result using a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board surface, and supports the effect display. There was something that played the voice that was made. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that enables a player to set a desired sound by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound (for example, JP-A-2006-73432). . By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, but cannot adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing that should be emphasized (for example, the timing at which a part of the identification information for indicating the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the reproduced sound is emphasized and output (timing to beat a beat) There was a problem that. As described above, if the emphasis timing of the effect display is different from the audio emphasis timing, it is difficult to easily notify the timing to be watched among the effects to be executed for the player. There is a problem that it is not possible to execute production (production display) and auditory production (sound output) as production with a sense of unity. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine M1, since the type of sound can be set according to the stop timing of the identification information, it is possible to output a sound according to the stop timing of the identification information, and to produce an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity. There is an effect that it can be set.

  In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display means can dynamically display a plurality of symbol sequences formed from a plurality of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting unit differs between the plurality of symbol sequences. A dynamic display mode for stopping and displaying at a timing is set, and the voice type setting means sets the same voice type at each timing for stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol strings. A gaming machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, since the same type of sound can be output in accordance with a plurality of stop timings set by the dynamic display mode setting means, the identification information is displayed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a direct experience.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the voice output means can output a second voice different from the voice set by the voice type setting means, and the voice set by the voice type setting means An output timing determining means for determining a timing at which the second sound is output; and a correcting means for correcting an output mode of the second sound based on a determination result of the output timing determining means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine M3, since the output mode of the second sound can be corrected based on the determination result of the output timing between the sound output based on the stop timing of the identification information and the second sound, the identification information There is an effect that the sound output based on the stop timing can be output with priority over other sounds.

  In the gaming machine M3, when the output timing discriminating unit overlaps the output timing of the sound and the output timing of the second sound within a predetermined period, the correction means outputs the second sound. A gaming machine M4, which is prohibited.

  According to the gaming machine M4, when the voice output in synchronization with the stop timing of the identification information overlaps with other voices, the output of other voices is prohibited. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to hear the voice being played.

  The gaming machine M4 has a volume adjusting unit that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit or the second sound, and the correction unit prohibits the output of the second sound. The game machine M5 is characterized in that the volume of the second sound is adjusted to mute by a volume adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine M5, the first sound can be heard preferentially to the player simply by adjusting the volume corresponding to the second sound, and thus the processing of the correcting means can be simplified. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the second voice is a music that is continuously output at least during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the music is output as the second sound during the dynamic display period of the identification information, so that the effect of the presentation can be enhanced. There is.

  In the gaming machine M6, the output timing discriminating means discriminates the timing at which the sound is output and the timing of the beat of the music.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M6, the timing of outputting the sound and the timing of the beat of the music are determined by the output timing determining means, so that the sound output from the sound output means is appropriate It is possible to discriminate between the two, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the voice type setting unit is configured to set the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting unit when the determination result of the determination unit is the predetermined determination result. The gaming machine M8 is characterized in that it sets the type of the sound output at a timing different from the stop timing of the identification information included in the game.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, the output timing of the voice is intentionally changed from the stop timing of the identification information. Since it can be shifted, it is possible to notify a game result advantageous to the player with a sense of incongruity, and to provide an unexpected game to the player.

<Feature N group> (Drum scroll speed is changed by BGM with different tempo)
In a gaming machine having determination means capable of executing determination, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, Dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit, and dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit A voice output means capable of outputting voice during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice type for setting a voice type output by the voice output means A voice type discriminating unit for discriminating the voice type set by the voice type setting unit, and the dynamic display mode setting unit is based on a discrimination result of the voice type discriminating unit. The above Gaming machine N1, characterized in that it is intended to set with different dynamic display mode different information.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has performed an effect display for showing a lottery result using a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board surface, and supports the effect display. There was something that played the voice that was made. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that enables a player to set a desired sound by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound (for example, JP-A-2006-73432). . By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, but cannot adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing that should be emphasized (for example, the timing at which a part of the identification information for indicating the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the reproduced sound is emphasized and output (timing to beat a beat) There was a problem that. As described above, if the emphasis timing of the effect display is different from the audio emphasis timing, it is difficult to easily notify the timing to be watched among the effects to be executed for the player. There is a problem that it is not possible to execute production (production display) and auditory production (sound output) as production with a sense of unity. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine N1, since the dynamic display mode can be varied based on the determination result of the audio type determination unit, a dynamic display mode that does not give a sense of incongruity to the sound output by the audio output unit is set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect without a sense of incongruity for the player.

  In the gaming machine N1, the sound type setting means is configured to be able to set at least a first sound type and a second sound type having a faster tempo than the first sound type as the sound type, The dynamic display mode setting means is configured to set the dynamic display speed of the identification information differently according to the tempo of the voice type set by the voice type setting means. .

  According to the gaming machine N2, the dynamic display speed can be varied in accordance with the tempo of the sound output from the sound output means, so that there is a sense of unity between the output sound and the set dynamic display mode. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the voice type setting means sets the voice type based on the determination result of the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine N3, it is possible to make the player predict the determination result of the determination means depending on the type of sound to be output, and thus it is possible to make the player interested in the aspect of the sound to be output. effective. Furthermore, since the dynamic display mode according to the voice type set based on the determination result of the determination unit is set, the determination result of the determination unit can be easily predicted.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, there is provided stop display mode setting means for setting a stop display mode of the identification information based on a determination result of the determination unit, and the dynamic display mode setting unit is configured to detect the voice type A first dynamic display mode set based on the determination result of the means, and a second dynamic display for stopping and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode in the stop display mode A gaming machine N4 characterized in that at least a mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine N4, the identification information can be surely stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means even if the dynamic display mode according to the set voice type is set. The determination result of the determination means can be notified to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine N4, the dynamic display mode setting means sets a dynamic display speed of the second dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display speed set as the first dynamic display mode. A gaming machine N5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine N5, the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means even if the dynamic display speed according to the set voice type is set. There is an effect that the determination result of the means can be notified to the player in an easily understandable manner.

<Characteristic O group> (Derivation of control in which BGM (stopping sound) at the time of symbol stop is sharp BGM (stopping sound))
In a gaming machine having determination means capable of executing determination, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, Dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit, and dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit A voice output means capable of outputting voice during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice type for setting a voice type output by the voice output means Setting means, wherein the voice type setting means sets the voice type according to information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting unit. Characterized by Tricks machine O1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has performed an effect display for showing a lottery result using a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board surface, and supports the effect display. There was something that played the voice that was made. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that enables a player to set a desired sound by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound (for example, JP-A-2006-73432). . By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, but cannot adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing that should be emphasized (for example, the timing at which a part of the identification information for indicating the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the reproduced sound is emphasized and output (timing to beat a beat) There was a problem that. As described above, if the emphasis timing of the effect display is different from the audio emphasis timing, it is difficult to easily notify the timing to be watched among the effects to be executed for the player. There is a problem that it is not possible to execute production (production display) and auditory production (sound output) as production with a sense of unity. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine O1, since it is possible to set the type of sound according to the set dynamic display mode, it is possible to output the sound according to the dynamic display mode, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that can be set.

<Characteristic P group> (BGM at the time of symbol stop is matched by making the tempo of the song the same, and a stop sound is set according to the tempo of the song and the symbol stop timing)
In a gaming machine having determination means capable of executing determination, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, Dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit, and dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit A voice output means capable of outputting voice during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and a voice type for setting a voice type output by the voice output means Setting means, voice type discrimination means for discriminating the voice type set by the voice type setting means, and the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means satisfy a predetermined display condition. And a specific voice setting unit for setting a specific voice output by the voice output unit based on a discrimination result of the timing discrimination unit and a discrimination result of the voice type discrimination unit. A gaming machine P1 characterized by being a thing.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has performed an effect display for showing a lottery result using a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board surface, and supports the effect display. There was something that played the voice that was made. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that enables a player to set a desired sound by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound (for example, JP-A-2006-73432). . By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine can adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, but cannot adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing that should be emphasized (for example, the timing at which a part of the identification information for indicating the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed) is different from the timing at which the reproduced sound is emphasized and output (timing to beat a beat) There was a problem that. As described above, if the emphasis timing of the effect display is different from the audio emphasis timing, it is difficult to easily notify the timing to be watched among the effects to be executed for the player. There is a problem that it is not possible to execute production (production display) and auditory production (sound output) as production with a sense of unity. In the above gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the specific sound can be set based on the determination result of the timing determination means and the determination result of the sound type determination means, so that the dynamic display of the identification information and the output sound It is possible to set specific sound corresponding to any of them, and there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol strings formed from a plurality of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting means is different for the plurality of symbol strings. A dynamic display mode for stopping and displaying at a timing is set, and the timing determining means determines a timing at which the symbol sequence stops as a timing that satisfies the predetermined display condition. Machine P2.

  According to the gaming machine P2, the specific sound can be set in accordance with the timing at which each symbol sequence stops, so that the specific sound suitable for the dynamic display mode to be executed can be set, and the effect is enhanced. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine P2, the sound type setting means sets any one sound type from a plurality of sound types with different timings of the beats of the sound to be output. A gaming machine P3 characterized by discriminating the timing of beats of the voice type set by the voice type setting means.

  According to the gaming machine P3, the specific sound can be set in accordance with the timing of the beat of the sound output from the sound output means.

  In the gaming machine P3, the specific sound setting unit is configured to set a specific sound in which a beat corresponding to the timing determined by the timing determination unit and the timing of the beat of the sound type determined by the sound type determination unit is set. A gaming machine P4, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine P4, since the beat corresponding to the stop timing of each symbol row and the timing of the beat of the voice is set as the specific voice, the dynamic display mode and the voice are integrated with the specific voice that is output. This has the effect of improving the fun of the game.

  The gaming machine P4 includes a specific voice storage unit that stores a plurality of the specific voices in advance, and the specific voice setting unit converts the specific voice corresponding to the voice type set by the voice type setting unit to the specific voice. A gaming machine P5, which is set by reading from the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine P5, the specific voice corresponding to the voice type is stored in the specific voice storage unit in advance, so that the process for setting the specific voice can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine P5, the specific voice storage means stores a plurality of specific voices having different beat intervals of the specific voice.

  According to the gaming machine P6, the specific voice can be set in accordance with the interval between the stop timing of the symbol sequence and the timing of the beat of the voice, so that there is an effect that the characteristic voice can be easily set.

  In the gaming machine P5 or P6, the specific voice storage means stores a plurality of specific voices having different output periods.

  According to the gaming machine P7, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific sound is output unnecessarily for a long period by changing the length of the period in which the specific sound is output.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any one of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device 81 (dynamic display means)
226 Audio output device (audio output means)
S305 determination means S1104 privilege grant means S2263 dynamic display mode setting means S2651 voice type setting means

Claims (5)

Determination means capable of executing determination;
In a gaming machine having privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result,
Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means;
Dynamic display mode setting means for setting a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit;
Voice output means capable of outputting voice during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means;
Voice type setting means for setting the type of voice output by the voice output means,
The voice type setting means sets the voice type according to the stop timing of the identification information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting unit. To play. The dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol strings formed from a plurality of identification information,
The dynamic display mode setting means sets a dynamic display mode for stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol sequences at different timings,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the voice type setting means sets the same voice type at each timing of stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol sequences. The voice output means is capable of outputting a second voice different from the voice set by the voice type setting means.
Output timing discrimination means for discriminating the timing at which the voice set by the voice type setting means and the second voice are output;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a correcting unit that corrects an output mode of the second sound based on a determination result of the output timing determining unit.   The correction means prohibits the output of the second sound when the output timing of the sound and the output timing of the second sound overlap within a predetermined period by the output timing determination means. The gaming machine according to claim 3. Volume adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume of the voice output by the voice output means or the second voice,
5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein when the correction means prohibits the output of the second sound, the sound volume adjustment means adjusts the sound volume of the second sound to mute.

Images